Home

NEC Express5800/GT110b User's Guide

1. 1 2 3 RJ _ gt o oo oo E pega oo oo S 4 Y oo o o U a eel PEER Sall U Jel e e fo U z l Y Y a S mAH h 11 i a L LY T e Souq Oly a N E E UY f T T a 5 U BS U 10 oe zF aa T ia a 3O ef ey B o 2 HA jE scn m EMH E z y a 5 ee oO 9 8 7 6 Power supply DIMM slots Optical disk drive 5 25 inch device bay An optical disk drive is factory installed in bottom bay PCI guide rail Hard disk drive cage Hard disk drive optional Mother board Processor cooling fan PCI board retention spring Rear cooling fan hODND OONOW _ General Description 2 9 When optional 2 5 inch hard disk drive cage is installed 1 2 3 jo c Ca
2. C gt c gt c gt _ Ju U U 3 2 1 a U 0 SS Iz SH eJ 9 26 Upgrading Your Server Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID RAID Controller is factory embedded in your mother board Setting RAID configuration jumper switch allows internal hard disk drives to be recognized as RAID drives Use LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility to configure the RAID System See Chapter 4 for details Optional RAID Controller N8103 109 116A 117A Your server can include the optional RAID Controller N8103 109 116A 117A The optional RAID Controller can control the internal hard disk drives as the RAID System When configuring the internal hard disk drive as a RAID system by installing an optional RAID controller N8103 109 116A 117A use the following optional cable instead of the interface cable supplied with the server When using a 3 5 inch hard disk drive m K410 221 00 internal SAS cable When using a 2 5 inch hard disk drive m K410 220 00 internal SAS cable At the factory the interface cable is connected to the serial ATA connector on the mother board Refer to the manual coming with optional RAID Controller N8103 109
3. Slot 1 Size Capacity Serial No factory installe Model name Type number Date Installed d optical disk drive Slot 2 Size Capacity Serial No Model name Type number Date Installed PCI Slot 1 Model name Serial No Date Installed PCI Slot 2 Model name Serial No Date Installed PCI Slot 3 Model name Serial No Date Installed PCI Slot 4 Model name Serial No Date Installed Printer Model name Serial No Manufacturer Date Installed External Peripheral Device 1 Model name Serial No Manufacturer Date Installed External Peripheral Device 2 Model name Serial No Manufacturer Date Installed External Peripheral Device 3 Model name Serial No Manufacturer Date Installed External Peripheral Device 4 Model name Serial No Manufacturer Date Installed Product Configuration Record Table l 3 Software i E OS Name Version Application of RUR media O Apply Name Version File system O FAT O HPFS i NTFS O Others Ga a Licensed software installed Application running when a failure occurred o l 4 Product Configuration Record Table This page is intentionally left blank
4. 9 6 Upgrading Your Server 3 Loosen the two screws 080 ge 08080808080 0209020209020209020 0808080808 08080808084 29580962869690909096 o8o8oSa8o8o8o8o8o08o 4 Hold the side cover securely to remove it Upgrading Your Server 9 7 5 Slowly and gently lay down the server so that its right side faces the floor 9 8 Upgrading Your Server Installation The side cover can be installed in the reverse procedure of the removal Make sure that the hooks on the side cover are inserted into the frames and holes of the server securely IMPORTANT After one or more optional devices are installed or removed completely install the removed side cover securely Hooks on top Holes Hooks on front Frame to Insert a lock engage Hooks on bottom plate here Lock plate Holes with hooks Secure the side cover with two screws removed in the removal procedure Screws FADYVIOR A scf Upgrading Your Server 9 9 Front Bezel The front bezel m
5. Troubleshooting 8 3 LAMPS The following describes lamps on the server and their indications See Chapter 2 for each location TITTET eTe oar 989898989808980809080800 9828259995952925258000 90 9809086859090 90858090 90 O808o8o8o8o8o8o8o8o08o808 Access lamp WI LINK ACT lamp S _ POWER SLEEP lamp Disk access lamp 1000 100 10 i lamp Ia e D OG FRONT 8 4 Troubleshooting POWER SLEEP Lamp The green POWER SLEEP lamp lights to indicate normal operation while the server is powered When the server is off powered the POWER SLEEP lamp stays unlit The POWER SLEEP lamp indicates that the server is running in the power saving mode sleep mode If the OS supports the power saving mode such as Windows pressing the POWER SLEEP switch blinks the POWER SLEEP lamp in green and places the server in the power saving mode Press the POWER SLEEP switch to turn out the POWER SLEEP lamp and place the server back in the normal mode The power saving mode is only available when the OS supports the power saving feature Some OS s allow you to set the server to automatically turn in the power saving mode when no access is made to the server for a certain period of time or to
6. 2 6 General Description 10 11 12 AC inlet The AC inlet is connected with the power cord Fixing screws Secures the side cover Cover lock plate Installing a theft prevention device protects the internal components of the server from being stolen Mouse connector The mouse connector is connected with the mouse coming with the server Keyboard connector The keyboard connector is connected with keyboard coming with the server USB connectors The USB connectors are connected with devices accepting the USB interface Serial port A connector The serial port connector is used to connect the server to a device with the serial interface The server cannot be directly connected to a leased line through the connector Note If N8117 01A is connected the connector on N8117 01A side becomes serial port B connector Display connector The display connector is connected with the display unit LAN connector The LAN connector is connected with a network system on LAN 1000BASE T 100BASETX 10BASE T Link ACT lamp The Link ACT lamp shows the LAN access status 1000 100 10 lamp 1000 100 10 lamp indicates the LAN transfer rate Dump switch Press this switch when collecting memory dump NOTE Consult with your service representative before collecting memory dump Collecting memory dump while the server is in the successful operation may affect the system operation General Description 2 7
7. 9 58 Upgrading Your Server 8 Insert the optional DVD SuperMULTI drive in the place from where the factory installed optical disk drive was removed 9 Secure the optional DVD SuperMULTI drive with the screws removed in Step 4 Screw Set 504 10 Connect the interface and power cables removed in Step 3 to the optional DVD SuperMULTI drive 11 Install the components you have removed in earlier steps Removal The optional DVD SuperMULTI drive can be removed in the reverse order of the installation Chapter 10 Internal Cabling Diagrams Internal cable connections of the server are shown below NOTE See Chapter 2 for detail connector locations on the motherboard 10 2 Internal Cabling Diagrams INTERFACE CABLES This section describes the connections of the interface cables Addition of Hard Disk Drive The connection required when a hard disk drive is added is described below Installation of SATA Disks and SSDs Connected to On board SATA Controller If the serial ATA SATA hard disk drives and SSDs are added connect the cables as shown in the figure below Fill the hard disk drive cage with the hard disk drives from the bottom to top 5 25 inch device bay Mother board 4th hard disk drive lt __ 3rd hard disk drive amp 2nd hard disk drive _ ist hard disk drive Hes SATA cable for
8. Configuring Your Server 4 33 Operating Procedures for Configuration Utility Creating Adding Configuration Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility AA Set new configuration information pack virtual drive settings Y Check the virtual drive settings y Initialize virtual drive y Perform Consistency Check y Exit LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility 1 Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility 2 Select Configure gt New Configuration from the TOP menu Management Menu Select View add Configuration to add configuration IMPORTANT m Creating a configuration using New Configuration menu clears the existing configuration information To add configuration information to the existing configuration select View add Configuration m You cannot create Striping of RAID1 or set the virtual drive capacity on Easy Configuration menu Use New Configuration or View Add Configuration instead 4 34 Configuring Your Server 3 When a confirmation message Proceed is displayed select Yes The SCAN DEVICE starts scanning information is displayed at the bottom of the screen Upon completion of SCAN DEVICE the New Configuration ARRAY SELECTION MENU screen appears New Configuration ARRAY SELECTION MENU PORT 4 Move the cursor onto the hard disk drive to be packed by using cursor key and then press
9. The partition size required for a system with an installed memory size of 1GB 1 024MB and a full installation of the operating system 8 000MB 1 024MB 1 5 1 024MB 300MB application size 10 860MB application size If the provided partition size is smaller than that required to install the OS and paging file expand the partition size or utilize a larger disk If your system does not have a sufficient dump file size divide the required file space into multiple disks by performing the steps below 1 Set the system partition size to a size sufficient to install the OS and paging file 2 See Setting for Solving Problems to write the debug information of the dump file onto another disk If there is not enough disk space to write the debug information add another disk for the dump file BitLocker If you use BitLocker note the following m Be sure to keep the recovery password secure Do not keep it around a server running BitLocker IMPORTANT Without the recovery password you cannot start the operating system and see the partition content encrypted by BitLocker The recovery password may be needed when you start the operating system after performing the following tasks Replacing the motherboard Initializing the TPM Changing the BIOS setting Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 D 5 m Windows Server 2008 is not installed in the partition encrypted by BitLocker m For BitLocker ho
10. 1 Log on to the system with the account that has administrative privilege e g administrator 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of server The Autorun Menu will be displayed 3 Left click on Setup Windows and then click Update the system NOTE Right clicking on the Autorun Menu produces the same outcome 4 Follow the message of the screen to proceed the application OK dialog box will be displayed Installing Windows Server 2003 G 15 Updating the system x 9 Setup is going to Updating the System Rs If you apply the update process click OK If you wish to cancel the update process click Cancel i Cancel NOTE The following box appears during the update if you have deployed a full installation of Windows Server 2003 Wait until the update completes Updating the system S Performing Updating the System Please wait for a while gt gt Checking the OS information Updating the drivers Performing the end process of Updating the System 5 When the following message appears Updating the System was finished Updating the system x p Updating the System was finished The setup will apply the Service Pack continuously If you want to continue applying click Yes IF you want to stop applying click No No When you apply Service Pack Click Yes and then go to Step 6 When you don t apply Service Pack Cli
11. 2 Type slmgr ipk lt PID gt and press Enter PID is your product key on the COA label cx Administrator C Windows system32 cmd exe Microsoft Windows Version 6 6 60611 Copyright lt c gt 2666 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved C Users Administrator gt slmgr ipk KKRKKK RRRKRKR RRRRR RRKKK KRRARRR_ 3 Type slmgr dti to obtain an installation ID for Windows activation and press Enter cs Administrator C Windows system32 cmd exe Microsoft Windows Version 6 6 66611 Copyright lt c gt 2006 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved C Users Administrator gt slmgr dt im 4 See systemroot system32 slui phone inf for the phone number of the Microsoft customer service 5 Call the above number inform the representative of the installation ID which you obtained in step 3 and receive a confirmation ID E 34 Installing Windows Server 2008 6 At the command prompt type sImgr atp lt CID gt and press Enter CID is the confirmation ID that you received from the call center dministrator C Windows system32 cmd exe icrosoft Windows Version 6 0 6001 1 Copyright lt c gt 2666 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved C Users Administrator gt slmgr atp XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX The Windows activation is complete SETTING FOR SOLVING PROBLEMS Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5 Appendix F Installing Windows
12. MICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS MICROSOFT WINDOWS SERVER 2008 STANDARD These license terms are an agreement between Microsoft Corporation or based on where you live one of its affiliates and you Please read them They apply to the software named above which includes the media on which you received it if any The terms also apply to any Microsoft o0 updates QO supplements O Internet based services and support services 1 Collecting information 2 Installing Windows Installing Windows Server 2008 E 13 12 Select the type of installation you want Custom advanced is selected below te Install Windows Which type of installation do you want Upgrade Keep your files settings and programs and upgrade Windows Be sure to back up your files before upgrading Custom advanced Install 2 clean copy of Windows select where you want to install it or make changes to disks and partitions This option does not keep your files settings and programs Help me decide Upgrade has been disabled To upgrade start the installation from Windows 1 Collecting information 2 Installing Windows 13 The screen of Where do you want to install Windows is displayed Q If the N8103 109 116A 117A RAID Controller is used Remove the Backup DVD ROM or Windows Server 2008 DVD ROM and set EXPRESSBUILDER and select Load Driver Load Driver To install the device driver needed t
13. 2 5 inch Hard Disk Drive Cage Option Your server supports the 2 5 inch Hard Disk Drive Cage as an option The 2 5 inch Hard Disk Drive Cage can contain up to four SATA SAS hard disk drives or SSD Solid State Drive IMPORTANT Do not use any hard disk drive or SSD that is not authorized by NEC Installing a third party drives may cause a failure in the server as well as the drives Repair of any failure or damage in the server caused by such drives will be charged NOTE Combining SATA SAS hard disk drives and SSDs SATA SAS hard disk drives and SSDs cannot be combined in BTO products The optional RAID Controller must be used when combining SAS hard disk drives with SSDs Hard disk drives and SSDs cannot be combined within the same RAID group pack SAS hard disk drives with different rotational speed cannot be combined Install the SATA SAS hard disk drives in order from slot 0 and then install the SSDs in the remaining slots Hard disk drive Slot 3 Hard disk drive Slot 2 Hard disk drive Slot 1 Hard disk drive Slot 0 Hard disk drive cage Upgrading Your Server 9 19 Installation Follow the procedure as described below to install 2 5 inch hard disk drive cage 1 Configure the operation mode of hard disk drives according to the manual supplied with the hard disk drive lt When using the SATA hard disk drive gt
14. D 14 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 When the following message appears the installation starts automatically Installing Windows That s all the information we need right now Your computer will restart several times during installation oo Copying Windows files Expanding Windows files 0 Installing features Installing updates Completing installation 1 Collecting information 2 Installing Windows 16 After a full installation of Windows Server 2008 R2 is completed the following dialog box will prompt you to set or change the password before you log on Click OK x The user s password must be changed before logging on the first time Ye Windows Server 2008 Standard Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 D 15 17 Change the password and then click the LPI button Ifyou have selected a full installation i Windows Server 2008 Standard Ifyou have selected a Server Core installation Administrator I Windows Server 2008 Standard NOTE Administrator password that satisfy the next condition are required m More than 6 characters m Contains characters from three of the following categories numbers uppercase letters lowercase letters and signs D 16 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 18 When the following message appears click OK to log on Your password has been changed py i Windows Server2008 Standard 19 Logon to the sys
15. NOTE Use the red cables for even numbered ports and blue cables for odd numbered ports 12 Assemble the server 13 Run BIOS SETUP utility and check to see that the hard disk drive is correctly recognized See Chapter 4 for details Upgrading Your Server 9 17 Removal Follow the procedure as described below to remove 3 5 inch hard disk drives gr oes oe IMPORTANT About data on the hard disk drive Be sure to take appropriate measures not to leak important data e g customers information or companies management information on the removed hard disk drive to any third parties Data seems to be erased when you empty Recycle Bin of Windows or execute the format command of the operating system However the actual data remains written on the hard disk drive Data not erased completely may be restored by special software and used for unexpected purposes It is strongly recommended that the software or service both available at stores for data erasure should be used in order to avoid the trouble explained above For details on data erasure ask your sales representative See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Remove the side cover Follow Steps through 7 of the installation procedure to remove the disk cage Follow Steps 8 and 9 of the installation procedure to remove the hard disk drive Reassemble the server 9 18 Upgrading Your Server
16. Internal View Low power CPU model N8100 1592F 1593F when optional 3 5 inch hard disk drive cage is installed 1 2 3 Ca c CS e o o HE O o oOo U 4 U aul F U 9 Olp 2 Bly oe Ue MY EH U o eu e oe Y p Y r Y Y z S AH Le 11 E T iT fl SS i d amp 10 m Il 1 U T z Is 5 ejl Power supply DIMM slots Optical disk drive 5 25 inch device bay An optical disk drive is factory installed in bottom bay PCI guide rail Hard disk drive cage Hard disk drive optional Mother board Processor cooling fan PCI board retention spring Rear cooling fan COON kOND _ 2 8 General Description High power CPU model N8100 1594F when optional 3 5 inch hard disk drive cage is installed
17. Upgrading Your Server 9 13 5 Remove the four screws securing the hard disk drive cage 6 Remove the 3 5 inch hard disk drive cage IMPORTANT m Be careful not to have the hard disk drive cage hit on any components on the mother board Be careful not to get the hard disk drive cage caught in internal cables 9 14 Upgrading Your Server 7 Place the hard disk drive cage on the anti static table carefully 8 Hold the hard disk drive with the connector side facing toward you and the board side facing downward and then insert the hard disk drive into the slot slowly and gently IMPORTANT Use the screws screw set 504 provided with the server to secure it Using screws longer than the required length may cause the hard disk drive to be damaged 9 15 Upgrading Your Server 9 Align the guide on the support bracket then insert the hard disk drive cage into the server carefully IMPORTANT m Be careful not to make the hard disk drive cage hit on any components on the mother board m When inserting the cage be careful not to have the hard disk drive damage the cables Secure the hard disk drive cage with the four screws removed in step 5 10 9 16 Upgrading Your Server 11 Connect the interface cable and power cable to the hard disk drive Connect cables removed in step 4
18. About the Windows family This computer supports the following Windows editions m Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition hereinafter referred to as Windows Server 2003 NOTE Express Setup does not support the installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions If you want to install it see Appendix F On installing other OS contact sales dealer or the maintenance service representative BIOS Settings Confirm the BIOS settings described in Chapter 4 before installing Windows Server 2003 5 56 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to the server supports following combination of the OS installation media and Service Pack m Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition OS installation media with Service Pack 2 OS installation media No Service Pack Service Pack 2 OS installation media No Service Pack m Windows Server 2003 R2 OS installation media with Service Pack 2 OS installation media No Service Pack Service Pack 2 OS installation media No Service Pack Supported Mass Storage Controllers The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system supports the following mass storage controllers for installation NOTE If you want to install the other boards by using a driver floppy disk OEM Disk for Mass storage device except ones listed below see Installing with the OEM D
19. Hard disk drive Cage to Install Serial ATA connector on mother board First hard disk drive Slot 0 Serial ATA connector 0 Second hard disk drive Slot 1 Serial ATA connector 1 Third hard disk drive Slot 2 Serial ATA connector 2 Fourth hard disk drive Slot 3 Serial ATA connector 3 Serial ATA connector 0 Serial ATA connector 1 Serial ATA connector 3 Serial ATA connector 2 Mother board lt When using the SAS hard disk drive gt Hard disk drive Cage to Install SAS connector on SAS RAID Controller First hard disk drive Slot 0 SAS RAID Controller Second hard disk drive Slot 1 N8103 109F 116F 117F Third hard disk drive Slot 2 Fourth hard disk drive Slot 3 9 20 Upgrading Your Server See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare 2 Remove the side cover and front bezel 3 Remove the 3 5 inch hard disk drive cage 4 inch hard disk drive cage described earlier in this chapter perform the reverse to remove the cage See the installation procedure of 3 5 then remove the 3 5 inch hard disk drive cage support bracket gt Remove the four screws 5 IMPORTANT Keep the removed 3 5 inch hard disk drive cage and support bracket f
20. Keep this manual at hand for quick reference at anytime necessary SAFETY INDICATIONS Follow the instructions in this manual for your safety to use the NEC Express server Your server contains components with possible danger hazards that may cause by ignoring warnings and preventive actions against such hazards Server components with possible danger are indicated with a warning label placed on or around them as well as described in this manual In this manual or warning labels WARNING or CAUTION is used to indicate a degree of danger These terms are defined as follows WARNING Indicates the presence of a hazard that may result in death or serious personal injury if the instruction is ignored A CAUTION Indicates the presence of a hazard that may cause minor personal injury including burns or property damage if the instruction is ignored Precautions and notices against hazards are presented with one of the following three symbols The individual symbols are defined as follows This symbol indicates the presence of a hazard if the instruction is ignored An image in the symbol illustrates the hazard type Attention This symbol indicates prohibited actions An image in the symbol illustrates a particular prohibited action Prohibited Action This symbol indicates mandatory actions An image in the symbol illustrates a mandatory action to avoid a particular hazard Mandatory Action
21. Read the following notes or information before installing the Windows Server 2008 R2 Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your server supports the following optional boards NOTE If you want to install the other boards by using a driver floppy disk OEM Disk for Mass storage device except ones listed below see Installing with the OEM Disk for Mass storage device and Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver of Parameter File Creator in Chapter 6 Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup N8103 109 RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO0 1 5 6 N8103 116A RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO 1 N8103 117A RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO 1 5 6 Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID Other controllers N8103 75 SCSI Controller N8103 104A SAS Controller N8103 107 SCSI Controller Option D 2 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to the server supports following combination of the OS installation media and Service Pack m Windows Server 2008 R2 OS installation media No Service Pack Installing Service Pack You can install the Service Pack on the server When the Service Pack is not attached to your system prepare it by yourself Updating System If you modified the Windows system execute Update the system in the
22. Sh OF LO E Confirm TEAM Team name adapter in not existing in Network adapters tree and reboot the system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 53 Setting WOL Refer to the following procedure to enable WOL 1 Start Device Manager 2 Point to Network adapters and double click Intel R 82547L Gigabit Network Connection to open the adapter Properties 3 Click Power Management tab and change setting in Wake On LAN according to the following list Setting item Change setting Wake On Directed Packet ON or OFF Wake On Magic Packet ON Wake on Magic Packet from power off state ON Wake on Link OFF IMPORTANT DirectedPacket will not wake up the system on Shutdown state even Wake On Directed Packet is setting ON Only on Sleep or Hibernate state will wake up by a DirectedPacket 1 Packet with the Ethernet address of the adapter in ethernet header or Packet with an IP address assigned to the adapter in IP header NOTES m Power Saver Options setting is not necessary to change m Above setting will be maintained until manually resetting are executed IMPORTANT The parameters of Wake On LAN will not exist if the network ports are not available for WOL 4 Click OK 5 Restart the system 5 54 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Graphics Accelerator Driver If you use stan
23. Back Top Perform Version 5 XX XXX XX 18 Remove NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from the optical disk drive according to the message If you proceed the setup by using setup parameter file remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive Insert Windows Server 2003 CD ROM into the optical disk drive Agree Software License Agreement screen appears 5 70 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 19 Read the contents carefully and click Yes if you do agree If you do not agree click No IMPORTANT m Ifyou do not agree to this agreement the setup terminates and Windows Server 2003 will not be installed m If NetWare Gateway and Client Service is specified to install the window to specify the details of NetWare Gateway and Client Service pops up on the first logon Specify the appropriate value m When the following message is displayed click OK and input the product key The setup script file does not contain a valid Product ID Contact your system administrator for a valid Product ID 20 Insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 into the optical disk drive after the OS installation Hereinafter proceed operations according to the message When the installation has finished remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 from the optical disk drive and restart the system Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5
24. DVD ROM drive factory installed Reads data from various optical disks DVD Super MULTI drive option Reads or writes data of various optical disks A CAUTION A S Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 2 to 1 11 for details Do not leave the tray ejected from the optical disk drive Precautions Observe the following instructions when using the server The server itself or your property data and other devices might be destroyed if you use the server disregarding these instructions Use of the Optical Disk Keep the following notes in mind to use the optical disk for the server For the disk which does not conform to the CD standard the playback of such a disk with the optical disk drive is not guaranteed Do not drop the optical disk Do not place anything on the optical disk or bend the optical disk Do not attach any label onto the optical disk Do not touch the signal side nothing is printed on this side with your hand Place the optical disk with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray Do not scratch the optical disk or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball point pen Keep the optical disk away from cigarette smoke Do not leave the optical disk in a high temperature place e g place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a heater
25. The POST runs automatically when you power on the server or reset it with a keyboard operation Ctrl Alt Delete The POST runs diagnostics initializes the server sets interrupt vectors detects installed peripheral devices and boots the operating system if installed See Chapter 2 for detailed description on POST If the server halts before completing the POST the POST emits a beep code indicating a fatal system error requiring immediate attention See Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for troubleshooting information During memory test the POST displays the amount of memory it was able to access and test Depending on the amount of installed memory it may take several minutes to complete the memory test NOTE The factory set is defined to hide the POST screen with the NEC logo screen You can always change the NEC logo screen to the POST screen by pressing Esc To change the start up screen use the BIOS SETUP utility See Chapter 4 for details During the POST you will see the banner message to prompt you to launch the BIOS SETUP utility stored in ROM on the mother board or on an installed option board Start the BIOS SETUP utility appropriate to your system environment to change the CMOS Setup For detail explanation on the BIOS SETUP utility for the server see Chapter 4 For the BIOS utility for the option board refer to the manual that comes with the option board IMPORTANT Always allow POST to complete before
26. When using a floppy disk a Flash FDD or USB FDD is required IMPORTANT m You cannot create Parameter file for Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions m The setup using a parameter file saved in the Flash FDD is not supported NOTE You can install Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 Windows Server 2003 without Parameter file Also you can modify newly create Parameter file during the setup with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 6 8 Installing and Using Utilities Parameter File This section describes about specifying setup information that is necessary for OS installation and creating Parameter file Follow the procedure below IMPORTANT Do not remove NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from drive during a parameter file creation Start the OS 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive The menu will appear 3 Right click on the screen or left click Setup Windows The menu will appear x NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Installing and Using Utilities 6 9 4 Click Parameter File Creator x NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Menu items_ ae Read documents Setup Windows E nstall the NET Fr rk Ver 0 abl lt 86 Install the NET Framework Ver2 0 Redistributable P M c e Install the Microsoft Visual C 2005 SP1 Redistributable Package x86 Setup softwa lt item 0 Saas za Create driv R Close Menu Parameter File Creator will appear Parameter
27. 5 94 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup INSTALLING MAINTENANCE UTILITIES Various maintenance utilities are contained in your NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD See Chapter 6 for installing the utilities to your server or management workstations UPDATING THE SYSTEM IMPORTANT If you install Windows Server 2003 CD ROM which contains Service Pack 2 to your system you do not have to apply Service Pack 2 again Updating the System is executed by Express Setup automatically Execute Updating the System in following cases m Modified system configuration m Recovered the system using recovery process See Updating the System section in Appendix D for detail of update process Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 95 MAKING BACKUP COPIES OF SYSTEM INFORMATION The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the server Save the information after completing the system setup Without the backup data you will not be able to recover the information You can save the information by the following process 1 2 A O ooh vee Connect Flash FDD or USB FDD to the USB connector Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive and reboot the system Select Tool menu Normal mode Select English Select Maintenance Utility Select System Information Management Select Save 5 96 Installing the Operating System
28. Assemble the RS232C cable B with the PCI bracket 2 NOTE Two types of connectors are provided with N8117 01A RS 232C Connector Kit Use RS232C cable B for the server Remove the additional slot cover at the same location height as the installation slot Open the PCI board retention spring then remove the additional slot cover IMPORTANT Save the removed slot cover carefully 9 44 Upgrading Your Server 6 Install the bracket securely by making sure that the end of the bracket is inserted into the frame guide of the server 7 Route the cable so that it does not interfere with the other PCI board and connect the cable to the internal COM connector on mother board See the figure below for connector location III III II jj J Internal COM connector IMPORTANT Connect the cable properly by making sure the polarity of connector 8 Make sure that the removed slot cover screw or tools are not left in the server Then reassemble the server Upgrading Your Server 9 45 DIMM The DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module is installed in a DIMM socket on the mother board installed in the server The mother board contai
29. Click OK st be changed before logging on the first time OK Cancel me Windows Server 2008 Standard 2 Change the password and then click the button ie Administrator Cancel A ndows Server 2008 Standard NOTE Administrator password that satisfy the next condition are required More than 6 characters Contains characters from three of the following categories numbers uppercase letters lowercase letters and signs 3 When the following message appears click OK to log on Your password has been changed OK em Windows Server 2008 Standard Installing Windows Server 2008 E 17 4 On the Initial Configuration Tasks window enter user information Fy Initial Configuration Tasks i Perform the following tasks to initially configure this server Provide Computer Information a Specifying computer information a Set time zone Time Zone GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US Canada Zs Configure networking Local Area Connection Not connected Local Area Connection 2 Not connected A Provide computer name and Full Computer Name WIN LBSQS6EYDEC domain Workgroup WORKGROUP Update This Server Updating your Windows server Enable automatic updating and Updates Not configured B feedback Feedback Windows Eror Reporting off Not participating in Customer Experience Improvement Program download and install updates Checked for Updates Never Installe
30. Complete Memory Dump to write the debug information is recommended If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB Complete Memory Dump cannot be specified so that specify Kernel Memory Dump instead m Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of the memory capacity mounted on Express workstation 300MB m Incase the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added memory change the write debugging information to Kernel Memory Dump before adding memory The size of debugging information memory dump to be taken also changes due to adding memory Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information memory dump write destination drive Click Settings in the Performance group box The Performance Options window appears Click Advanced tab on the Performance Options window Click Change on the Virtual memory group box Uncheck the Automatically manage paging file size for all drives box and check Custom size On the Paging file size for each drive box specify as follows A value larger than the recommended size shown in Total paging file size for all drives for Initial size A value larger than the Initial size for Maximum size Then click Set IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot driv
31. F1 Get Help about an item F9 Load default configuration values for this menu F10 Save configuration values and exit Configuring Your Server 4 5 Configuration Examples The following describes examples of configuration required to use software link features or for system operations Time and Date Settings You can also change the time and date settings via the operating system commands Select Main System Time Select Main System Date Link with Management Software To control power supply of the server with NEC ESMPRO Manager via the network Select Advanced Advanced Chipset Control Wake On LAN PME Enabled Select Server AC LINK Stay Off Hard Disk Drive To check the hard disk drive status Select Main SATA Port 0 1 2 3 4 5 and check the status indications UPS To link power supply with the UPS m To power on the server when power is supply from the UPS Select Server AC LINK Power On m To keep the server off powered even when power is supplied from the UPS Select Server AC LINK Stay Off Boot To check the boot order Select Boot and check the current boot order To change the boot order of devices connected to the server Select Boot and specify the boot order IMPORTANT If you have installed any bootable device be sure to run BIOS Setup menu to check the boot priority on Boot menu If the bootable device is displayed in Excluded f
32. Fail to install the OS QO Is the RAID Controller configured Provide proper configuration for the RAID Controller by using the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility Fail to start the OS QO Is the BIOS of the RAID Controller changed Set the BIOS correctly by using the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility Q Does POST recognize the RAID Controller After making sure that the RAID Controller is connected correctly then power on the server If the RAID Controller is not recognized correctly despite correct connection the RAID Controller may be failed Contact your service representative Rebuild fails UIs the capacity of the hard disk drive to be rebuilt sufficient The hard disk drive to be rebuilt should have the same capacity of the failed had disk drive O Is RAIDO configured RAIDO has no data redundancy therefore Rebuild is disabled in the RAIDO configuration Replace the failed hard disk drive create the configuration data again and initialize the hard disk drives Then recover the data by using backup data Auto rebuild fails Q Wasa sufficient time taken for hot swap of hard disk drives To allow the auto rebuild to operate correctly it should take 90 seconds or longer for the interval between the removal of the failed hard disk drive and the installation of a new hard disk drive Q Is configuration correct Check the setting of auto rebuild by using the LSI Soft
33. If the Windows installation screen shown in step 4 does not appear turn off the system and then turn it on again The DVD ROM starts A message Windows is loading files appears D 10 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 4 Select a language and other options from the drop down lists and then click Next Install Windows 5 iN Enter your language and other preferences and click Next to continue Copyright 2009 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved 5 Click the Install now button The installation starts Install Windows oo Windows Server 2008 D Install now ns What to know before installing Windows Repair your computer Copyright 2009 Microsoft Corporation All nights reserved Ifthe following message is displayed Go to Step 6 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 D 11 Ifthe following message is not displayed Go to Step 9 Load Driver A required CD DVD drive device driver is missing If you have a driver for floppy disk CD DVD or USB flash drive please insert it now Note If the Windows installation media is in the CD DVD drive you can safely remove it for this step Browse OK Cancel 6 Insert the Windows Server 2008 R2 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER and press Browse 7 When Browse for Folder window is displayed select lt floppy disk drive gt OEM Disk ws2008r2 megasr1 and press OK 8 Select LSI
34. Join ins workgroup Workgroup name iVORKGROUP Join ina es a m a Default 12 Select the installing components Select Windows components steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 W Parameter File Creator NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Enter i Select Save Step domain j applic gt pardindfets tions account Enabling the Windows functionality and Server Roles and please p Server Roles D Web Servar 1I8 C DHCP Server D DNS Server DD File Services D Print Services p Windows Features M SNMP Services DD Simple TCP IP Services D WINS Server Default 6 18 Installing and Using Utilities Windows Server 2003 W Parameter File Creator EXPRESSBUILDER Select Save applic gt pardinefets tions Select the installing Windows components p Application Server D Internat Information Services II8 Detail Settings f Management and Monitoring Tools M Simple Network Management Protocol Detail settings L Network Monitor Toots Networking Services Other Network File and Print Services IP Simple TCP IP Services IF Fite Services for Macintosh I Dynamic Host Configuration Protocel DHCP T Print Services for Macintosh IF Domain Name System DNS IF Print Services for Unix O Windows Internet Name Services WINS Y Defaul
35. LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility Ver xxx Management Menu Configure Initialize Objects Rebuild Check Consistency Configure Logical Drive s Use cursor keys to navigate between items and Press ENTER to select an option LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility TOP Menu Management Menu Configuring Your Server 4 31 Quitting LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility To quit the utility press Esc in the TOP menu of LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility When a confirmation message appears select Yes Press lt Ctrl gt lt Alt gt lt Del gt to REBOOT the system When the above message appears press Ctrl Alt Delete The server is rebooted 4 32 Configuring Your Server Menu Tree Selection execution parameter Setting parameter e Information display gt Can be set modified after creation of virtual drive Menu Description Configure Performs Configuration settings Easy Configuration Set configuration Using fixed value New Configuration Set new configuration View Add Configuration Additional setting viewing configuration Clear Configuration Clear configuration Select Boot Drive Chose Bootable Virtual Drive Initialize Initialize virtual drive Objects Various settings Adapter Set RAID Controller Sel Adapter Cle
36. MICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS dialog which displayed after OS installation Enter product key following the message LI Case of Windows Server 2003 Ifyou install using BackUp CD ROM product key is not required If you install using the DVD ROM other than BackUp DVD ROM product key screen is displayed during OS installation Enter Product Key following the message Troubleshooting 8 29 When IIS is installed with Windows Server 2008 by Express Setup following feature is installed Q Windows Process Activation Service Process Model Configuration APIs Q Remote Server Administration Tool Role Administration Tools Web Server IIS Tools The feature listed above is activated because they are required for the installation of IIS basic feature Problems with Parameter File Creator Fail to start Parameter File Creator Q Parameter File Creator requires to run by Microsoft HTML Application host If Parameter File Creator does not start associate the file type with Microsoft HTML Application host via following process 1 Click Run on Start menu 2 Type Yowindir system32 mshta exe register in the Open box and click OK 8 30 Troubleshooting Problems with RAID System Configuration Check the following if the server configuring a RAID System does not operate properly or a utility does not operate correctly If a relevant item is found follow the processing method
37. Network adapters Click Settings and confirm Adapters in team list 10 Click Test Switch Run test to confirm the adapter team is properly setup 11 Remove Team Pak wn Confirm the result in Test results Restart the system Open the Device Manager Click Network adapters and open TEAM Team name properties Click Setting tab Click Remove Team button Click Yes to the message Confirm TEAM Team name adapter in not existing in Network adapters tree and reboot the system E 28 Installing Windows Server 2008 Setting WOL Refer to the following procedure to enable WOL 1 Start Device Manager 2 Point to Network adapters and double click Intel R 82547L Gigabit Network Connection to open the adapter Properties 3 Click Power Management tab and change setting in Wake On LAN according to the following list Setting item Change setting Wake On Directed Packet ON or OFF Wake On Magic Packet ON Wake on Magic Packet from power off state ON Wake on Link OFF IMPORTANT DirectedPacket will not wake up the system on Shutdown state even Wake On Directed Packet is setting to ON Only on Sleep or Hibernate state will wake up by a DirectedPacket 1 Packet with the Ethernet address of the adapter in ethernet header or Packet with an IP address assigned to the adapter in IP header NOTES m P
38. POST may accidentally detect a keyboard controller error and stops proceeding In such a case restart the server once again Do not perform any keyboard or mouse operation until the BIOS start up message appears when you restart the server Does the server have contains appropriate memory boards or PCI devices Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed Fail to access to internal or external devices or such devices fail to operate Q Are cables properly connected Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected Also make sure that the cables are connected in the correct order Is the power on order correct When the server has any external devices connected power on the external devices first then the server Did you install drivers for connected optional devices Some optional devices require specific device drivers Refer to the manual that comes with the device to install its driver Is BIOS configuration correct Some devices connected to the serial or parallel port may require I O port address or operation mode settings Refer to the manual that comes with the board for details to make correct settings Troubleshooting 8 13 The keyboard or mouse fails to operate Q Q Is the cable properly connected Make sure that the cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear of the server The keyboard or mouse does no
39. Power supply 100 to 120 VAC 410 200 to 240 VAC 410 50 60 Hz 3 Hz Power consumption 264 VA 262 W Environmental Temperature 10 to 35 C operating 10 to 55 C non operating storage requirements Humidity 20 to 80 RH no condensation A 2 Specifications This page is intentionally left blank Appendix B Other Precautions Transfer Rate of the On board LAN Controller The onboard network interface controller supports 10Base T and 100Base TX networks and a capable of full or half duplex The controller can automatically detect and switch for network speed and transfer mode connected to the HUB However for proper network operation specify the link speed and duplex mode to the same value as the value specified for HUB Server Management Software The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD that comes with the server contains the NEC ESMPRO utility NEC recommends that you should install the NEC ESMPRO for effective use of the reliability enhancement features of the server Floppy Disk The following describes use of the floppy disk Floppy disk type The server uses 3 5 inch floppy disks You can use the following two types of 3 5 inch floppy disks m 2HD floppy disk double sided high density track type Stores data of 1 44MB m 2DD floppy disk double sided double density track type Stores data of 720KB Shutter Catching hole Insertion direction indicator H
40. RAID Levels The record mode enabling the RAID feature includes several levels Among the levels the Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID supports RAID levels 0 1 and 10 The number of hard disk drives required to create a disk group varies depending on the RAID level as shown in the table below RAID level Number of required HDDs Min Max RAID 0 1 4 RAID 1 2 2 RAID 10 4 4 NOTE For details of the RAID levels see RAID Levels described later in this chapter Disk Group A disk group is configured with more than one HDDs The allowable number of disk groups is equal to the number of HDDs The figure below shows a sample configuration The three HDDs are connected to the Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID creating one disk group DG RAID Controller E ENOS OEA E Disk Group 0 160 GB Configuring Your Server 4 25 Virtual Disk Virtual disk is a logical drive defined in disk group It is recognized as a physical drive by OS The allowable number of virtual disks is up to 8 per disk group or up to 8 per controller The figure below shows a sample configuration in which the Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID is connected with two HDDs creating one Disk Group Two RAID1 virtual disks VD are defined in the Disk Group RAID Controller DGO 160 GB VDO RAID1 50 GB lt I VD1 RAID1 H 30 GB Da H I Hot Spare
41. The hot spare is prepared as an auxiliary HDD substituting for a defected HDD included in a disk group which is configured at a redundant RAID level Detecting a HDD fault the system disconnects the HDD or makes it offline and starts rebuild using the hot spare 4 26 Configuring Your Server RAID Levels This section describes RAID levels that the Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID supports The available RAID levels are RAIDO RAID1 and RAID 10 striping of RAID1 Characteristics of RAID Levels The table below lists the characteristics of the RAID levels Level Function Redundancy Characteristics RAIDO Striping No e Data read write at the highest rate e Largest capacity e Capacity capacity of single HDD x number of HDDs RAID1 Mirroring Yes e Two HDDs required e Capacity capacity of single HDD RAID10 Striping of RAID1 Yes e Four or more HDDs required e Capacity capacity of single HDD x number of HDDs 2 RAIDO In RAIDO data to be recorded is distributed to HDDs The mode is called striping In the figure below data is recorded in stripe 1 disk 1 stripe 2 disk 2 and stripe 3 disk 3 in the order Because RAIDO allows all HDDs to be accessed collectively it can provide the best disk access performance IMPORTANT RAIDO cannot have data redundancy If a HDD is defected the data saved in the HDD cannot be recovered RAID Controller
42. Wake on Magic Packet from power off state ON Wake on Link OFF IMPORTANT DirectedPacket will not wake up the system on Shutdown state even Wake On Directed Packet is setting to ON Only on Sleep or Hibernate state will wake up by a DirectedPacket NOTES m Power Saver Options setting is not necessary to change m Above setting will be maintained until manually resetting are executed IMPORTANT The parameters of Wake On LAN will not exist if the network ports are not available for WOL 4 Click OK 5 Restart the system G 22 Installing Windows Server 2003 Graphics Accelerator Driver If you utilize standard graphics accelerator drivers update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system Standard graphics accelerator drivers will be installed automatically Observe the following procedure when you want to reinstall the driver individually 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive If the autorun menu is displayed close menu screen 2 Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run setup exe in the following directory 015 win winnt dotnet video 4 Follow the message to continue the installation If the dialog message Digital Signature could not been found appears select Yes to continue 5 Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from the optical disk drive restart the syste
43. You can read data from a write protected floppy disk but you cannot save data into the floppy disk or format it NEC recommends that you should write protect any floppy disk containing valuable data unless you are about to save data To write protect a 3 5 inch floppy disk use the write protect switch provided on its back m Disk format To write data into a floppy disk the floppy disk must be formatted Formatting is to initialize the floppy disk and make it available for the system environment operating system IMPORTANT m Formatting a used floppy disk clears all the data contained in it if any m Formatting a floppy disk from the DOS command line is not available with the server Use a formatted floppy disk to work with it on the DOS command line The format method depends on your operating system Refer to the manual that comes with your operating system for details m Data backup Data backup is to copy data stored in a media into another media e g floppy disk digital audio tape or magnet optical disk IMPORTANT Make sure to make a back up copy of every floppy disk if provided The floppy disk is a very delicate storage media Dust or thermal changes as well as operator s misconduct or sever failures may cause loss of data To avoid loss of data NEC recommends that you should make a back up copy of your valuable data on a regular basis B 4 Other Precautions DVD CD ROM Keep the foll
44. lt Device List gt Shows a list of connected devices lt Log Info gt Shows the log information of the diagnostics Log information can be saved To save it connect a FAT formatted removable media and select lt Save F gt lt Option gt Optional features can be used from this menu lt Reboot gt Reboots the system Select lt Reboot gt in the Enduser Menu above The server restarts and the system is started from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Exit the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and remove the DVD from the optical disk drive Power off the server and unplug the power cord from the receptacle Reconnect all the LAN cables that have been disconnected in Step 2 to the server Plug in the power cord This completes the system diagnostics Maintenance 7 9 RELOCATING STORING THE SERVER Follow the procedure below to relocate or store the server A CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself a Do not install the server in any place other than specified Do not connect disconnect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power source SPO IMPORTANT m Ifthe server needs to be relocated stored due to a change in the floor layout to a great extent contact the service representati
45. 1 5 19 This security permission can be modified using the component Services administrative tool It is not a problem in operating the system 8 22 Troubleshooting There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you install Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Event Source Service Control Manager Event Type Error Event ID 7011 Description Timeout 30000 milliseconds waiting for a transaction response from the IMAP4Sve service When this event is not registered by rebooting the system it is not a problem in operating the system Installed Service Pack before application of Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 during Windows Server 2003 R2 installation Apply Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 and then install Service Pack again by Updating the System There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you operate Windows Server 2003 R2 Source IPMIDRV Type Error Event ID 1001 Description The IPMI device driver attempted to determine if the system supported an IPMI BMC device The driver attempted to detect the presence of the IPMI BMC by searching the SMBIOS for Type 38 record But either no record was found or the record was not compatible with the version of the device driver Ifa SMBIOS Type 38 record was detected the Dump Data field of the event contains a binary representation of the record If you use Hardware Management which is provided by Windows Serve
46. 116A 117A for details IMPORTANT The RAID Controller board is extremely sensitive to static electricity Make sure to wear the wrist strap an arm belt or antistatic glove and discharge static electricity from your body before handling the RAID Controller Do not touch the RAID Controller terminals or on board parts by a bare hand or place the RAID Controller directly on the non anti static table For static notes see the section Static Precautions described earlier NOTE Before installing an optional RAID Controller run the SETUP utility select Advanced PCI Configuration and confirm that Enabled is set for the parameter PCI Slot x Option ROM x PCI slot number Installation See PCI Board in this chapter and manual that comes with the optional RAID Controller for the installation of a RAID Controller N8103 109 116A 117A IMPORTANT When the RAID Controller is connected the boot priority specified in BIOS SETUP utility must be eighth or younger If specified ninth or later the configuration menu of RAID Controller will fail to start Upgrading Your Server 9 27 Removal Remove the optional RAID Controller in reverse order of the installation steps Notice Observe the following notes on configuring a RAID System m The installed hard disk drives SAS drives or SATA drives must the same capacity and the same rotational speed The minimum number of required disks depends on the co
47. 2TB you can specify only a value equal to or less than 2 097 152MB as partition size 13 When the installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition has finished the system reboots automatically 14 The Windows Setup screen will be displayed after logged on to the system xl A Windows Setup is not complete We recommend that you continue Setup so that you can install the additional components that are available in this version of the Windows Server operating system For more information about the new components see the documentation on Windows Server CD 2 To continue Setup insert Windows Server CD 2 or specify the location where the Windows Server CD 2 files are stored and then click OK Location of Windows Server CD 2 files DA Browse 7 Cancel IMPORTANT m In this case the Windows Setup screen may not be displayed Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 according to the following procedures m You can install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 after the application of System update Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 In this case note that the Windows Setup screen is not displayed 15 Insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition DISC 2 CD ROM into the optical disk drive Confirm the parameters and click OK 16 When the installation has completed remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 E
48. 4 7 If your server uses Onboard RAID Controller the following message is displayed to prompt you to run RAID utility Press lt Ctrl gt lt M gt to Run LSI SoftwareRAID Configuration Utility Press Ctrl M to run the utility For detail explanation see Chapter 4 for details IMPORTANT The LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility is used to manage the data stored in hard disk drive or for maintenance See Chapter 4 for detail If the POST detects the optional add in card it displays the message prompting you to launch the add in card BIOS configuration utility Ignore the message POST will automatically proceed a few seconds later Refer to the manual that comes with the optional add in card for detail If you set a password entry using the BIOS SETUP utility the password entry screen appears upon successful completion of POST Up to three password entries will be accepted Three incorrect password entries disable the server to boot In such a case turn off the power and wait about ten seconds before turning on to boot the server IMPORTANT Do not set a password before installing an OS The OS starts when POST completes POST Error Messages When POST detects an error it displays an error message on the display unit screen or emits beep code See Chapter 8 for POST error codes IMPORTANT Take a note on the messages displayed before consulting with your sales agent Alarm messages are useful info
49. Board configuration can be made using the utility described later 1 After a few seconds from power on POST starts checking the memory The count message of the basic and expansion memory appears at top left on the display unit screen The memory check may take a few minutes to complete depending on the memory size of the server Also it may take approximately one minute for the screen display to appear after rebooting the server 2 Some messages appear upon completion of the memory check These messages appear to indicate that the system has detected the CPU keyboard and mouse 3 After a few seconds the following message appears at the bottom left of the screen prompting you to launch the SETUP utility stored in the BIOS chip on the motherboard To launch the SETUP utility press F2 while the above message is displayed Message displayed when the NEC logo appears Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP or Press lt F12 gt to Network Message displayed when the POST screen appears Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP lt F10 gt Boot menu lt F12 gt to boot from Network Launch the SETUP utility only when you need to change the settings to meet the requirements of the server environment As long as the above message is not accompanied by an error message you do not have to change the settings Ignore the message POST will continue a few seconds later See Chapter 4 for setup and parameters 2 18 General Description
50. Console Disabled Specify whether to enable or disable Reset Enabled resetting by Escape command Esc R sent from the remote console If the server is connected with the management PC that uses NEC ESMPRO Manager this option is always enabled even if Disabled is specified here DMI Event Logging Factory set Option Parameter Description Your Setting Event log validity Displays the status of event logs stored in the system Event log Displays the free space for storing capability event logs View DMI event Press Enter to display the event logs log stored in the system See Chapter 8 Troubleshooting for the meanings of the event logs and the recommended action to take Event logging Enabled Specify whether to store the event log Disabled or not Clear all DMI No When set to Yes and reboot the event logs Yes system the stored event logs are cleared Factory set Configuring Your Server 4 21 Boot If you move the cursor to the position of Boot the Boot menu appears which is used to set the boot priority Indication Device USB CDROM USB CD ROM drive IDE CD ATAPI CD ROM USB FDC Flash FDD or USB FDD USB KEY USB flash memory device IDE HDD IDE hard disk drives PCI SCSI Internal hard disk drives installed in your system Software RAID is displayed in the RAID configuration USB HDD USB hard d
51. Creator NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Load Select OS Enter RAID peed Enter basic Enter Step parameters settings gt mediu gt paramelegs gt network gt partition protocol Set a parameter to create a logical drive If you are not using a RAID controller select Skip the logical drive creation and press the Next button If you want to use the existing logical drive select Skip the logical drive creation and press the Next button Ski ical drive creation c IMPORTANT At The number of the total physical devices Parameter File Creator displays upper limit that the RAID Controller can support The total of The number of physical devices used to create the logical drive and The number of the physical devices specified as the hot spare must not exceed The number of the total physical devices which connected to the target system NOTE You can use only the physical devices that have same model number to configure logical drive 6 12 8 Installing and Using Utilities Specify the installing medium and the Windows system partition Specify medium Partition steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next Windows Server 2008 R2 W Parameter File Creator NEC Enter RAID settings Load parameters Select OS Step Specify the installing medium and the Windows system partition Piet Refer to the User s guide about the Service P
52. EXPRESS x4 PCI slot 3 PCI EXPRESS x2 PCI slot 4 PCI 32 bit 33 MHz Upgrading Your Server 9 37 Slots to install the PCI board Product name PCI 1 PCI 2 PCI 3 PCI 4 MNR 32 bit PCI slot capability 3 x16 lane x4 lane x2 lane 33MHz N code Slot size Full height Remarks x16 x8 x4 PCI board type socket socket socket V Available board size Short Short Long SCSI controller N8103 95 64 bit 66MHz PCI z y SCSI controller 3 N8103 75 64 bit 133MHz PCI X y Cannot co exist with N8103 107 SCSI controller J a N8103 107 PCI EXPRESS x1 V V Cannot co exist with N8103 75 SAS controller 7 N8103 104A PCI EXPRESS x8 V y y Cannot connect to internal HDD SAS controller N8103 142 PCI EXPRESS x8 y V y RAID Controller N8103 109 128MB RAID 0 1 5 6 V y PCI EXPRESS x8 RAID Controller N8103 116A 128MB RAID 0 1 V y PCI EXPRESS x8 RAID Controller N8103 117A 128MB RAID 0 1 5 6 V y PCI EXPRESS x8 100BASE TX adapter N8104 111 32 bit 33MHz PCI 3 N Cie 1000BASE T adapter N8104 119 64 bit 133MHz PCI X 7 Z V Teaming with another NIC FEC GEC 1000BASE T adapter 2 ch E 2 z is not allowed N8104 120 64 bit 133MHz PCI X y Teaming with
53. Embedded MegaRAID and press Next Select the edition of the Windows operating system that you purchased NOTE The Windows versions listed on the screen vary depending on the Windows Server 2008 R2 DVD ROM you are using 10 Read the license terms carefully If you agree select I accept the license terms and then click Next Oem O A Please read the license terms MICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS MICROSOFT WINDOWS SERVER 2008 R2 STANDARD These license terms are an agreement between you and the server manufacturer that distributes the software with the server or the software installer that distributes the software with the server Please read them They apply to the software named above which includes the media on which you received it if any Printed paper license terms which may come with the software take the place of any on screen license terms The terms also apply to any Microsoft updates 1 Collecting information 2 Installing Windows D 12 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 11 Select the type of installation you want Custom advanced is selected below Which type of installation do you want Upgrade Upgrade to a newer version of Windows and keep your files settings and programs The option to upgrade is only available when an existing version of Windows is running We recommend backing up your files before you proceed Custom advanced Install a new copy of Win
54. Express5800 system in the Autorun Menu Re installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk upgraded to Dynamic Disk note the following issue Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS newly m Select Use the current File System for the format of OS partition Mounting MO Device Do not mount an MO device on your server during the Windows installation About Removable Media Do not set removable media such as DAT and LTO into the device mounted on this computer during the Windows installation Floppy Disk Drive The internal floppy disk drive is not included in your system at the standard configuration Prepare the optional Flash FDD or USB FDD if necessary Installing Windows Server 2003 G 3 About the System Partition Size The size for the partition that the system is to be installed can be calculated from the following formula Size necessary to install the system Paging File Size Dump File Size Application Size Size necessary to install the system 3500MB Windows Server 2003 R2 3500MB Windows Server 2003 R2 with Service Pack 2 5300MB Windows Server 2003 R2 Service Pack 2 Paging File Size Recommended Mounted Memory Size 1 5 Dump file Size Mounted Memory Size 12MB Application Size Required Size IMPORTANT m The
55. File Creator 6 10 Installing and Using Utilities 5 Load Parameters step is displayed Select Do not load parameters from the menu click Next W Parameter File Creator NEC EXPRESSBUILDER step feb 3 The Parameter File Creator creates and modifies the parameters file To create a parameters file select Do not load a parameter To load a parameters file select Load a parameter Input the path of the parameters file Do not load parameters Load parameters Reference 6 Select the installing Operating System Select Install the Windows 32bit editions or Install the Windows 64bit editions from the menu click Next Ml Parameter File Creator 5 x NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Load Step paramedds Select the installing Operating System If Install other Operating System is selected EXPRESSBUILDER only creates a Logical Drive and finishes the setup If you want to create new logical drive to install Windows Server 2008 select Install other Operating System to complete RAID configuration and then perform the Express setup again Install the Windows 32bit editions Install the Windows 64bit editions Install other Operating System Installing and Using Utilities 6 11 Enter the setting of a logical drive Enter RAID setting steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next MM Parameter File
56. Information Click Save as System Information File in the Operation menu Input the file name to save in the File Name box Click Save Troubleshooting 8 35 Collecting Dr Watson Diagnostic Information Dr Watson collects diagnostic information related to application errors The location to save the information can be specified as you like For more information see Chapter 5 Memory Dump If an error occurs the dump file should be saved to acquire necessary information If you saved the dump to DAT write down that it is saved as NTBackup or ARCServe on the label You can specify the location to save the diagnostic information as you like For more information see Specifying Memory Dump Debug Information see Chapter 5 for detail IMPORTANT Consult with your service representative before dumping the memory Dumping the memory while the server is in the successful operation may affect the system operation m Restarting the system due to an error may display a message indicating insufficient virtual memory Ignore this message and proceed Restarting the system may result in dumping improper data 8 36 Troubleshooting RECOVERY FOR Windows SYSTEM If any file necessary for running the OS is damaged use the following procedures to recover the system IMPORTANT m After recovering the system see Updating the System in Chapter 5 and be sure to update the system Also you need to
57. MegaRAID is used lt If the SCSI Controller N8103 75 107 is connected gt Press S IMPORTANT m Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive If the floppy disk drive has already contained Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER you do not need to insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER m Ifyou have created the OEM Disk into the Flash FDD connect the Flash FDD before you start the system The screen of Step 6 is displayed Press Enter and go to Step 9 lt If the SCSI Controller N8103 75 107 is not connected gt Go to Step 10 Installing Windows Server 2003 G 9 9 A list of mass storage devices is displayed Select the Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards Windows 32 bit and press Enter IMPORTANT If the following message is displayed when you use the N8103 75 107 SCSI controller press S The driver you provided seems to be newer than the Windows default driver Windows already has a driver that you can use for Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards Windows 32 bit Unless the device manufacturer prefers that you use the driver on the floppy disk you should use the driver in Windows The screen of Step 5 is displayed Go to Step 10 10 lt Ifthe SCSI Controller N8103 95 is connected gt Press S IMPORTANT m Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive If the floppy disk drive has alr
58. Memory capacity available for OS available for OS Approx 3 3GB Approx 3 3GB Physical Physical memory memory 0GB 0GB Note When the OS support memory can support the total capacity of physical memory and memory hole m Maximum memory capacity by supported OS Upgrading Your Server 9 47 Supported OS Maximum memory capacity supported by OS Maximum memory capacity supported by the server Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition 4GB When using HW DEP feature factory default 4GB When not using HW DEP feature Approx 3 3GB Note If HW DEP feature is not used change Execute Disable Bit XD Bit to Disabled on BIOS SETUP The factory setting of this parameter is Enabled Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Edition 32GB 16GB Installation Order and Notes m Single channel memory configuration Install DIMMs one by one in the ascending order of DIMM slot numbers m Dual channel memory configuration To activate the dual channel mode the following conditions must be met Matched DIMM configuration in each channel Same density Same DRAM technology Same DRAM bus width All either single sided or dual sided Matched in both channels Populate symmetrical memor
59. Menu if you have the computer on which the above operating systems operate Follow the steps below 1 2 3 Prepare one Flash FDD or 3 5 inch floppy disk Start the Operating System Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server The Menu will appear Click Create drive disk and select OEM Disk for Windows Server 2008 R2 NOTE You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the Right click Windows Server 2008 R2 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 D 9 Windows Server 2008 R2 Clean Installation This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2008 R2 Follow steps below appropriate to your environment 1 Turn on your system IMPORTANT To install Windows Server 2008 R2 you may need to update BIOS To check if your system needs a BIOS update go to http www nec com express 2 Insert the Windows Server 2008 R2 DVD ROM into your DVD ROM drive NOTE When You use Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID Windows Server 2008 R2 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER is necessary 3 Restart the system To restart the system press Ctrl Alt Del or turn off the system once and then turn it on again IMPORTANT When prompted to press any key to boot from CD or DVD press Enter while the message is displayed
60. Monitor point to Program Administrative Tools and click Network Monitor For information on how to operate Network Monitor refer to Online Help 5 92 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Re installing the Operation System if Multiple Logical Drives Exist Before Re installing the Operation System Be sure to make backup copies before re installing the operation system just in case Re installing the Operation System Start the clean installation following the procedure described in this manual 2 Specify the partition in which you want to install the operating system when the following message appears lt Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 gt Where do you want to install Windows lt Windows Server 2003 gt The following list shows the existing partitions and unpartitioned space on this computer Use the UP and DOWN ARROW keys to select an item in the list Cannot modify the drive letter of your system or boot volume Confirm the proper drive letter is assigned and then continue the setup 3 Continue the clean installation again following the procedure described in this manual 4 The drive letter of the re installed system may differ from the one of the previous system If you need to modify the drive letter modify it according to the Procedure for Modifying the Drive Letter Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 93 Procedure for Modif
61. One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically but the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified manually When PROSet is not installed 1 2 3 Open the Device Manager Double click Network Adapter Name in the list Click the Advanced and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Click OK Restart the system When PROSet is installed Open the Device Manager Double click Network Adapter Name in the list Click the Link Speed and specify the Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Click OK Restart the system Also add or delete any protocols and services if necessary You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from Network and Dial up Connection NOTE We recommend you to add Network Monitor at Adding Services Network Monitor can monitor the frame or the packet that the computer installing Network Monitor sends or receives This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble For information on how to install the tool see the Setup for Trouble Process later in this document Optional Network Board Driver See Chapter 5 Optional Network Board Driver for re installing the optional network board driver G 20 Installing Windows Server 2003 Setup Team See Chapter 5 Setup Team for re setting the Te
62. Operating Systemi tessi A E E e TE E EE N e 3 12 Installing Utilities 5 0 3 csc ncewverccssecteeseconeemyniiestieon a A E E we EES e aa taattn Ames 3 12 Making Backup Copies of System Information ccccececsseesseesceeeceeseeeeceeeeseenseenseceeeseeeneeses 3 12 Chapter 4 Configuring Your Servel ccccssceeeccseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeseeeeesenenseseseenens 4 1 System BIOS BIOS Setup Utility 0 cece eccesccesecsseceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeecssecesecsaecneceseceaeenseeneeeaeeenes 4 2 Starting SETUP Wt lity ise cc0e heed hgh filers es ke Se Bs Re ek 4 3 Description on On Screen Items and Key Usage ccccesccesecsseeseeeseeeseeeececeeeeeneeneenseenaeenaes 4 4 ContiguratiomExamp leg vets ccs cskeci ahi ede eae ae ce Ba ea 4 5 Menu and Parameter Descriptions cccceescessceesceseeeseceseceeecseecseeeneceneseseeeeeseenseenseenseenseenaes 4 9 RAID System Configuration lt chciee craic eee ene ets Eee AES 4 23 RAID cece ees A etalon eda enous ihe E es E O ROTA 4 23 Configuration by Onboard RAID Controller ceccceccccceeseesceeseesseeeecesceecsseeeseenaeenaeenneeaeeenes 4 28 Setup Utility rier Rodis detec ies ost ME dee a Ove ee DE eho 4 30 LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility and Universal RAID Utility 0 00 4 43 Configuring Mother Board Jumpers c ccsccesccesceseceseceseceeecseecseeeaeeseeeeeeseeneeenseenaeenaecseeeseeenes 4 46 Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup
63. POST Error Messages When POST detects an error it displays an error message on the display unit screen The following table lists error codes error messages and actions to take IMPORTANT Take a note on the messages displayed before consulting with your service representative Alarm messages are useful information for maintenance NOTE For the BIOS error messages related to the optional RAID Controller or SCSI controller connected with the mother board refer to the relevant document provided with the optional controller Error Error message Recommended Action code 0200 Failure Fixed Disk Contact your service representative 0210 Stuck Key Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again 0213 Keyboard locked Unlock key Release the lock of the key switch If the error cannot switch be corrected in spite of the release of the lock contact your service representative 0220 Monitor type does not match CMOS Run BIOS SETUP and provide the setting again If Run SETUP the same error persists contact your service representative 0230 System RAM Failed at offset Contact your service representative 0231 Shadow RAM Failed at offset 0232 Extended RAM Failed at offset 0250 _ System battery is dead Replace Contact your service representative to replace the and run SETUP lithium battery After restarting the computer run BIOS SETUP to provide
64. ROM S Startup FD Test and diagnos m Manas urn to prev These utilities are for maintenance and configuration _ System information is displayed managed and Set if Maintenance Utility E BIOS and various firmwares are renewed in the IBIOS FW Updating ROM DOS system can boot from a floppy disk made at ROM DOS Startup FD This computer and connected devices can bejjexamined at Test and diagnostics BNC information is displayed and set in System Management Only when BMC is supported When you use a local console Troubleshooting 8 39 TOOL MENU s Menu Automatic select at 18 seconds System information is displayed managed and set When you use a remote console 6 Each tool is selected and it starts 8 40 Troubleshooting Function of Maintenance Tools The following functions can be executed in the Maintenance Tools m Maintenance Utility The Off line Maintenance Utility is started in Maintenance Utility The Off line Maintenance Utility is an OS independent maintenance program When you are unable to start the OS dependent NEC ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem the Off line Maintenance Utility can be used IMPORTANT m The Off line Maintenance Utility is intended for use of your service representative The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD you have created contain a file that describes operation of the utility but do not attempt to use the utility
65. Select the installing Operating System of Inseall other O d EXPRESSBUILDER only tet Ifyou want to ere all Windows Server 200 to complete RAID configuration and then perform the Express setup again a Logical Drive Install other Oj g Sy Install the Windows 32bit editions Install che Windows 64bit editions Install other Operating System Back Next Top Version 5 XX XXN XXCXKX 9 Enter the setting of a logical drive Enter RAID settings steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Pe Top menu Load Select OS Enter RAID Specify Enter basic Step parame settings UD f mediu UD parmeows up i partition reate a logical drive ify a RAID contr aller select Skip the logical dri T and press the Next button The number of the physical devices specified as the hot spare The number of the free physical devices Back Next Top Default Version 5 XX XXX XX CRXX 5 38 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup NOTES m You can use only the physical devices that have same model number to configure logical drive m Ifthe process is not finished normally the driver may not be stored in the EXPRESSBUILDER Refer to Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER described earlier in this chapter 10 Specify the installing medium and the Windows system pa
66. Server 2008 Dr Watson is replaced by Problem Reports and Solutions therefore you can not collect the Crash Dump file by existing Dr Watson The above process provides you the information same level as the Crash Dump file Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 89 When the system is Windows Server 2003 Dr Watson Dr Watson is a debugger for application errors If any application error is detected Dr Watson diagnoses the server and logs diagnostic information log Follow the procedure below and specify Dr Watson to collect diagnostic information 1 2 Click Run on Start menu Type drwtsn32 exe in the Open box and click OK The Dr Watson for Windows dialog box appears Specify the location to store the diagnostic information in the Log File Path box The diagnostic information will be stored with the file name DRWTSN32 LOG NOTE You can not specify network pass Specify the pass on local computer Specify the location of crash dump file in the Crash Dump box NOTE Crash Dump File is a binary file that can be read with Windows Debugger Select Full radio button from Crash Dump Type Check the following check box on the Options box O Dump Symbol Table O Dump All Thread Contexts O Append TO Existing Log File O Create Crash Dump File For more information on each function above refer to Online Help Click OK 5 90 Installing the Operating Sy
67. Stripe 1 Stripe 2 Stripe 3 Stripe 4 Stripe 5 Stripe 6 Configuring Your Server 4 27 RAID1 In the RAID1 level data saved in a HDD is written to another HDD without change The mode is called mirroring When data is written onto a single HDD the same data is written onto another HDD If either of the HDDs is defected the other HDD containing the same data can substitute for the defected HDD Thus the system can continue to operate without interruption RAID Controller Stripe 1 Stripe 1 Stripe 2 Stripe 2 RAID10 Data to be recorded is distributed to two HDDs in mirroring mode Then each mirrored data is written onto HDD by striping Owing to this feature high disk access performance of RAIDO and in addition high reliability of RAID1 can be achieved RAID Controller HDD 1 HDD 2 HDD 3 HDD 4 Stripe 1 Stripe 1 Stripe 2 Stripe 2 Stripe 3 Stripe 3 Stripe 4 Stripe 4 Stripe 5 Stripe 5 Stripe 6 Stripe 6 RAID1 RAID1 4 RAIDO L 4 28 Configuring Your Server Configuration by Onboard RAID Controller This section describes how to use the internal hard disk drives as RAID System by Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID Installing the Hard Disk Drives Install the required number of hard disk drives for the desired RAID level to your server See Chapter 9 for installation procedure IMPORTANT Use hard disk drives of the same revolution In addition
68. WARNING SA AA 9 A Do not disassemble repair or alter the server Never attempt to disassemble repair or alter the server on any occasion other than described in this manual Failure to follow this instruction may cause an electric shock or fire as well as malfunctions of the server Do not look into the optical disk drive A laser beam used in the optical disk drive is harmful to the eyes Do not look into or insert a mirror into the drive while the drive is powered If a laser beam is caught in your eyes you may lose your eyesight the laser beam is invisible Do not remove the lithium battery Your server contains the lithium battery Do not remove the battery Placing the lithium close to a fire or in the water may cause an explosion When the server does not operate appropriately due to the dead lithium battery contact your service representative Do not disassemble the server to replace or recharge the battery by yourself Disconnect the power plug before accessing inside the server or connecting the peripherals Make sure to power off the server and disconnect the power plug from a power outlet before cleaning or installing removing internal optional devices Touching any internal device of the server with its power cord connected to a power source may cause an electric shock even of the server is off powered Disconnect the power plug from the outlet occasionally and clean the plug with a
69. Windows Server 2003 Express Setup proceeds the setup by selecting or inputting several parameters on the wizard You can also save the parameters to a floppy disk as a parameters file 1 2 3 Turn the power of peripheral device on and then turn on the server Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server The system will boot from the DVD ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts Select Os installation default from the Boot selection menu If you do not hit any key Os installation is selected automatically The Top menu will appear Select English from the Select Language click OK x EXPRESSBUILDER THAY SB MERRLTH S Select a language to use for the EXPRESSBUILDER e AHAB English Fran ais Italiano e Deutsch Espa ol 5 When the Software License Agreement screen of Windows PE appears click Yes 5 62 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Cn Confirm the following End User License Agreement To use this software agree this license END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR MICROSOFT WINDOWS PREINSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity
70. Windows Server 2008 R2 5 Call the above number inform the representative of the installation ID which you obtained in step 3 and receive a confirmation ID 6 At the command prompt type sImgr atp lt CID gt and press Enter CID is the confirmation ID that you received from the call center cx Administrator C Windows system32 cmd exe C Users Administrator gt slmgr atp RRRXRX KRRKKK KKRRRR RRRKRKR KRKKKK The Windows activation is complete SETTING FOR SOLVING PROBLEMS Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5 Appendix E Installing Windows Server 2008 This section explains how to install the Windows Server 2008 NOTICE Read the following notes or information before installing the Windows Server 2008 Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your server supports the following optional boards NOTE If you want to install the other boards by using a driver floppy disk OEM Disk for Mass storage device except ones listed below see Installing with the OEM Disk for Mass storage device and Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver of Parameter File Creator in Chapter 6 Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup N8103 109 RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO0 1 5 6 N8103 116A RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO 1 N8103 117A RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO 1 5 6 Onboar
71. You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER from Autorun Menu if you have the computer on which the above operating systems operate Follow the steps below 1 2 3 Prepare one Flash FDD or 3 5 inch floppy disk Start the Operating System Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server The Menu will appear Connect the Flash FDD or insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive Click Create drive disk and select OEM Disk for Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition NOTE You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the Right click Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions F 7 Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions IMPORTANT If you have created the OEM Disk into the Flash FDD connect the Flash FDD before you start the system Turn on the system power 2 Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition CD ROM into the optical disk drive 3 Press Ctrl Alt Delete to reset the system After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk drive press Enter while the message Press any key to boot from CD is displayed at the top of the screen If no bootable operating system ex
72. a manual installation of Windows See Chapter 6 m To update the BIOS Use this function to update the system BIOS or firmware of the server See Chapter 6 m To update the Windows System Update Express5800 system in Windows Autorun Menu Windows based NEC EXPRESSBUILDER feature updates the several resources of Microsoft Windows Server 2003 See Chapter 6 m To install the utilities NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD includes some management software for Windows NEC ESMPRO and so on You can install the applications for Windows from Windows Autorun Menu See Chapter 6 m To read the online documents You can refer to the online documents from Windows Autorun Menu See Chapter 6 These functions are available under the Windows system 2 14 General Description NOTE Some features among those listed above can be used from the remote computer via cross cable COM or LAN See Chapter 6 for details NEC ESMPRO The NEC ESMPRO is server management software that runs on the OS The NEC ESMPRO Manager is management software that enables you to manage and monitor the servers remotely To use this software it is required to install appropriate bundled software on the server NOTE For details of major functions of the NEC ESMPRO system configuration and setups with the NEC ESMPRO see Chapter 6 Available functions of the NEC ESMPRO depend on the OS you install Ask your service representative for details Ma
73. a tool of this product prevention to maintain and to analyze the trouble IMPORTANT The explanation using the floppy disk drive has been described in this book However the floppy disk drive is not built into this product Please use the Flash FDD or USB FDD Starting Maintenance Tools The Maintenance Tools is started according to the following procedure 1 Turn on peripheral devices and the server in this order 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD supplied with your server into the optical disk drive of your server 3 Press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot the server from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server System boots up displaying Boot selection menu Automatic select at 18 seconds IMPORTANT An initial selection of the menu is Os installation Os installation starts by the automatic after the Boot selection menu is displayed 8 38 Troubleshooting 4 When a local console is used Tool menu Normal mode is selected Moreover Tool menu Redirection mode is selected when using it with remote console Return tc IMPORTANT An initial selection of the menu is Japanese Japanese starts by the automatic operation when the operation is not done for five seconds after the Language Selection menu is displayed 5 English is selected The tool menu is displayed TOOL MENU Maintenance Utility BIOS FH Updating
74. adapter All other names show the Optional Network Board 3 Click Driver tab and click Update Driver Hardware Update Wizard appears 4 Select the Install from a list or specific location Advanced radio button and click Next 5 Select the Search for the best driver in these locations radio button and uncheck the Search removable media floppy CD ROM check box 6 Check the Include this location in the search check box and when using N8104 111 specify 015 win winnt dotnet r148 pro100 win32 ndis5x Then click Next When using N8104 112 119 120 121 125A 126 specify 015 win winnt dotnet r148 pro1000 win32 ndis5x Then click Next 7 Click Finish 8 Restart the system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 75 Setup Team Adapter Fault Tolerance AFT is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the group when any trouble occurred on that adapter Adaptive Load Balancing ALB is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and enhances the throughput by operating packet transmission from the server by all the adapters This feature includes AFT feature Switch Fault Tolerance SFT is a feature that provides a failover relationship between two ports when each port is connected to a separate switch SFT supports two ports pe
75. an identical AFT ALB is 1000BASE T adapter possible when using a standard N8104 126 PCI EXPRESS x1 y V y network with the following optional LAN boards Teaming with another N8104 121 is 1000BASE T adapter 2ch alowed N8104 121 PCI EXPRESS x4 V y y Teaming with any other NIC is not allowed Cannot co exist with N8104 112 1 max Cannot co exist with N8103 110 120 1000BASE T adapter 4ch _ S ron 7 N8104 125A PCI EXPRESS x4 V y y Teaming with any other NIC is not allowed Cannot co exist with N8104 112 1 max N8104 112 EAE TERA 2ch gt V Cannot co exist with aa Aes N8104 119 126 120 121 125 Additional RS232C N8117 01A connector kit V y y V 1 max Available Unavailable Lane Indicates the transfer capability transfer bandwidth Example 1 lane 2 5 Gbps unidirectional 4 lanes 10 Gbps unidirectional Socket Indicates the connector size A card that has the socket number or less can be connected Example For a x4 socket a x1 card or x4 card can be inserted A x8 card cannot be inserted 2 The N8117 01A additional RS 232C connector kit comes with two types of cables This equipment uses RS 232C cable B 3 Boards that are up to 173 1 mm long can be inserted into PCI slots 1 2 and 3 and boards that are up to 312 mm long can be inserted into PCI slot 4 9 38 Upgrading Your Server The card capability enclosed in parentheses after each product name indicates th
76. and Delete to reboot the server You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server The system will boot from the DVD ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts Select Create the OEM DISK for Windows from Tools Menu step a Connect the Flash FDD or insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive G 6 Installing Windows Server 2003 7 Select Create a Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER at Create OEM Disk and click Perform 8 Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely Create from Autorun Menu This menu requires Microsoft Windows XP Vista or Windows Server 2003 or later You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER from Autorun Menu if you have the computer on which the above operating systems operate Follow the steps below 1 2 3 Prepare one Flash FDD or 3 5 inch floppy disk Start the Operating System Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server The Menu will appear Connect the Flash FDD or insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive Click Create drive disk and select OEM Disk for Windows Server 2003 NOTE You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the Right click Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely NOTE If the following message is
77. any trouble occurred on that adapter Adaptive Load Balancing ALB is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and enhance the through put by operating packet transmission from the server by all the adapters This feature includes AFT feature Switch Fault Tolerance SFT is a feature that provides a failover relationship between two ports when each port is connected to a separate switch SFT supports two ports per team Static Link Aggregation SLA accounts for the GEC and 802 3ad static protocols SLA is a switch assisted teaming mode and requires configuring ports at both ends of the link server interfaces and switch ports IMPORTANT m AFT ALB setup must be operated after installing the drivers PROSet and restarting the system m All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming must exist on the same LAN If they are connected to the separate switches they will not work normally m The adapters specified as a group of Adaptive Load Balancing ALB can be connected to only Switching Hub m When exchange the mother board or option network card make sure to remove the adapter team before exchanges and recreate the adapter team after exchange complete Confirm the port setting of switching hub L2 matches the server network adapter Teaming mode Create Team 1 Open the Device Manager 2 Open Network adapters Intel R xxx properties 3 Click Teaming tab and check t
78. bad posture when you sit with your back hunched up or you operate a display unit with your face close to the screen Bad working posture may cause eye strain or poor eyesight Adjustment of Display Unit Angles Most display units are designed for adjustment of the horizontal and vertical angles This adjustment is important to prevent the screen from reflecting bright lights and to make the display contents easy to see You will not be able to keep good working posture and you will feel more tired than you should if you operate a display unit without adjusting horizontal and vertical angles Adjustment of Screen Brightness and Contrast The display unit has brightness and contrast adjustment functions The most suitable brightness and contrast depend on the individual and the working environment well lighted room or insufficient light Adjust brightness and contrast so that the screen will be easy to see An extremely bright or dark screen will give a bad effect to your eyes Adjustment of Keyboard Angle The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adjustment of an angle Adjust the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to operate The adjustment assists in reducing strain on your shoulders arms and fingers Cleaning of Equipment Clean equipment regularly It is difficult to see the display contents on a dusty screen Keeping equipment clean is also important for your sight Fatigue and Rest If you f
79. disk drive first lt Menu to check Boot gt message is displayed QO Did you connect an unformatted Flash FDD or insert an unformatted floppy disk Please connect a formatted Flash FDD or insert a formatted floppy disk QO If Os installation default is selected at Boot selection screen following After this message appears check the error and take the appropriate corrective action according to the message listed in the table below Message Cause This EXPRESSBUILDER version was not designed for this computer Insert the correct version and click OK When you click OK the computer reboots This NEC EXPRESSBUILDER version is not designed for this server Execute the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER on the compliant server EXPRESSBUILDER could not get the hardware parameters written in this motherboard This version is not designed for this computer or the motherboard may be broken When you click OK the computer reboots The hardware parameters written in this motherboard are incorrect This version is not designed for this computer or the motherboard may be broken This message is shown when NEC EXPRESSBUILDER could not find system specific information because of mother board exchange and so on Q Ifthe creation of the OEM Disk for Windows failed the following message will be displayed Confirm the message and then try the solution described in the Cause Er
80. displayed the floppy disk is write protected Creation of OEM Disk xj P The format went wrong It is write protected or the floppy disk may be damaged Please check a floppy disk and perform creation of OEM Disk again Cancel write protected state If you have already cancelled write protected state connect the floppy disk drive again Installing Windows Server 2003 G 7 Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2003 IMPORTANT If you have created the OEM Disk into the Flash FDD connect the Flash FDD before you start the system Turn on the system power 2 Insert the Windows Server 2003 CD ROM into the optical disk drive 3 Press Ctrl Alt Delete to reset the system After a bootable operating system has been installed on the hard disk drive press Enter while the message Press any key to boot from CD is displayed at the top of the screen If no bootable operating system exists on the hard disk drive this step is unnecessary The Windows Server 2003 setup screen will appear If the screen is not displayed Enter was not pressed properly Begin after turning on the system power again 4 Ifthe RAID Controller is used press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states Setup is inspecting your computer s hardware configuration or Press F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI
81. domain or workgroup name to be used Enter domain account steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Mi Enter Enter Select Win Select Save Start Ste p network domain gt dows comm gt appilicd gt parameters gt Exitess tions protocol account ponents setup Ifyou want to join in a domain enter the sccount name password of the domain Ifnot selece Join in a workgroup and click Next F Joinin aworkgroup Workgroup name WORKGROUP F Joinin domain T E N Back Next Top Default Version 5 XX XXX XX XXX 5 42 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 14 Select the installing components Select Windows components steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next lt Full Installation gt NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Select Save Start applied gt parietis gt Exis tions setup Enter Step network domait protocol account Enabling the Windows features and Server Roles and please p Server Roles I Web Serveritis DT DHCP Server 7 DNS Server JT File Services T Print Services r Windows features sip Services Detail settings T Simple TCP IP Services T WINS Server Back J Next 1 Top 1J Default Version 5 50 001 02 001 lt ServerCore Installation gt NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Select Save Start r
82. dry cloth Heat will be generated if condensation is formed on a dusty plug which may cause a fire A CAUTION AS AS Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions Immediately after the server is powered off its internal components such as hard disk drives are very hot Leave the server until its internal components fully cool down before installing removing any component Make sure to complete board installation Always install a board firmly An incompletely installed board may cause a contact failure resulting in smoking or fire Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap The unused power supply cable connectors are covered with the protective cap to prevent short circuits and electrical hazards when removing the power supply cable connector from the install devices attach the protective cap to the connector Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock 1 8 Notes on Using Your Server During Operation A CAUTION A SO Stay away from the fan Keep your hand or hair away from the cooling fan on the rear of the server Failure to follow this warning may get your hand or hair caught in the fan resulting in injury Avoid contact with the server during thunderstorms If it starts thundering before you disconnect the power plug do not touch any part of the server including the cables Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an e
83. failure Write back Off reduces performance by approximately 50 4 RA Sets parameter for Read Ahead Parameter Remarks Off Does not perform read ahead On Performs read ahead 4 36 Configuring Your Server 10 11 12 13 14 15 5 Span Sets Span Parameter Remarks SPAN NO Does not set span SPAN YES Sets span When performing SPAN create two or more sets of the same pack at pack creation as shown in the figure below STRIPING of RAID1 ID O ONLIN AOO 01 RAID1 1 ONLIN A00 02 SPAN ONLIN A01 01 ONLIN A01 02 Lo Lo RAID1 When all settings are completed select Accept and then press Enter to create virtual drive The created virtual drive is displayed in the Virtual Drive Configured screen After creating virtual drive press Esc to close the screen Go back to the Save Configuration screen and then select Yes to save the configuration When the confirmation message shows that the configuration has been saved press Esc to return to the TOP menu screen On the TOP menu screen select Objects gt Virtual Drive gt View Update Parameters to check virtual drive information Select Initialize in the TOP menu screen When the Virtual Drives screen appears move the cursor to the virtual drive to be initialized and press Space The virtual drive is selected After selecting virtual drive
84. file with the entire system m Regardless of the size of the mounted memory or the Write debugging information type of memory dump the maximum size of the dump file is The size of the mounted memory 300MB m If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs Example The partition size required for a system with an installed memory size of 1GB 1 024MB and a full installation of the operating system 11 600MB 1 024MB 1 5 1 024MB 300MB application size 14 460MB application size If the provided partition size is smaller than that required to install the OS and paging file expand the partition size or utilize a larger disk If your system does not have a sufficient dump file size divide the required file space into multiple disks by performing the steps below 1 Set the system partition size to a size sufficient to install the OS and paging file 2 See Setting for Solving Problems to write the debug information of the dump file onto another disk If there is not enough disk space to write the debug information add another disk for the dump file 5 32 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup When the system is Windows Server 2008 32 bit x86 Edition Required partition size size required to install OS paging file size dump file size application size Size required to install OS 6 300MB Full Installation 9 30
85. for EXPRESSBUILDER ereere G 5 Windows Server 2003 Clean Installation ccccecccsseescessceeeceeeceeceecesecaeceenseceaeenseceeeneeenes G 7 Procedure for License Authentication ccccecccesceseeesecesecesecseecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeerenarees G 12 Updating the System Applying Service Pack cc cceeseesceecceseceeceseceeecseeeseeeneeneeeereeseens G 12 Driver Installation and Advanced Settings cccecccesccsssceseceseceseceeecseeeseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeneeseeeeereerens G 18 PROSE ATTESE EE Miers esters Sibi ater A N E G 18 NG twOrtk Dry ERTE E E cctavegs E EE G 19 Optional Network Board Driver sesesesssserseeseesssseeeesseserserseesesstseessesetstssereessreresseseeseeseene G 19 SUP CAM o EO AEEA ERT A EESE ET G 20 SYET ntaa 0 D E A E E E T G 20 Graphics Accelerator Driver e sessseseeessseeeeseesrsseeressesesestesessteresstseestestestsseeressrsresseeessesees G 22 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 75 95 107 ssssssssesssseesssessrssesersssreressessesseserse G 22 Installing SAS Controller Driver N8103 104A ssssssssssesserssssreesssessrsresersesseeresseseeseesessese G 22 About Windows Activation cc ceesesssssecseesecseeeecseeeeesecseesecnecscceasnesaecasesecsessteneeeeeeaeeassneeas G 23 Setting for Solving Problems senccse i E EEE Ea s i itoe G 24 Appendix H Using a Client Computer Which Has a CD Drive cc seeeeeeeeeeeeees H 1 Appendix Product Configuration Reco
86. hit a Flash FDD m Do not leave a Flash FDD in a place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a heater m Do not handle a Flash FDD while eating drinking or smoking Also be careful not to get thinner or alcohol on a Flash FDD m Be careful when connecting a Flash FDD to the server m Do not move a Flash FDD while it is connected to the USB connecter of the server Doing so might cause the Flash FDD to fail m After using a Flash FDD disconnect it from the server Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server This chapter describes how to set up your server appropriate for your system on a step by step basis 3 2 Setting Up Your Server SETUP FLOW Follow the flowchart below to set up the server Unpacking the system Unpack the server and accessories from the shipping carton box Installing optional devices If you have purchased any optional device for the server see Chapter 9 to install it Connecting peripheral devices Connect peripheral devices to the server Connecting the power cord Connect the power cord to the server Turning on the server Power on the server to start software setups Setups depend on the optional internal devices installed and the peripheral devices connected Installing the operating system Install an operating system to the server See Chapter 5 Installing the utilities Install the utilities in the provided NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD See Chapter 6 Making backup copies of sys
87. in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD When you start the Express Setup a dialog to specify an application appears Select Universal RAID Utility on the dialog Manual Setup Windows You can start the setup program of Universal RAID Utility from Autorun Menu Click Setup Software Universal RAID Utility in Autorun Menu You need to install the following software m Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 or later m The Runtime component of the Microsoft Visual C 2005 SP1 You can install these software from Autorun Menu too Click Setup Windows Install the NET Framework Ver 2 0 Redistributable Package x86 If CPU architecture is x64 Install the NET Framework Ver2 0 Redistributable Package x64 in Autorun Menu for the setup of Microsoft NET Framework 2 0 Click Setup Windows Install the Microsoft Visual C 2005 SP1 Redistributable Package x86 Use the x86 package whatever the CPU architecture may be for the setup of the Runtime component of the Microsoft Visual C 2005 SP1 m Microsoft NET Framework To use the RAID Viewer and Log Viewer Microsoft NET Framework Version 2 0 or higher is required Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Vista Windows 7 include NET Framework Version 2 0 or higher Therefore you do not need to install NET Framework in case of using them 6 24 Installing and Using Utilities m Runtime component of Microsoft Visual C 2005 SP1 library To use the RAID Vi
88. into the mating connector securely Make sure the jumper switches have been returned to their original positions after CMOS clearing See Configuring Mother Board Jumpers in Chapter 4 for the positions of the jumper switches Fail to power on the server 0 Is the server is properly supplied with power Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet or UPS that meets the power specifications for the server Check the power cord for broken shield or bent plugs Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on Ifthe power cord is plugged to a UPS make sure the UPS is powered and it outputs power See the manual that comes with the UPS for details Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using the BIOS Setup utility of the server lt Menu to check Advanced AC LINK gt QO Did you press the POWER SLEEP switch Press the POWER SLEEP switch on the front of the server to turn on the power the POWER SLEEP lamp lights 8 12 Troubleshooting POST fails to complete m Is the DIMM board installed Check the installation location of DIMMs see Chapter 9 Is the memory size large The memory check may take a few seconds if the memory size is large Wait for a while Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you started the server If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start up
89. mouse for operation NOTE m Functions assigned to the mouse buttons vary depending on the software For details refer to the manual provided with the software m Use the mouse on a clean desk Using the mouse on a dusty or dirty desk disturbs smooth movement or normal operation of the mouse When your mouse movement seems dull clean your mouse See Chapter 7 Mouse operation includes Click Double click and Drag Click Press the button only once and release it Double click Press the button twice consecutively and release it Drag Press and hold the button and move the mouse Operation of the server involves combinations of these mouse operations and data entries with the keyboard on es Click Double click Drag Appendix C IRQ The factory set interrupt requests are listed below Find an appropriate one to install an optional device IRQ Peripheral Device Controller 0 System timer 1 Keyboard 2 Cascade connection 3 COM2 serial port 4 COM1 serial port 5 PCI 6 Floppy disk 7 Parallel port 8 Real time clock 9 Microsoft ACPI Compliant System 10 PCI 11 PCI 12 Mouse 13 Numeric processor 14 Primary IDE channel 15 Secondary IDE channel C 2 IRQ This page is intentionally left blank Appendix D Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 This section explains how to install the Windows Server 2008 R2 NOTICE
90. not existing in Network adapters tree and reboot the system Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions F 25 Setting WOL Refer to the following procedure to enable WOL When PROSet is not installed 1 2 NONA Start Device Manager Point to Network adapters and double click Intel R 82547L Gigabit Network Connection to open the adapter Properties Click Power Management tab and change setting in Wake On LAN according to the following list Setting item Change setting Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power ON Allow this device to bring the computer out of standby ON or OFF IMPORTANT E Set Allow this device to bring to ON WOL by DirectedPacket or MagicPacket will be available on Standby state E WOL by DirectedPacket is not available on Hibernate and Shutdown state 1 Packet with the Ethernet address of the adapter in ethernet header or Packet with an IP address assigned to the adapter in IP header Click Advanced tab and point to Enable PME Set the Enable in Value Click OK Restart the system F 26 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions When PROSet is installed 1 Start Device Manager 2 Point to Network adapters and double click Intel R 82547L Gigabit Network Connection to open the adapter Properties 3 Click Power Management tab and change setting in Wake On LAN according to the follo
91. not remove the lithium battery a Disconnect the power plug before working with the server A CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions Make sure to complete board installation Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself Upgrading Your Server 9 3 STATIC PRECAUTIONS An electrostatic discharge ESD can damage disk drives option boards and other components Electronic device can be easily damaged by static electricity To prevent damage observe the following information Wear a wrist strap an arm belt or anti static glove Wear a wrist strap on your wrist Select a suitable work space Work with the server on the anti static or concrete floor When you work with the server on a carpet where static electricity is likely to be generated make sure take anti static measures beforehand Use a work table Place the server on an anti static mat to work with it Clothe Do not wear a wool or synthetic cloth to work with the server Wear anti static shoes to work with the server Take off any jewels a ring bracelet or wrist watch before working with the server Handling of components Keep any component in a
92. of network adapters NOTE Before you remove note down the current settings e g IP addresses of the standard and optional adapters teamed for network redundancy Configure the settings after reinstalling the LAN driver and PROSet To remove the team see Setup Team In Control Panel click Uninstall Program Double click Intel R Network Connections 14 8 43 0 Intel R Network Connections Remove Options appears 4 In Remove Options click Remove Intel R Network Connections Remove Software appears 5 Select Yes The uninstallation starts automatically 6 When InstallShield Wizard Completed appears Click Finish Restart the system E 24 Installing Windows Server 2008 For a server running a Server Core installation 1 Note down the current settings e g IP addresses of the standard and optional adapters teamed for network redundancy before uninstalling LAN driver Configure the settings after reinstalling the LAN driver At a command prompt run dxsetup exe in your removable medium containing the Driver Set Windows Server 2008 64 bit x64 Editions lt drive letter gt 015 win winnt ws2008x64 r148 apps prosetdx vistax64 dxsetup exe Windows Server 2008 32 bit x86 Editions lt drive letter gt 015 win winnt ws2008 r148 apps prosetdx vista32 dxsetup exe In IntelR Network Connections InstallShield Wizard click Next Select Remove and click Next Cl
93. open TEAM Team name properties Click Setting tab Click Remove Team button Click Yes to the message ae SS gt ED E Confirm TEAM Team name adapter in not existing in Network adapters tree and reboot the system Setting WOL Refer to the following procedure to enable WOL 1 Start Device Manager 2 Point to Network adapters and double click Intel R 82547L Gigabit Network Connection to open the adapter Properties 3 Click Power Management tab and change setting in Wake On LAN according to the following list Setting item Change setting Wake On Magic Packet ON Wake on Magic Packet from power off state ON Wake on Link OFF Wake on Pattern Match OFF NOTES m Power Saver Options setting is not necessary to change m Above setting will be maintained until manually resetting are executed IMPORTANT The parameters of Wake On LAN will not exist if the network ports are not available for WOL 4 Click OK 5 Restart the system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 27 Graphics Accelerator Driver If you use standard graphics accelerator drivers update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system Standard graphics accelerator drivers will be installed automatically Refer to Graphics Accelerator Driver described in Appendix D 27 when you want to reinstall the driver individually Ins
94. operated on NEC Express5800 Server you can use the other procedure described later Follow the steps below 1 2 3 4 o Prepare one Flash FDD or 3 5 inch floppy disk Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot the server You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server The system will boot from the DVD ROM and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts Select Create the OEM Disk for Windows from Tools Menu step Connect the Flash FDD or insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive Select Create an Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER at Create OEM Disk and click Perform Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely NOTE If the following message is displayed the floppy disk is write protected Creation of OEM Disk xj Pa The format went wrong It is write protected or the floppy disk may be damaged Please check a floppy disk and perform creation of OEM Disk again Cancel write protected state If you have already cancelled write protected state connect the floppy disk drive again F 6 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Create from Autorun Menu This menu requires Microsoft Windows XP Vista or Windows Server 2003 or later
95. per team Static Link Aggregation SLA accounts for the GEC and 802 3ad static protocols SLA is a switch assisted teaming mode and requires configuring ports at both ends of the link server interfaces and switch ports IMPORTANT m AFT ALB setup must be operated after system update and restarting the system m All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming must exist on the same LAN If they are connected to the separate switches they will not work normally m The adapters specified as a group of Adaptive Load Balancing ALB can be connected to only Switching Hub m When exchange the mother board or option network card make sure to remove the adapter team before exchanges and recreate the adapter team after exchange complete Confirm the port setting of switching hub L2 matches the server network adapter Teaming mode m Teaming is not supported with Windows Server Core Create Team 1 Open the Device Manager Open Network adapters Intel R xxx properties Click Teaming tab and check the Team this adapter with other adapters check box Click New Team Fill the name of the team in Specify a name for the team and click Next Include the adapter to the team and click Next D 24 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 6 Select a team mode and then click Next IMPORTANT Following team types are supported Adapter Fault Tolerance Adaptive Load Balancing Static Link Aggre
96. procedure in the case of the classic start menu Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run dxsetup exe in the following directory 015 win winnt w2k3amd r148 apps prosetdx winx64 The Intel R PROSet InstallShield Wizard dialog starts Click Next Choose I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next Click Next Click Install When InstallShield Wizard Completed window is displayed click Finished Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from the optical disk drive restart the system a nN o or a Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions F 21 Network Driver Specify the details of network driver One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically but the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified manually IP addresses is not be able to set when the Internet Protocol TCP IP check box OFF This phenomenon will occur with the certain condition Check ON the Internet Protocol TCP IP check box and IP address will be able to set When PROSet is not installed 1 2 3 Open the Device Manager Double click Network Adapter Name in the list Click the Advanced and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Click OK Restart the system When PROSet is installed Open the Device Manager Double click Network Adapter Name in the list Click the Li
97. tasks described in Setup of Device Driver Normally Install in Server and Updating the System of this chapter D 18 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 Procedure for License Authentication Product Key used in the procedure for license authentication should be matched with the COA label in which the product key contained in Windows Server 2008 R2 is written NOTES m Execute the activation within 30 days m COA label may be attached to your server Updating the System IMPORTANT Updating the System disables the Scalable Networking Pack SNP function The setting of SNP function may affect the system performance so refer to the attention of SNP detail in the following site before setting it http www nec com global prod express Update the system in the situation below m CPU is expanded expanded to single processor to multi processor m Modified system configuration m Recovered the system using recovery process The system update brings the correction program provided by Microsoft to be applied to reinforce the system security The system update is recommended Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 D 19 Application Process of Updating the System Updating the System applies the drivers necessary for NEC Express5800 Series 1 Log on to the system using an administrator account 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive 3 Hereinafter the setup process is depending
98. that needs to input or select Process that proceeds automatically Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 9 Installing the Windows Server 2008 R2 Express Setup proceeds the setup by selecting or inputting several parameters on the wizard You can also save the parameters to a floppy disk as a parameters file 1 Turn the power of peripheral device on and then turn on the server 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server 3 Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server The system will boot from the DVD and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts Select Os installation default from the Boot selection menu If you do not hit any key Os installation is selected automatically The Top menu will appear Boot selection Automatic select at 18 seconds 4 Select English from the Select Language click OK x EXPRESSBUILDER THE FAS SB FB BRL T lt KESL Select a language to use for the EXPRESSBUILDER E BAB English Francais Italiano Deutsch Espanol 5 10 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 When the Software Licence Agreement screen of Windows PE appears click Yes nn x Confirm the following End User License Agreement To use this software agree this license END USER
99. the File menu select Save As The Save As window appears Select All captured frames from Frame selection and enter the names of a folder and a file NOTE The default folder name is C Users lt User name gt Documents Network Monitor 3 Captures 7 Click Save to create the file in the folder selected in step 6 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 91 Network Monitor Windows Server 2003 To utilize Network Monitor you need to restart the system after the installation has completed so we recommend to install Network Monitor before any network trouble may occur 1 8 9 10 Point to Settings from Start menu and click Control Panel The Control Panel dialog box appears Double click Add or Remove Programs The Add or Remove Programs dialog box appears Click Add Remove Windows Component The Windows Components Wizard dialog box appears Click Management and Monitoring Tools and then click Details The Management and Monitoring Tools dialog appears Click to select the Network Monitor Tools check box and then click OK The Windows Components Wizard dialog box appears again so click Next If the setup asks to install the disk insert the OS CD ROM into optical disk drive and click OK Click Finish in the Windows Component Wizard dialog box Close the Add or Remove Programs dialog box Close the Control Panel dialog box To start Network
100. the Hotfix for Windows x64 KB921411 and the Updating the System according to the following process 1 2 Start the Windows Explorer and click Tools and Folder Options Select Files and Folders Hidden files and folders Show hidden files and folders radio button from Advanced settings in the View tab Check off the following check box in the Files and Folders from Advanced settings in the View tab and then click OK Hide extensions for know file type Hide protected operating system files Recommended When the message You have chosen to display protected operating system files is displayed click Yes Make sure of the files Open lt System drive gt WINDOWS system32 drivers directory and make sure usbhub sys and usbport sys are exists in the directory If you can not found them copy the files according to the following process 1 Open lt System drive gt WINDOWS system32 dllcache directory 2 Copy usbhub sys and usbport sys from the directory noted above to lt Systemdrive gt WINDOWS system32 drivers Restart the system Refer to Application process of the Hotfix KB921411 and apply the Hotfix for Windows x64 KB921411 Refer to Application process of Updating the System and execute Updating the System Restart the system With that process is finished Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions F 19 DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SE
101. the CMOS data resumes the factory set configuration data Do not change any other switch settings Any change may cause the server to fail or malfunction Mother board Jumper switch to clear CMOS CMOS_CLR Protect Factory Set 1 OJ1 E Clear O J3 3 Jumper switch to clear password PASSWORD_CLR Protect cI Factory Set ear O 1 F Configuring Your Server 4 47 The following describe the clearing procedure A WARNING Do not disassemble repair or alter the server Never attempt to disassemble repair or alter the server on any occasion other than described in this manual Failure to follow this instruction may cause an electric shock or fire as well as malfunctions of the server PSO Clearing CMOS Data 1 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal as described in Chapter 9 of this guide to prepare 2 Remove the side cover see Chapter 9 ad Install the jumper on position 2 3 CMOS clear of the jumper block See the figure on the previous page to find the location of this jumper After five seconds later reinstall the jumper to original position 1 2 Reinstall the side cover and connect the interface cables Connect the power cord to the server and then t
102. the operating system is installed is smaller than that required to install the OS and paging file expand the partition size or utilize a larger disk If your system does not have a sufficient dump file size divide the required file space into multiple disks by performing the steps below 1 Set the partition size to a size sufficient to install the OS and paging file 2 See Setting for Solving Problems to write the debug information of the dump file onto another disk If there is not enough disk space to write the debug information add another disk for the dump file Installing Windows Server 2008 E 5 BitLocker If you use BitLocker note the following m Before you install Windows Server 2008 create two partitions System partition for a loader Boot partition for the operating system NOTE For more information see the following documentation in Microsoft TechNet Windows BitLocker Drive Encryption Step by Step Guide Be sure to keep the recovery password secure Do not keep it around a server running BitLocker IMPORTANT Without the recovery password you cannot start the operating system and see the partition content encrypted by BitLocker The recovery password may be needed when you start the operating system after performing the following tasks Replacing the motherboard Initializing the TPM Changing the BIOS setting m Windows Server 2008 is not installed in the partition encryp
103. the power plug from the outlet then contact your service representative Using the server in such conditions may cause a fire Keep needles or metal objects away from the server Do not insert needles or metal objects into ventilation holes in the server or openings in the floppy disk or optical disk drive Doing so may cause an electric shock CAUTION DA Keep water or foreign matter away from the server Do not let any form of liquid water etc or foreign matter e g pins or paper clips enter the server Failure to follow this warning may cause an electric shock a fire or a failure of the server When such things accidentally enter the server immediately turn off the power and disconnect the power plug from the outlet Do not disassemble the server Contact your service representative 1 4 Notes on Using Your Server Power Supply and Power Cord Use A WARNING AQ Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand Do not disconnect connect the plug while your hands are wet Failure to follow this warning may cause an electric shock SO Do not connect the ground wire to a gas pipe Ay Never connect the ground wire to a gas pipe Failure to follow this warning may A cause a gas explosion A CAUTION Plug in to a proper power source Use a proper wall outlet of the specified voltage Use of an improper power source may cause a fire or a power leak Do not install the server whe
104. the setting again 0251 System CMOS checksum bad The default values have been set Run BIOS SETUP Default configuration used to provide the setting again If the same error persists contact your service representative 0252 Password checksum bad The password has been cleared Run BIOS SETUP Passwords cleared to set the password again 0260 System timer error Run BIOS SETUP to set date and time again If the 0270 Real time clock error same error persists contact your service 0271 Check date and time settings representative 02D0 System cache error Cache Contact your service representative disabled 02D1 System Memory exceeds the Contact your service representative CPU s caching limit 02F4 EISA CMOS not writable 02F5 DMA Test Failed 02F6 Software NMI Failed 02F7 Fail safe Timer NMI Failed 0613 Com A configuration changed Check if COM A is properly configured 0614 Com A config error device disabled Troubleshooting 8 7 Error Error message Recommended Action code 0615 Com B configuration changed Check if COM B is properly configured 0616 Com B config error device disabled OBOO WDT timeout occurred at previous Reboot reset the server If the server starts boot in POST normally confirm the DMI log 0BO1 WDT timeout occurred at previous boot in OS boot 0B02 WDT timeout occurred at previous boot in OS running 0B28 Unsupported C
105. to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification In such case follow the message to restart the system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 87 How to Create a User mode Process Dump File When the system is Windows Server 2008 R2 User mode Process Dump is the file that records information when any application error occurs When any application error occurs do not close the pop up window that notifies the error and then collect a dump using following process 1 Right click a blank part of the taskbar and click Task Manager or press Ctrl Shift Esc to start Task Manager 2 Click Processes tab 3 Right click on process name that you want to collect dump and then click Create Dump File 4 The dump file is stored in following directory C Users lt User Name gt AppData Local Temp NOTE The folder may be treated as hidden folder If the folder does not appear run Explorer and select Organize Folder and search options View and check to Show hidden files folders and drives When the User mode Process Dump is created pick up the file from the directory described in Step 4 Refer to Knowledge Base of Microsoft web site for more information about the User mode Process Dump file collection How to create a user mode process dump file in Windows Server 2008 http support microsoft com kb 949 1 80 en us NOTE For Windows Server 2008 R2 Dr
106. to see that the hard disk drive is correctly recognized See Chapter 4 for details Upgrading Your Server 9 23 Use of Internal Hard Disk Drives in the RAID System This section describes how to use hard disk drives installed in the cage in the RAID System IMPORTANT m Making hard disk drives in the RAID System or changing the RAID level initializes hard disk drives If the hard disk drive to be configured in the RAID System has your valuable data stored make sure to make a backup copy of the data in another hard disk drive before installing the RAID Controller and configuring the RAID System m You can configure a logical drive with a single physical device m Use hard disk drives of the same capacity and performance e g revolution for each pack to configure them in the RAID System NOTES m Make sure of RAID levels and hard disk drives available for the RAID Controller to choose an appropriate controller m A Logical Drive except for RAIDO increases disk reliability However the actually available capacity becomes smaller than the total hard disk drive capacity in the Logical Drive You can build a RAID System by using the Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID software or optional RAID Controller N8103 109 116A 117A hardware 9 24 Upgrading Your Server m The hard disk drive slot number SLT that is displayed on the Windows System Event Log or RAID system management utility scre
107. to third parties NEC is not liable for damage caused by such leakage IMPORTANT m The status before connecting a Flash FDD to the server is applied to its write protect switch Therefore changing this write protect switch after connecting the Flash FDD to the server is ignored If it becomes necessary to change the write protect switch while using the connected Flash FDD disconnect the Flash FDD and then change the switch Be careful not to slide the Flash FDD write protect switch when connecting or disconnecting the Flash FDD Precautions Use a Flash FDD only for temporary purposes such as loading the device drivers during OS installation Do not use it to back up data Compensation for Saved Data NEC is not liable for data saved in a Flash FDD and will not provide compensation if such data is lost Handling the Flash FDD m Do not turn off the Flash FDD while the access LED of the unit is blinking Doing so might cause the Flash FDD to fail or corrupt data saved in it m A Flash FDD is a consumable product If an error occurs in a Flash FDD use a new Flash FDD instead of continuing to use the old one m Be sure to connect a Flash FDD directly to a USB connector not by way of a USB hub m Before touching a Flash FDD eliminate static electricity from your body by touching metal such as a door knob or aluminum sash 2 24 General Description m Do not disassemble a Flash FDD m Do not to shake or
108. turning off your system 3 12 Setting Up Your Server INSTALLING OPERATING SYSTEM See Chapter 5 for installing Microsoft Windows Server 2008 and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 To install the other operating system listed above contact your service representative IMPORTANT Use NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for initial setup of your server The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is support software for the server It simplifies the process of installing and configuring your server See Chapter 6 for details on NEC EXPRESSBUILDER INSTALLING UTILITIES Install the utilities that come with the server See Chapter 6 for details MAKING BACKUP COPIES OF SYSTEM INFORMATION The system information includes the current BIOS settings and any specific information for the server Save the information after completing the system setup Without the backup data you will not be able to recover the information You can save the information by the following process 1 Connect Flash FDD or USB FDD to the USB connector 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive and reboot the system Select Tool menu Normal mode Select English Select Maintenance Utility Select System Information Management RO OS ee ee Select Save Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server Configuration and setup utilities are used to change your system configuration You can configure your system as well as option boards you may add to your syst
109. update all the drivers after the system update For more information see Installing and Setting Device Drivers in Chapter 5 m Ifthe hard disk drive can not be recognized you can not recover the system For Windows Server 2008 R2 If the system fails to start for some reason rebuild the system using the recovery console Note that this method is recommended for only users and administrators who have a thorough knowledge of the recovery console For more information refer to Online Help For Windows Server 2008 If the system fails to start for some reason rebuild the system using the recovery console Note that this method is recommended for only users and administrators who have a thorough knowledge of the recovery console For more information refer to Online Help For Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions If the system fails to start for some reason rebuild the system using the recovery console Note that this method is recommended for only users and administrators who have a thorough knowledge of the recovery console For more information refer to Online Help For Windows Server 2003 If the system fails to start for some reason rebuild the system using the recovery console Note that this method is recommended for only users and administrators who have a thorough knowledge of the recovery console For more information refer to Online Help Troubleshooting 8 37 MAINTENANCE TOOLS The Maintenance Tools is
110. use two hard disk drives of the same capacity if you are going to configure RAID1 Enabling RAID Feature To configure a hard disk drive as RAID System change the RAID System configuration jumper switch on mother board A WARNING Q Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow CK these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details a Do not remove the lithium battery ae a Do not disassemble repair or alter the server CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow A these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 A A to 1 8 for details Make sure to complete board installation Do not install the server on a rack with leaving covers removed Do not pinch your finger with mechanical components Note high temperature Do not pull out a device from the rack if the rack is unstable Do not leave more than one device being pulled out from the rack Configuring Your Server 4 29 1 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal as described in Chapter 9 of this guide to prepare Remove the side cover see Chapter 9 Locate the position of the RAID configuration jumper on the mother board as shown below RAID configuration jumper switch SWRAID O non RAID 44441444
111. with Express Setup Installing with the OEM Disk for Mass Storage Device This section explains how to setup with the OEM Disk You usually do not have to do as follows If your system has any Mass storage devices you have to set as follows depending on your system The detailed information is provided by the manual of the Mass storage device Installation of Mass Storage Device not to be Supported by Express Setup If you would like to install or re install the OS when the system has new mass storage device not to be supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER you have to set as follows 1 2 Read the manual supplied with the mass storage device before setting the server If the mass storage device is RAID Controller configure the RAID System before running the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Boot the system from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD Select Load the optional driver into the EXPRESSBUILDER from the Top menu click Next Setting the driver disk for the mass storage controller Press the Perform button NOTE By choosing this option you can load the driver provided by CD ROM or floppy disk to proceed with the Express Setup Perform Express Setup with the following settings a When Enter RAID settings appears check Skip the logical drive creation b Confirm Apply OEM Disk for mass storage device is displayed in Selected applications box at Select applications steps Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities T
112. you import a transportable shadow copy to another server that has a read only volume while operating Windows Server 2008 R2 Event ID Source Level Description Event ID Source Level Description 8193 VSS Error Volume Shadow Copy Service error Unexpected error calling routine IOCTL_DISK_GET_DRIVE LAYOUT_EX mpio disk amp ven_nec amp pro d_istorage 2000 amp rev_2800 1 amp 7f6ac24 amp 0 amp 303030303030303933313030 303735373030323934 GUID BuildLunInfoForDrive hr 0x80070013 This media is write protected 12289 VSS Error Volume Shadow Copy Service error Unexpected error DeviceloControl storage volume GUID 0000000000010000 GUID 00000000000002B8 0x00560000 0000000000000000 0 00000000002BE0C0 4096 0 hr 0x80070013 This media is write protected Go to the Microsoft website http support microsoft com kb 2003016 en us Troubleshooting 8 19 The following warnings are logged to application event log when import a transportable shadow copy to another server that has a floppy disk drive while operating Windows Server 2008 R2 Event ID Source Level Description 12289 VSS Error Volume shadow copy service error unexpected error DeviceloControl 6 usbstor sfloppy amp ven_teac amp prod_fd OSpub amp rev_3000 amp 158e20d0 amp 0 GUID 00000000000002B8 0x00560000 0000000000000000 0 0000000000327C70 4096 0 HR 0x80070032 this requ
113. 003 once provide settings as shown below then shutdown the system After restart the Remote Power On Off feature is available unless the AC power is turned off Select Start gt Administrative Tools Computer Management Select Device Manager double click Intel R PRO 1000EB Network Connection with I O Acceleration n under Network Adapter and specify as follows in Detail tab PME ON Wake On Magic Packet The system time lags If you do not use the server that adjusts time such as NTP Network Time Protocol Server the system time may differ from actual time In this case use NTP server or disable Windows Time Service Fail to access to USB devices on Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition or Windows Server 2003 QO Did you apply Hotfix for Windows x64 KB921411 or Hotfix for Windows Server 2003 KB921411 prior to the Updating the System process Specify whether is displayed or not on the USB root hub lt verification process gt Click Start menu right click My Computer and click Manage to start Device Manager And then select Device Manager from the left side window If is displayed on the USB root hub apply the Hotfix according to the Recovery process For Recovery process see Appendix F or Appendix G for details 8 26 Troubleshooting Fail to restart the system with the message means pci sys missing or corrupt after you executed Updating the System process to W
114. 02 gt Example Symbol to draw attention Term indicating a degree of danger A CAUTION Plug in to a proper power source A A Use a proper wall outlet of the specified voltage Use of an improper power source may cause a fire or a power leak Symbol indicating a prohibited Description of a danger action may not always be indicated SYMBOLS USED IN THIS MANUAL AND WARNING LABELS Attentions Indicates that improper use may cause an electric shock Indicates that improper use may cause fingers to be caught Indicates that improper use may cause personal injury Indicates that improper use may cause personal injury Indicates that improper use may cause fumes or fire Indicates that improper use may cause loss of eyesight due to laser beam Indicates that improper use may cause explosion gt PPPPP Pre Indicates a general notice or warning that cannot be specifically identified Prohibited Actions Do not disassemble repair or modify the server Otherwise an electric shock or fire may be caused Do not place the server near the fire Otherwise a fire may be caused Do not touch the component specified by this symbol Otherwise an electric shock or burn may be caused Do not use the server in the place where water or liquid may pour Otherwise an electric shock or fire may be caused Do not touch the server with wet hand Otherwise an ele
115. 08 DVD ROM into your DVD ROM drive Restart the system To restart the system press Ctrl Alt Del or turn off the system once and then turn it on again IMPORTANT When prompted to press any key to boot from CD or DVD press Enter while the message is displayed If the Windows installation screen shown in step 4 does not appear turn off the system and then turn it on again The DVD ROM starts A message Windows is loading files appears Select a language and other options from the drop down lists and then click Next Install Windows gt Windows Server 2008 Language to install Er nu Rus elt English United States z Enter your language and other preferences and click Net to continue Copyright 2007 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved E 10 Installing Windows Server 2008 5 Click the Install now button The installation starts Install Windows Windows Server 2008 Install now gt What to know before installing Windows Repair your computer Copyright 2007 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Ifthe following message is displayed Go to Step 6 Ifthe following message is not displayed Go to Step 9 Load Driver A required CD DVD drive device driver is missing If you have a driver for floppy disk CD DVD or USB flash drive please insert it now Note If the Windows installation media is in the CD DVD drive you can safel
116. 0MB Full Installation with Service Pack 2 9 400MB Full Installation Service Pack 2 or 2 200MB Server Core Installation 5 200MB Server Core Installation with Service Pack 2 5 300MB Server Core Installation Service Pack 2 Paging file size recommended Installed memory size 1 5 Dump file size Installed memory size 300MB Application size Required size IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system m Depending on system configuration 4096MB or more per partition might not be able to be set to the paging file size Set it to 4 095MB when the message to ask a value that is smaller than 4096MB is displayed m The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory mounted is 2048MB 300MB m If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs Example The partition size required for a system with an installed memory size of 1GB 1 024MB and a full installation of the operating system 6 300MB 1 024MB 1 5 1 024MB 300MB application size 9 160MB applic
117. 14 EERE EE EEEEE Mother board NOTES m The factory setting of the RAID configuration jumper switch depends on your order m If you are using an Optional RAID Controller set the RAID configuration jumper switch to the position non RAID 4 Install the side cover removed in Step 2 Then configure the RAID system by using the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility 4 30 Configuring Your Server Setup Utility This section describes the RAID configuration tool LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility Running LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility 1 When the following screen appears after you have powered on the server press Esc The POST screen appears NE Press lt F2 gt to enter Setup or lt F12 gt Press to Network 2 Check the description as shown below on the POST screen then press Ctrl M LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility starts LSI SoftwareRAID BIOS Version xxxxxx LSI MPT RAID Found at PCI Bus No xx Bev No xx Scanning for port 00 Responding xxxxxxxx xxxxMB Standard FW xxx DRAM 128MB SDRAM xx Logical drive s Configured Press lt Ctrl gt lt M gt to Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility NOTE At least one hard disk drive must be connected to launch the LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility
118. 2 cccsssesseeee 5 1 About Express Setups 2 2 cccicece deeciececevesicshevsceescevessdedeesdacatevsde n e a e 5 2 Windows Server 2008 R2 io cscic secscsecghesecstecetvepssocsiduievececs deb disdeectelsen sdous ofocetevecpechugedsuerevs coupes seeaves 5 3 Notes on Windows Installation ceeeecsescsssecesessessecseesccneeeceaeeeceeceaeeeesaecaeseesneseeeeaeeeeeaeeates 5 3 Flow Of Setup scce ccscceccccascecseesss et ccc Geiceeeste clues seed sctece dad ducts deb ctcu den fguigudectevachddhassiviueevies teesleeesees 5 8 Installing the Windows Server 2008 R2 ecccesccessceseceseceseeseceseceaecaeecaeeeseeeeeseeeereneeeeeeeeaees 5 9 Installing and Setting Device Drivers ceeccesceesecsseesseeseeseceseeeseeeeeeeeeseenseeeseenaecnsecsteeneeenes 5 22 Setting for Solving Problems 0 cccecccescessceseceseceecseeesecseecseecaeeeseeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseseeeeaeenseenaes 5 27 BitLocker 2 3 tierchenceeon en eee ie de Ahlen ea ee eA lene nd eens 5 27 Windows Server 2008 irienna ea in all ei is eh ee Pe a ees 5 28 Notes on Windows Installation eeceeecsssecssesseesecseeseceeeeecsaeceeeeceaecasesecaeseeeneseeceaeeneeneeas 5 28 BLOW Of Setups ci tessec neces a ede dite cee tech elves tone see del saeco eed oat ee 5 33 Installing the Windows Server 2008 cesccssecsseesecesecesecseeeseeesseeseeeeeseenseeeseesaeeaecseeeeeenes 5 34 Installing and Setting Device DriverS cceeccesecesecsseeseeeseeeeceseeeseeceeeeeeseceseeesecnaeenaeeaeen
119. 2008 R2 See Chapter 5 for details Appendix E Installing Windows Server 2008 describes how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2008 without using Express Setup Using the Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server 2008 See Chapter 5 for details Appendix F Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions describes how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions without using Express Setup Using the Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions See Chapter 5 for details Appendix G Installing Windows Server 2003 describes how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 without using Express Setup Using the Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server 2003 See Chapter 5 for details Appendix H Using a Client Computer Which Has a CD Drive describes how to install the management software of EXPRESSBUILDER to the client computer without the DVD drive Appendix Product Configuration Record Table provides a table to be filled with your server configuration Text Conventions The following conventions are used throughout this manual For safety symbols see SAFETY INDICATIONS provided earlier IMPORTANT Items that are mandatory or require attention when using the server NOTE Helpful and convenient piece of information IN THE PACKAGE The carton contains various accessories as well as the server itself See the Getting Started to make sure that yo
120. 303830 8989898980008 0200090202020 O80 08080 986208 Device with the serial interface e g modem Display unit Device with the USB interface e g terminal adapter Mouse Device with the USB interface e g terminal adapter pe 4 Q REAR 3 8 Setting Up Your Server CONNECTING POWER CORD Connect the provided power cord to the server A WARNING these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow S to 1 8 for details Do not hold the power plug with a wet hand A CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not plug the power cord in to an improper power source Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of connections Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes Use the authorized power cord only OPP 1 Plug the provided power cord into the power receptacle on the rear of the server 2 Plug the other end of the power cord into the wall outlet Setting Up Your Server 3 9 NOTES m To connect the power cord from
121. 71 INSTALLING AND SETTING DEVICE DRIVERS Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers PROSet NOTE All of the operation that related to Intel PROSet must be executed by administrator privileges Operation by Remote Desktop Connection is prohibited Without changing any parameter when opened the properties of adapter teaming click the Cancel button for close the dialog Click OK button will cause temporary loss of network connectivity PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver Utilizing PROSet enables the following items m Confirm detailed information of the adapter m Diagnose loop back test packet transmission test and so on m Setup of teaming Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and enhances throughput between the switches PROSet is necessary to utilize these features Follow the procedure below to install PROSet 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive If the autorun menu is displayed close menu screen 2 The Windows Explorer dialog starts The procedure in the case of the standard start menu Click Start menu and click Windows Explorer The procedure in the case of the classic start menu Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run dxsetup exe in the following directory 015 win winnt d
122. 8103 109 116A 117A be sure to use the optional additional battery to avoid losing data in the unexpected event of a power cut or other serious failure The battery to be used differs depending on the RAID controller as follows When using an N8103 116A 117A RAID controller e N8103 121 additional battery When using an N8103 109 RAID controller e N8103 125 additional battery Notes on use Observe the cautions below when using the additional battery Failure to observe these cautions might result in damage to property or assets such as data or other equipment m Use the additional battery specified for each RAID controller m The additional battery is a very delicate piece of electronic equipment and is easily damaged Before handling the battery be sure to touch the server frame or other area to discharge any static electricity from your body Do not drop or otherwise subject the additional battery to excessive shock or vibration m Be sure to read the user s guide supplied with the additional battery before recycling or disposing of the battery Attaching and removing the N8103 121 additional battery Attaching the battery 1 Attach the connector board and battery control cable supplied with the N8103 121 additional battery to the RAID controller Refer to the user s guide supplied with the additional battery for how to attach the connector board and cable to the RAID controller 2 Prepare the server as shown on Page 9 4 3 R
123. AD CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and the manufacturer Manufacturer of the special purpose computing device or software SYSTEM you acquired which includes certain Microsoft software product s installed on or for use with the SYSTEM SOFTWARE The SOFTWARE includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation ny software provided along with the SOFTWARE that is associated with a separate end user license agreement or separate terms of use is licensed to you under the terms of that license agreement or terms of use rather than this EULA By installing copying downloading accessing or otherwise using the SOFTWARE you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA If you do not agree to the terms of this EULA Manufacturer and Microsoft Licensing GP MS are unwilling to license the SOFTWARE to you In such event you may not use or copy the SOFTWARE and you should promptly contact Manufacturer for instructions on return of the unused product s for a refund in oft 6 Select Perform the Express setup from the Top Menu click Next EXPRESSBUILDER Welcome to the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER writes as EXPRESSBUILDER at the following EXPRESSBUILDER helps you to install the Operating system Check the radio
124. AE EE EE E EEEE E 25 Optional Network Board Driver N8104 112 119 120 121 125A 126 sssr E 25 Setup Tea n neee e pe EE E E A E E E EE tive E 26 Setting WOD pat R E EE EA E E E E E E ER E 28 Graphics Accelerator Driver serseri iiin E e E E EE E aE ea E 29 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 75 95 107 sssessssssssessersssssesssrsessreresseserseeseese E 29 Installing SAS Controller Driver N8103 1O4A eeeeceseceseeseeeeeeeseceecaeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeerens E 29 About Windows Activation cccccccescsseceseceseceeeseeeseeeeeeeenseensecaecaecsaecseecaeeeaeeeeeeneeeereeeeees E 30 Setting for Solving Problems encsi reirei e an Ee i EE EEE o EEEE EEE Ei i E 34 Appendix F Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions cccccssseeeseeeeeeeeeees F 1 NOUCE eink he hen Metra a eh ROS Abeer Gee Oe eel ate eer a Non pect ea ite F 1 Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER eee cccceecseesseesceeeeeeeceeenteenseenees F 1 Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports cccccecccsssssessessceseeeeeseeseesecseesesseenenaes F 2 Installing Service Pack 0 cccsccescessseesceesceeeceecesecseceaecaaecaeecseeeaeeaeeseseaeeseceeeeeeesseseeeneenaeentes F 2 Wpdatine Sy EE EET A E F 2 Re installing to the Hard Disk Drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk F 2 Mounting MO Device e a a e a ae er e ae a a aree aa a Er A a E pee eee hinien F 2 About Removable Media 0 ccccceeccesccsseesseceeeseeeseeseeeecese
125. AS Controller CEE SAS cable HE SATA cable for optical disk drive 10 8 Internal Cabling Diagrams Installation of USB Device Internal Connector Use the K410 209 00 internal USB cable dedicated for this server Do not use the USB cable that comes with the device 5 25 inch device bay Optical disk drive Mother board USB Connector USB10_11 CE USB cable GED SATA cable for optical disk drive Internal Cabling Diagrams 10 9 POWER CABLES An example of the power cable connection is shown in the figure below The server only uses the power cables shown here Onboard SATA HDD 5 25 inch device bay am 4th hard disk drive lt g _ 3rd hard disk drive Fe 2nd hard disk drive gt 1st hard disk drive i T Power cable 10 10 Internal Cabling Diagrams With Optional RAID Controller Installed 5 25 inch device bay a th hard disk drive 3rd hard disk drive RAID Controller ny ee N8103 109 116A 117A 2nd hard disk drive Power cable GE Internal SAS cable K410 220 00 or K410 221 00 power unit side Power cable SAS cable side Appendix A Specifications Item NEC Express5800 GT110b N8100 1592F N8100 1593F N8100 1594F CPU Type Intel Celeron Intel Pentium Intel Xeon Processor G1101 Processor G6950 Processor
126. Autorun Menu Installing on the Mirrored Volume When re installing the OS to a hard disk drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk only the simple dynamic volume is available for installation If you want to install the OS on a volume that is mirrored using Disk Management invalidate the mirroring and reset to the basic disk before the installation and validate the mirroring again after the installation You can create invalidate or delete the mirror volume by using Disk Management in Computer Management Mounting MO Device Do not mount an MO device on your server during the Windows installation About Removable Media Do not set removable media such as DAT and LTO into the device mounted on this computer during the Windows installation Floppy Disk Drive The internal floppy disk drive is not included in your system at the standard configuration Prepare the optional Flash FDD or USB FDD if necessary Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 D 3 About the System Partition Size The system partition size can be calculated from the following formula When the system is Windows Server 2008 R2 Required partition size size required to install OS paging file size dump file size application size Size required to install OS 8 000MB Full Installation or 3 500MB Server Core Installation Paging file size recommended Installed memory size 1 5 Dump file size Installed memory size 300MB A
127. BUILDER Enter Enter Step network domaid protocol account Select Save Start applic n ie n Exqitest tions gt gt setup Select the Windows functionality and Server Roles that want to be enabled p Server Roles I Web Serveritis T DHCP Server IT DNS Server T File Services T Prine and Document Services p Windows features M SNMP Services Detail settings I simple TCP IP Services T WINS Server Back s Next 11 Top 1J Default Version 3 XX 5XK AMUN lt Server Core Installation gt NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Enter Enter Select Save Start Step network domaid avec wa varsinetts upp Ewiesd protocol account tions setup j Select the Windows functionality and Server Roles that want to be enabled p Server Roles IT Web Serverills T DHCP Server TH DNs Server J File Services T Print and Document Services p Windows features M SNMP Services Detail settings T WINS Server Back Next 11 Top 1J Default Version 9 XX XXX XMOK 5 18 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 15 Select the installing applications Select applications steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Ee Enter Enter Select Win Select Save Start Step network domaid dows cf anol ump frst um Eswted protocol account ponents tions setup Select an ap
128. BUILDER at the following EXPRESSBUILDER helps you to install the Operating system Check the radio button and click Next Ifyou want to install an Operating System or to build a RAID sub system select Perform the Express setup Ifyou want to stop the operation of EXPRESSBUILDER select Exit EXPRESSBUILDER Perform the Express setup Create the OEM Disk for Windows Saye or restore the configuration data of the RAID controller Load the optional driver into the EXPRESSBUILDER Exit EXPRESSBUILDER Next Version 5 XX XXX XX XXX Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 11 7 Load parameters steps are displayed NEC EXPRESSBUILDER OOO OOOO oO i Step iia Jip ns gt jeg i gt Version 5 XX XXX XXCXKX Do not load parameters 1 Select Do not load parameters 2 Click Next IMPORTANT The setup using a parameter file saved in the Flash FDD is not supported NOTE If a floppy disk drive is not connected select this item Load parameters 1 Insert the floppy disk containing the parameters file 2 Select Load parameters enter the file path of the parameters file into the text box 3 Click Next 5 12 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 8 Select the installing Operating System Select Install the Windows 64bit editions from the menu click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top menu Load Sele
129. ESSBUILDER EXPRESSBUILDER This menu is used to m Read the User s Guide or the other documents m Update the server system Windows drivers and m Install the management software NOTES m This menu requires Microsoft Windows XP Vista or Windows Server 2003 or later m Some documents are provided in PDF format Use the Adobe Reader to view or print these documents If the menu does not appear select My computer by using the Explorer and double click the icon of the optical disk drive that contains the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD Some menu items are grayed out when the logon user does not have the authority of the administrator or the menu item is not available for your system To use the menu m Click on the menu items or m Click the right mouse button on the menu window Installing and Using Utilities 6 7 PARAMETER FILE CREATOR Parameter File Creator is a tool to create Parameter file that is used for configuring the server with the Express Setup see Chapter 5 for details If you use the Parameter file created by the Express Setup and Parameter File Creator to operate the setup you can setup from the installation of OS to several utilities automatically except for a few key input to confirm the specification Also you can install the system with the same specification as before when re installing the system We recommend you to create Parameter file to setup the servers from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
130. ESSBUILDER are trademarks of NEC Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows Server and MS DOS are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Intel Pentium Xeon and Celeron are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation PCI Express is a trademark of Peripheral Component Interconnect Special Interest Group Datalight is a registered trademark of Datalight Inc ROM DOS is a registered trademark of Datalight Inc AT is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States and other countries Adaptec and its logo is a registered trademark of Adaptec Inc of United States LSI the LSI logo design iBBU MegaRAID and WebBIOS are trademarks or registered trademarks of LSI Corporation of United States Adobe Adobe logo and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Advanced Intelligent Tape is a trademark of the Sony Corporation Promise Technology Inc and Promise Technology Inc logo are trademarks of Promise Technology Incorporated AVOCENT and DVC Dambrackas Video Compression are registered trademarks or trademarks of AVOCENT in the United States and other countries All other product brand or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective trademark owners Windows Server 2008 R2 stands for Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard operating system and Microsoft Windo
131. Enter Step network domaift applic gt leer Expt protocol account tions setup Enabling the Windows features and Server Roles and please p Server Roles T Web Serverills T DHCP Server I DNS Server JT Print Services p Windows features M SNMP Services Detail settings T WINS Server Back J Next 1 Top YJ Default Version 5 50 001 02 001 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 43 15 Select the installing applications Select applications steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ee OO Enter Enter Select Win Select Save Start Ste p network domain dows c m applica gt pariinet rs gt Exist protocol account ponents tions setup Select an application to be installed The Si SNMP setting is required to install the NEC ESMPRO Agent hich is not included in EXPRESSBUILDER select Apply OEM Disk for mass storage device ing a disk dri Selected applications NEC ESMPRO Agent Universal RAID Utility Add gt gt lt Delete Back Next Top Default 16 Save the parameters Save parameters steps are displayed NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Enter Enter Select Win Select Start Step network domai dows cfc antlbed eu Ewes protocol account ponents tions setup Ifyou wani tto save the parameters set a free formatted media S he full file path inclu
132. ILDER use this procedure If Windows Server 2008 R2 can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server you can use the other procedure described later Follow the steps below 1 2 3 4 ki Prepare one Flash FDD or 3 5 inch floppy disk Turn on your NEC Express5800 server Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot the server You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server The system will boot from the DVD and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts Select Create the OEM Disk for Windows from Tools Menu step Select Create a Windows Server 2008 R2 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER at Create OEM Disk and click Perform Windows Server 2008 R2 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely NOTE If the following message is displayed the floppy disk is write protected Creation of OEM Disk x Failed in the deletion of the file _ Please confirm whether the media is not write protected state or not Cancel write protected state If you have already cancelled write protected state connect the floppy disk drive again D 8 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 Create from Autorun Menu This menu requires Microsoft Windows XP Vista or Windows Server 2003 or later You can create Windows Server 2008 R2 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER from Autorun
133. If you want to stop the operation of EXPRESSBUILDER select Exit EXPRESSBUILDER Perform the Express setup Create the OEM Disk for Windows Save or restore the configuration data of the RAID controller Load the optional driver into the EXPRESSBUILDER Exit EXPRESSBUILDER Next _ _ _ EE LLLLL L LRKREEESES aT Version 5 XX XXX XX Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 63 7 Load parameters steps are displayed NEC EXPRESSBUILDER IRE i EE Step Tor mea Fs 3 gt aie gt If you want to load the parameters set the floppy disk saved the parameters before Select Load parameters enter the file path of the parameters file into the text box and click Next If not select Do not load parameters 4 Select Do not load parameters when this computer does not connect a floppy disk drive Do not load parameters C Load parameters Do not load parameters 1 Select Do not load parameters 2 Click Next IMPORTANT The setup using a parameter file saved in the Flash FDD is not supported NOTE If a floppy disk drive is not connected select this item Load parameters 1 Insert the floppy disk containing the parameters file 2 Select Load parameters enter the file path of the parameters file into the text box 3 Click Next 5 64 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 8 Select the
134. Ifyou select Create a new partition at Windows system drive settings the contents of the hard disk will be all deleted m If Use existing partitions is selected EXPRESSBUILDER installs the Operating System to the Windows partition The Boot partition if it exists and the Windows partition are deleted The data in the other partition is kept if the system has two or more partitions See the figure below Boot Windows User Data Partition Partition Partition Deleted Deleted Retained m You can not re install the system with the existing partition that is upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained Do not select Use existing partitions at Windows system drive settings Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 15 11 Enter the user information Enter basic parameters steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER step To Joo 39 aq 5 o s Back Next Top Default Version 5 XX XXX XX XXX IMPORTANT Computer name and Administrator password that satisfy the next condition are required More than 6 characters Contains characters from three of the following categories numbers uppercase letters lowercase letters and signs 5 16 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 12 Enter the setting of the network protocol Enter Network Protocol steps are displayed Confirm the paramete
135. KB921411 Go to the section of Updating the System Perform Updating the System and application of the Hotfix KB921411 IMPORTANT In the situation below make sure to apply Updating the System and Hotfix KB921411 m Modified system configuration m Recovered the system using recovery process NOTES m If you use Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions CD ROM which includes Service Pack 2 the application of Hotfix KB921411 is not required Acomputer may stop responding on the Resuming Windows screen when the computer resumes from hibernation if running an x64 based version of Windows Consider the following scenario A computer has three or more processors X64 based version of Windows that is older than Service Pack 2 In this scenario the computer may stop responding on the Resuming Windows screen When the computer resumes from hibernation the program to correct the problem of Service Pack 2 or KB902839 is necessary KB902839 can be obtained as follows http support microsoft com kb 902839 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions F 13 Application Process of the Hotfix KB921411 Apply the Hotfix KB921411 before execute Updating the System 1 Log on to the system by the account with administrator authority to the server such as administrator Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server Click Start menu and Run and then e
136. LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR MICROSOFT WINDOWS PREINSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This End User License Agreement EULA is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and the manufacturer Manufacturer of the special purpose computing device or software SYSTEM you acquired which includes certain Microsoft software product s installed on or for use with the SYSTEM SOFTWARE The SOFTWARE includes computer software and may include associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation Any software provided along with the SOFTWARE that is associated with a separate end user license agreement or separate terms of use is licensed to you under the terms of that license agreement or terms of use rather than this EULA By installing copying downloading accessing or otherwise using the SOFTWARE you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA If you do not agree to the terms of this EULA Manufacturer and Microsoft Licensing GP MS are unwilling to license the SOFTWARE to you In such event you may not use or copy the SOFTWARE and you should promptly contact Manufacturer for instructions on return of the unused product s for a refund in oe 6 Select Perform the Express setup from the Top Menu click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Step gt Welcome to the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER writes as EXPRESS
137. LTO into the device mounted on this computer during the Windows installation Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 5 Connecting Hard Disk Drive If you create multiple logical drives in your system see Re installing the Operation System if Multiple Logical Drives Exist 5 92 Re installing to the Hard Disk Drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk You cannot re install Windows Server 2008 R2 with the current partition of the hard disk drive upgraded to Dynamic Disk kept remained If you want to keep the current partition remained see Appendix D to re install the system Peripheral Devices such as RDX Depending on your hardware configuration some peripheral devices need to be removed or disabled before starting setup Refer to the instruction manual which came with the peripheral device for pertinent information and proceed accordingly 5 6 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup About the System Partition Size When the system is Windows Server 2008 R2 Required partition size size required to install OS paging file size dump file size application size Size required to install OS 8 000MB Full Installation or 3 500MB Server Core Installation Paging file size recommended Installed memory size 1 5 Dump file size Installed memory size 300MB Application size Required size IMPORTANT m The above mentioned partition size is the minimum partition size requi
138. MO drive may be installed in the 5 25 inch device bay An optical disk drive is factory installed on the bottom of bay The bay is equipped with an EMI bracket 5 Disk access lamp green The disk access lamp is lit while the system accesses to a built in hard disk drive or optical disk drive If the built in hard disk drive is connected to the proper optional board this lamp can be lit only when the LED cable provided with the system is connected 6 POWER SLEEP lamp green Lights in green when the server is powered on Blinks when the system is placed in the sleep Mode 7 POWER SLEEP switch The POWER SLEEP switch is used to turn the power of the server ON OFF If you press this switch once the power is turned on with the POWER SLEEP lamp going on green If you press the switch again the power is turned off Some OS setting can provide the function of switching to the power saving sleep mode If you press the POWER SLEEP switch once after the setting the system is entered into the power saving mode with the POWER SLEEP lamp blinking green If you press the switch again the system is returned to the normal state Depending on installed optional boards the function cannot be provided General Description 2 5 Rear View 5 4 1 7 33 2 ne 12 6 LH r DS 9 11 10 u f D rr l
139. Menu Q Is Shift pressed Setting the DVD CD ROM with Shift pressed down cancels the Autorun feature Q Is the system in the proper state The menu may not appear depending on the system registry setting or the timing to set the DVD CD ROM In such a case start the Explorer and double click the icon of the optical disk drive Some menu items are grayed out Q Is your system environment correct The menu items are grayed out when the logon user does not have the authority of the Administrator or the system does not meet the requirements to install the application Login with the user having the proper authority on the proper system and try again Troubleshooting 8 33 Others The HyperTerminal screen on serial console scrolls automatically To use the Windows HyperTerminal Emulation program on serial console setup as shown below is required lt Example On Windows XP gt 1 From the menu bar of HyperTerminal select File Properties 2 In the Properties dialog box select Settings ASCII Setup Remove a checkmark from Wrap lines that exceed terminal width checkbox ASCII Setup ASCII Sending C Send line ends with line feeds C Echo typed characters locally Line delay lo milliseconds Character delay 0 milliseconds ASCII Receiving C Append line feeds to incoming line ends C Force incoming data to bit ASCII Wrap lines that exceed terminal width 8 34 Troub
140. N8103 95 SCSI Controller N8103 104A SAS Controller N8103 107 SCSI Controller Option About the Hardware Components When you install the Windows Server 2008 Express Setup requires several preparations if this computer uses the following hardware components Installing on the Mirrored Volume When re installing the OS to a hard disk drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk only the simple dynamic volume is available for installation If you want to install the OS on a volume that is mirrored using Disk Management invalidate the mirroring and reset to the basic disk before the installation and validate the mirroring again after the installation You can create invalidate or delete the mirror volume by using Disk Management in Computer Management 5 30 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Mounting MO Device Do not mount an MO device on this computer during the Windows installation About Removable Media Do not set removable media such as DAT and LTO into the device mounted on this computer during the Windows installation Connecting Hard Disk Drive If you create multiple logical drives in your system see Re installing the Operation System if Multiple Logical Drives Exist 5 92 Re installing to the Hard Disk Drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk You cannot re install Windows Server 2008 with the current partition of the hard disk drive upgraded to Dynamic Disk kept remain
141. NEC N8100 1592F 1593F 1594F NEC Express5800 GT110b EXP260A User s Guide 1st Edition 4 2010 ONL 510_015 01 GT110b 100 99 1003 PROPRIETARY NOTICE AND LIABILITY DISCLAIMER The information disclosed in this document including all designs and related materials is the valuable property of NEC Corporation NEC and or its licensors NEC and or its licensors as appropriate reserve all patent copyright and other proprietary rights to this document including all design manufacturing reproduction use and sales rights thereto except to the extent said rights are expressly granted to others The NEC product s discussed in this document are warranted in accordance with the terms of the Warranty Statement accompanying each product However actual performance of each such product is dependent upon factors such as system configuration customer data and operator control Since implementation by customers of each product may vary the suitability of specific product configurations and applications must be determined by the customer and is not warranted by NEC To allow for design and specification improvements the information in this document is subject to change at any time without notice Reproduction of this document or portions thereof without prior written approval of NEC is prohibited First Printing April 2010 Copyright 2010 NEC Corporation 7 1 Shiba 5 Chome Minato Ku Tokyo 108 8001 Japan All Rights Reserved Printed in Japan
142. OSet PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver Utilizing PROSet enables the following items Confirm detailed information of the adapter m Diagnose loop back test packet transmission test and so on m Setup of teaming Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and enhance throughput between the switches PROSet is necessary to utilize these features Follow the procedure below to install PROSet 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive If the autorun menu is displayed close menu screen 2 The Windows Explorer dialog starts The procedure in the case of the standard start menu Click Start menu and click Windows Explorer The procedure in the case of the classic start menu Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run dxsetup exe in the following directory 015 win winnt dotnet rl 48 apps prosetdx win32 The IntelR PROSet InstallShield Wizard dialog starts Click Next Choose I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next Click Next Click Install When InstallShield Wizard Completed window is displayed click Finished Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from the optical disk drive restart the system 20 Re Se Ol Installing Windows Server 2003 G 19 Network Driver Specify the details of network driver
143. PU detect on CPU Contact your service representative Slot OB60_ DIMM group 1 has been disabled Contact your service representative 0B61 DIMM group 2 has been disabled 0B62 DIMM group 3 has been disabled OB63__ DIMM group 4 has been disabled OB6F DIMM group with error is enabled 0B7E Mismatched FAN control Mode Run BIOS SETUP and provide setting again setting Please set the FAN control mode on BIOS SETUP OBBO SMBIOS SROM data read error Contact your service representative 0BB1 SMBIOS data checksum bad 8151 Password Cleared By Jumper Power off the server then change the password clear jumper switch to its original position 8800 __ PECI Communication Error Contact your service representative 9000 PCI Slot 1 PCIE Link Training Remove the PCI card from the slot that shows an Error error then install the PCI card again If the same 9001 PCI Slot 2 PCIE Link Training error persists contact your service representative Error 9002 PCI Slot 3 PCIE Link Training Error Expansion ROM not initialized PCI Mass Storage Controller in slot xx If the hard disk drive connected to RAID Controller or LAN board for network boot does not contain any OS disable Option ROM Scan for that PCI slot 8 8 Troubleshooting Beep Codes If an error occurs during the POST the server beeps indicating the type of error Each number indicates the number of short beeps and a hyphen indi
144. Power Saver Options setting is not necessary to change m Above setting will be maintained until manually resetting are executed IMPORTANT The parameters of Wake On LAN will not exist if the network ports are not available for WOL 4 Click OK 5 Restart the system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 79 Graphics Accelerator Driver If you use standard graphics accelerator drivers update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system Standard graphics accelerator drivers will be installed automatically Refer to Graphics Accelerator Driver described in Appendix G 22 when you want to reinstall the driver individually Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 75 95 107 If you use the SCSI Controller N8103 75 95 107 update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system The SCSI Controller driver will be installed automatically Installing SAS Controller Driver N8103 104A If you use the SAS Controller N8103 104A update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system The SAS Controller driver will be installed automatically Setting for Solving Problems Setup your computer in advance so that it can recover from any trouble precisely and as soon as possible when it should occur For more information refer to Page 5 80 5 80 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup SETTING FOR SOLVING PROBLEMS Setup
145. Problems with Parameter File Creator ssssseesesessesseeeessesesseeresseseesresersessreresseereseserseeseeness 8 29 Problems with RAID System Configuration s ssssesessseseesesseerssstseessesstseestesessreresseseeseesersee 8 30 Problems with Windows Autorun Menu ccccecccssecsseeseeeseeeeceeeenecesecesecaecseecaeecsecaeeneeenes 8 32 ON E dns Tonos ee E E E EE EET 8 33 Collecting AA E E E E E E AE E E A EEE 8 34 Collect Configuration Information c ccceecceseeseceecesecseecseeeseeeeeeeeceeeeseeeseeeseenseeeaeeaeeaeeeee 8 34 Collecting Dr Watson Diagnostic Information ccccccceesseeseeeeceeeceeeeeeceseceseceneceeeeeeneeees 8 35 Memory Dump circ ae ots ienr eens eet E o vated eee ate eed gs ae eens 8 35 Recovery for Windows System cccecccescessecesecssecseecseeeseeeeecaeeeseceeeeseeeeeneeceeeeesecaeenaecseeeneeeneeses 8 36 Maintenance Toolsin i sic cece este A REE E A R EE N tees 8 37 Starting Maintenance Tools cccccecseessesscessceesceeeceseceaecaecseecseecseeeaeeeeeeeeeseeeseseeeseseseenaeenaes 8 37 Function of Maintenance Tools cccecccesccssecesecsseceeeseeeseeseeeeeeeeensecnsecaecaeeaeesaeenaecneeeneeenes 8 40 Resetting the Server rnare n EE cuaieisn cag dese eden edhe R as shel R E a a tees 8 42 Forced Shutdown nrn nni en cee E E be E REE N ATR E A E e 8 43 Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server ccccsssseeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeesseeeeeceeseneeeeseseeeseessenees 9 1 Safety Note
146. RAID Controller LAN board network boot or SCSI controller is connected with the hard disk drive that does not contain an OS set the parameter for PCI Slot x Option ROM x slot containing the PCI card to Disabled 4 14 Configuring Your Server PCI Device Onboard VGA automatically for forcedly When Auto is selected the ROM of the VGA card is preferentially scanned Option Parameter Description Your Setting Onboard VGA Auto Selects whether the option ROM of Option ROM Scan Force onboard video controller is executed PCI Device Onboard Lan Factory set Option Parameter Description Your Setting LAN Controller Disabled Enables or disables onboard LAN Enabled controller LAN Option ROM Disabled Enables or disables an option ROM of Scan Enabled onboard LAN controller Peripheral Configuration Factory set IMPORTANT Note that the interrupt and or base I O address are not overlapped with others Option Parameter Description Your Setting Serial Port A Disabled Selects whether serial port Ais enabled or Enabled disabled Base 1 O SF8h Selects the base I O address for serial port address 2F8h A 3E8h 2E8h Interrupt IRQ 3 Selects the interrupt for a serial port A IRQ 4 Serial Port B Disabled Selects whether serial port B is enabled or Enabled disabled Base I O 3F8h Selects the base I O ad
147. Server 2003 x64 Editions This section explains how to install the Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions NOTICE Read the following notes or information before installing the Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your server supports the following optional boards NOTE If you want to install the other boards by using a driver floppy disk OEM Disk for Mass storage device except ones listed below see Installing with the OEM Disk for Mass storage device and Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver of Parameter File Creator in Chapter 6 Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup N8103 109 RAID Controller 128 MB RAID0 1 5 6 N8103 116A RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO 1 N8103 117A RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO 1 5 6 Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID m Other controllers N8103 75 SCSI Controller N8103 95 SCSI Controller N8103 104A SAS Controller N8103 107 SCSI Controller Option F 2 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to the server supports following combination of the OS installation media and Service Pack Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Edition OS installation media with Service Pack 2 OS installation media No Service Pack Service Pack 2 OS installati
148. Space to select the hard disk drive The display for the selected hard disk drive changes from READY to ONLINE r New Configuration ARRAY SELECTION MENU PORT ONLIN A00 00 ONLIN A00 01 Oo 5 Press F10 to set Select Configurable Array s 6 Press Space SPAN 1 is set Select Configurable Array s A 0 SPAN 1 Configuring Your Server 4 35 7 Press F10 to create virtual drive The Virtual Drives Configured screen appears The figure below shows an example of RAID 1 configured with two hard disk drives Virtual Drives Configured Size Stripes StrpSz xxxMB 2 64KB LD 0 RAID 1 Status ONLINE Virtual DriveO RAID 1 Size xxxxMB DWC On RA On Accept Span NO 8 Select RAID Size DWC RA or Span by using cursor keys Then press Enter to fix the selection and set each value 1 RAID Sets RAID level Parameter Remarks 0 RAIDO 1 RAID1 10 Striping of RAID1 The selectable RAID level varies depending on the number of hard disk drives that configure a pack 2 Size Sets virtual drive size Up to 8 virtual drives can be created per RAID Controller 3 DWC Sets parameter for Disk Write Cache Parameter Remarks Off Write through On Write back Recommended setting Write back On enables good performance however cache data may be lost at an unexpected power
149. System 6 When the following message appears click OK to restart the system Updating the system xi Updating the System was finished y The setup reboots for installing the drivers The system has been updated Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 D 21 DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section refer to the document attached to the driver LAN Driver and PROSet The LAN driver and PROSet have been installed automatically while your system was being updated in the previous section NOTE To change the LAN driver and PROSet settings log on to the system from a local console using an administrator account Remotely changing the settings by using the operating system s remote desktop feature is not supported D 22 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 Network Driver Specify the details of network driver Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically but the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified manually 1 Open the Device Manager 2 Double click Network Adapter Name in the list 3 Click the Link Speed and specify the Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Click OK Restart the system Also add or dele
150. TTINGS This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section refer to the document attached to the driver PROSet NOTE All of the operation that related to Intel PROSet is must be executed by administrator privileges Operation by Remote Desktop Connection is prohibited Without changing any parameter when opened the properties of adapter teaming click the Cancel button to close the dialog Click OK button will cause temporary loss of network connectivity PROSet is a utility that confirms the function of network contained in network driver Utilizing PROSet enables the following items Confirm detailed information of the adapter m Diagnose loop back test packet transmission test and so on m Setup of teaming Configuring several network adapters as one team provides the server a tolerant environment on any trouble and enhances throughput between the switches PROSet is necessary to utilize these features F 20 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Follow the procedure below to install PROSet 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive If the autorun menu is displayed close menu screen 2 The Windows Explorer dialog starts The procedure in the case of the standard start menu Click Start menu and click Windows Explorer The
151. Watson is replaced by Problem Reports and Solutions therefore you can not collect the Crash Dump file by existing Dr Watson The above process provides you the information same level as the Crash Dump file 5 88 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup When the system is Windows Server 2008 User mode Process Dump is the file that records information when any application error occurs When any application error occurs do not close the pop up window that notifies the error and then collect a dump using following process 1 Right click a blank part of the taskbar and click Task Manager or press Ctrl Shift Esc to start Task Manager Click Processes tab Right click on process name that you want to collect dump and then click Create Dump File The dump file is stored in following directory C Users lt User Name gt A ppData Local Temp NOTE The folder may be treated as hidden folder If the folder does not appear run Explorer and select Tools Folder Options View and check to Show hidden files and folders When the User mode Process Dump is created pick up the file from the directory described in Step 4 Refer to Knowledge Base of Microsoft web site for more information about the User mode Process Dump file collection How to create a user mode process dump file in Windows Server 2008 http support microsoft com kb 949180 en us NOTE For Windows
152. When dust or fingerprints are attached on the optical disk wipe the optical disk from its center to edge with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently Use the dedicated cleaner to clean the optical disk Do not use record spray cleaner benzene or thinner General Description 2 21 m Keep the optical disk in an optical disk case when not in use m Use a non printable disk recommended in the User s Guide of the server and or the device m Optical disk is a data storage media with delicate structure and requires care Clean the tray and optical regularly according to Cleaning Disc in Chapter 7 Writing Data onto Disk m After writing the data onto disk be sure to perform data compare process m An operator should always be concerned with data writing unattended writing should not be performed Handling of Optical Disk Drive m Do not leave the tray ejected from the optical disk drive m Do not leave the drive with an optical disk being contained m Clean the disk and drive in regular basis For the slim type drive be careful not to touch the lens while cleaning the drive m Make sure that the drive works normally by reading a disk such as NEC EXPRESSBUILDER About Write Error A write error might occur when writing a data by using the optical disk drive due to the operating environment or characteristics of disk etc If a write error occurs even after the cleaning try another disk Before Writing onto Disk m It is prohibi
153. Windows Server 2008 Standard Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 21 lt Server Core Installation gt In the following screen enter your password into Password and click Administrator 7 Windows Server 2008 Standard Hereinafter proceed operations according to the message Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed After Express Setup has completed be sure to execute the tasks described in Installing and Setting Device Drivers 5 22 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Installing and Setting Device Drivers Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers LAN Driver and PROSet The LAN driver and PROSet have been installed automatically while your system was being updated in the previous section NOTE To change the LAN driver and PROSet settings log on to the system from a local console using an administrator account Remotely changing the settings by using the operating system s remote desktop feature is not supported Network Driver Specify the details of network driver Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically but the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified manually 1 Open the Device Manager 2 Double click Network Adapter Name in the list 3 Click the Link Speed and specify the Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB 4 Click OK 5 Res
154. X3430 Clock Cache 2 26GHz 2MB 2 8GHz 3MB 2 4GHz 8MB Number of processors 1 Maximum 1 Chipset Intel 3420 Intel QuickPath Interconnect 25 6GB s Memory Standard 1GB 1GBx1 Maximum 16GB 4MBx4 the standard DIMM must be replaced Expansion unit 1 DIMM DDR3 1333 SDRAM DIMM unbuffered Memory module SDRAM DIMM DDR3 1333 Dual channel memory configuration supported Graphics XGI Technology Volari Z9s Storage Hard disk drive None standard Hard disk drive SATA2 2TB x 4 maximum Optical disk drive Standard DVD ROM drive Read rate DVD x16 max CD x40 max Option DVD Super Multi drive to be replaced with DVD ROM drive 5 25 inch device bay 2 slots An optical disk drive is factory installed Additional PCI slot 4 slots 1 slot for PCI EXPRESS x16 1 slot for PCI EXPRESS x4 connector x8 1 slot for PCI EXPRESS x2 connector x4 1 slot for PCI 32bit 33MHz Disk array Standard SATA RAIDO 1 10 Option SATA SAS RAIDO 1 5 6 External Keyboard MINI DIN 6 pin connector 1 port interface Mouse MINI DIN 6 pin connector 1 port USB 4 pin Front 2 ports Rear 4 ports Internal 4 ports USB2 0 supported Serial D sub 9 pin 1 port Network RJ 45 1 port JOOOBASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T Display MINI D sub 15 pin 1 port Cabinet design Desk side mini tower External dimensions 175 width x 430 height x 367 depth mm Weight 16 kg Max
155. above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095MB If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB specify 4095MB for the paging file size The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory mounted is 2048MB 12MB If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs For example if the mounted memory size is 1GB 1 024MB the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as follows 3 500MB 1 024MB 1 5 1 024MB 12MB Application Size 6 072MB Application Size G 4 Installing Windows Server 2003 Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk 1 Set the Size required for installation Paging file size 2 See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information equivalent to the dump file size is to be written to a separate disk If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the dump file size to be written th
156. ack continuously If you want to continue applying click Yes If you want to stop applying click No When you apply Service Pack Click Yes and then go to Step 6 When you don t apply Service Pack Click No and then go to Step 8 6 When the following message appears click Yes Applying the Service Pack xi p Applying the Service Pack TF you want to continue applying click Yes and select the Service Pack brows the file like an e g If you want to stop applying click No E g XAXXXXXXXXAXKAAX AXRAX ENU EXE 7 When the following message appears select a Service Pack and click Open and then according to a message apply it Open 21x Look in E Local Disk C z 0ce Documents and Settings Fe Intel My Recent Program Files Documents Program Files x86 E Desktop My Documents wa PE My Computer a My Network Places Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions F 17 8 When the following message appears click Yes to restart the system Updating the system x The setup does not apply the Service Pack Do you want to reboot The system has been updated F 18 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Recovery Process If Updating the System is executed before the application of the Hotfix for Windows x64 KB921411 may be displayed on the USB root hub If is displayed on the USB root hub perform application of
157. ack installation 5 x EXPRESSBUILDER Enter basic Enter gt eon Jems gt protocdl If Use existing partitions is selected EXPRESSBUILDER installs the Operating System to the 1st partition p Medium selection Windows family edition Engish z E Keyboard layout Time zone Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard Full Installation Default z GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada z j Windows system drive settings Use existing partitions only the Ist partition is formatted and its data is erased Create a new partition all of the data in the disk is erased Use disk space as large as possible Specify the size of the system partition 33000 MB 13 480MB 2 097 144MB 1GB 1 024MB Windows Server 2008 MM Parameter File Creator NEC Top Default EXPRESSBUILDER Enter RAID settings Load parameters Select OS Step Specify the installing medium and the Windows system partition Refer to the User s guide about the Service Pack installation Enter basic Enter gt eer Jems iT protoc l If Use enisting partitions is selected EXPRESSBUILDER installs the Operating System to the lst partition P Medium selection Windows family edition English x E Keyboard layout Time zone Windows Server 2008 Standard Full installation z Default z GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada z p Windows s
158. act your service representative for the maintenance 9 Run BIOS SETUP utility and check to see that the installed DIMMs are correctly recognized See Chapter 4 for details 10 Run BIOS SETUP Utility to set the Reset Configuration Data in the Advanced menu to Yes This is required to update the hardware configuration information See Chapter 4 for details 11 Set the paging file size to the recommended value or larger See Chapter 5 for details Upgrading Your Server 9 49 Removal Remove the DIMM depending on the following procedure NOTES m To remove the defected DIMM check the error message appearing in POST or NEC ESMPRO to identify the DIMM socket group in which the defected DIMM is installed m The server needs at least one DIMM installed to operate 1 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare 2 Open the levers at the both ends of the socket for the DIMM to be removed The lock is released to allow the DIMM to be removed 3 Remove the DIMM Assemble the server Turn on the power of the server Make sure that no error message appears in the POST If POST displays an error message take a note on the message and see the POST error messages listed in Chapter 8 6 Select Yes for Reset Configuration Data on the Advanced menu This is required to update the hardware configuration information See Chapter 4 for details 7 Ru
159. aecaeeeeeneeeneenes 7 6 Relocating Storing The Servet cccccccssesssssscesscesecesscesecssecaecseecaeeeseesnecneeneseesssseeseesseenaeenaes 7 9 Chapter 8 Troubleshooting ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeneeseasseeeseseseenseneesenes 8 1 SY SEEM VICW CLS E atiles A E loved etoldson sented E 8 2 TANS see ces cca dees ec ree bee E A E E EE 8 3 POWER SLEEP Lamp s ccccscscsctcstesccsisccecetesccvevecescneeteatctcuesesctcunceccvecssetencebeetevicnsedesdeveedevecnsetevs 8 4 DISK ACCESS LAMP aeos iis CEEE EEEE EEEE EREE E 8 4 ACCOSS LAMPo iein EEN E ea EN ERE ER E EE EA EEE 8 4 LINKW AC TD Lamp A nia i i AREE EO EREE ena hgh a 8 4 1000 100 10 L mp rinner thei noe veh hae bia ge sein eens 8 4 Error Messages niooo ea Eaa NETOA eeesde tatu de acto Coudaeeeeteds EAE ERRE 8 5 Error Messages after Power on ssesessseesssseseesreseeseseestesttsessteresststessesttstestenessteessesteseseeseeses 8 5 vii POST Etrot Messagesi crss iets nannaa E cuesbunreesehed neh A sa E E R E 8 6 Beep Cod sseni E E aha E E EE E E EEE RN 8 8 DMI EVeEnt EOS eain e eE E A R EE E E A E A E E AARE 8 9 Solving Problems sassen ana a A a E Hei ae 8 11 Problems with NEC Express Serven nesnenin eieae er E i 8 11 Problems with Windowse isss enan naea r aie a ea EE E S s 8 17 Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ceccceccesseseeseesecsseeecsseeeeecnseeecaeesenseeseeseeneesees 8 27 Problems with Express Setups esenee eia e a a a h 8 28
160. aeeeseeeeseeeseeeaeeneeeaeenaes 5 79 vi Setting for Solving Problems seiss coiii teei E a E E E 5 80 Memory Dump Debug Information eseseseesseeeessesersresetssseerssstsressesttstesesesetsesseenessesressese 5 80 How to Create a User mode Process Dump File s sssesesenessseeessseeeessesesstsresreserseeseenesseseessese 5 87 Network Monitors Assssssiscsenasit teak tas pac EN E E T tet ees 5 90 Re installing the Operation System if Multiple Logical Drives Exist 5 92 Installing Maintenance Utilities issii nists oeii serere e EE EEE E EEEE NEE 5 94 Wpdating thie yS E Aa a a a a a a a a a e e E nag dah 5 94 Making Backup Copies of System Information ccccecccsseesseesceesceeseeeeceseeesecnseensecneeeeeeneeees 5 95 Installing with the OEM Disk for Mass Storage Device cecesceeseeseeeseeeeceeeceeeeseeneeeneeenes 5 96 Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities cc cceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeesenenens 6 1 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER sorreta ie e eietiee Buh Ri check a E N 6 2 De NULCG a DAG Foi VScom oe ee 6 6 Parameter File Creaton sion a O E Bedhs oe seen EE 6 7 Parameter Flens resie i noe aa e tee E ERE een RL E 6 8 NEC ESMPRO ononon eno aaie ER E EE E E ae eee toneteedial 6 21 F nctions and Features si a e a E E OE RE E 6 21 NEC ExpressUpdate Agentea nae e E A E E eo EE 6 22 Universal RAID Utility esanen n ee E E a nen AAG Aen ae 6 23 Setup With Express Setup ssis i s ene i R E E
161. again and select Boot Excluded from boot order and press x on Legacy Floppy Drives to move it to Boot priority order Then press to move it to desired priority order The position next to CD ROM is recommendable 8 14 Troubleshooting Fail to access to the DVD CD ROM Q Is the DVD CD ROM properly set in the optical disk drive tray The tray is provided with a holder to secure the DVD CD ROM Make sure that the DVD CD ROM is placed properly in the holder QO Is the DVD CD ROM applicable to the server The DVD CD ROM for Macintosh is not available for use For the disk which does not conform to the CD standard the playback of such a disk with the optical disk drive is not guaranteed The POWER SLEEP lamp goes on when the power cord is connected When the server receives an AC power after the power cord is connected the POWER SLEEP lamp goes on This is a normal operation of the server not a fault The lamp will go off when DC power is turned on and then off Inserted the correct DVD CD ROM but the message like the following is displayed The DVD CD ROM is not inserted or the wrong DVD CD ROM is inserted Please insert the correct DVD CD ROM OK Q Is the data side of the DVD CD ROM dirty or injured Take the DVD CD ROM out of the optical disk drive confirm that it is not dirty or injured reset and click OK Fail to access the hard disk drive Refer to the documentati
162. age while in progress NEC With the factory setup of the server the NEC logo appears on the display unit while POST is in progress To display the POST check results press Esc NOTE You can set the POST check results to appear on the display unit without pressing Esc To do so select Enabled for Boot time Diagnostic Screen under the Advanced menu of the BIOS SETUP utility You don t always need to check the POST check results Check messages that POST displays when m you use the NEC Express server for the first time m the server appears to fail m the server beeps for many times between power on and OS start up m an error message appears on the display unit General Description 2 17 POST Execution Flow The following describes the progress of POST in the chronological order IMPORTANT Do not power off the server while POST is in progress Do not make key entries or perform mouse operations while POST is in progress m Some system configurations may display the message Press Any Key to prompt a key entry This message is driven by BIOS of an installed optional board Make sure to read the manual that comes with the optional board before any key entry m Powering on the server after you installed or removed an optional PCI board or moved it to another slot may display the message that indicates incorrect board configuration and suspend POST In such a case press F1 to continue POST
163. all Chapter 7 Maintenance This chapter describes the daily maintenance of the server and precautions when relocating or storing the server MAKING BACKUP COPIES NEC recommends you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disk drives of the server on a regular basis For backup storage devices suitable for the server and backup tools consult with your service representative When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration select System Information Management and then Save of the Off line Maintenance Utility to make a backup copy of the system information Also make a backup copy of the RAID configuration data if your system is in the RAID configuration When your hard disk drives have been auto rebuilt due to a failure it is recommended to make a backup copy of the configuration data To make a backup copy of the configuration data use the configuration utility that is resident in the FLASH memory on the optional RAID Controller board Refer to the manual supplied with the board 7 2 Maintenance CLEANING Clean the server on a regular basis to keep the server in a good shape A WARNING Y Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow CK these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages A 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not disassemble repair or alter the server AE Donot remove the lithium battery Discon
164. am Setting WOL Refer to the following procedure to enable WOL When PROSet is not installed 1 2 SS OD oo a Start Device Manager Point to Network adapters and double click Intel R 82547L Gigabit Network Connection to open the adapter Properties Click Power Management tab and change setting in Wake On LAN according to the following list Setting item Change setting Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power ON Allow this device to bring the computer out of standby ON or OFF IMPORTANT E Set Allow this device to bring to ON WOL by DirectedPacket or MagicPacket will be available on Standby state E WOL by DirectedPacket is not available on Hibernate and Shutdown state 1 Packet with the Ethernet address of the adapter in ethernet header or Packet with an IP address assigned to the adapter in IP header Click Advanced tab and point to Enable PME Set the Enable in Value Click OK Restart the system Installing Windows Server 2003 G 21 When PROSet is installed 1 Start Device Manager 2 Point to Network adapters and double click Intel R 82547L Gigabit Network Connection to open the adapter Properties 3 Click Power Management tab and change setting in Wake On LAN according to the following list Setting item Change setting Wake On Directed Packet ON or OFF Wake On Magic Packet ON
165. an create a parameters file in advance using Parameter File Creator included in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 3 Windows Server 2008 R2 This section explains how to install Windows Server 2008 R2 by using the Express Setup IMPORTANT The Scalable Networking Pack SNP function is disabled in the system that installed by Express Setup The setting of SNP function may affect the system performance so refer to the attention of SNP detail in the following site before setting it http www nec com global prod express NOTE If you install Windows Server 2008 R2 without using Express Setup see Appendix D Notes on Windows Installation This section explains the notes on the Windows installation Confirm these notes before starting the Express Setup About the Windows Family This computer supports the following Windows editions m Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard hereinafter referred to as Windows Server 2008 R2 On installing other OS contact sales dealer or the maintenance service representative BIOS Settings Confirm the BIOS settings described in Chapter 4 before installing Windows Server 2008 R2 Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to the server supports following combination of the OS installation media and Service Pack m Windows Server 2008 R2 OS installation media No Service Pack 5 4 Install
166. and the manufacturer Manufacturer of the special purpose computing device or software SYSTEM you acquired which includes eye edie software product s installed on or for use with the SYSTEM SOFTWA The SOFTWARE re ides computer software and may include associated media printed materials and online or electronic documentation Any software provided along with the SOFTWARE that is associated with a separate end user license agreement or separate terms of use is licensed to you under the terms of that license agreement or terms of use rather than this EULA By installing copying downloading accessing or otherwise using the SOFTWARE you agree to be bound by the terms of this EULA If you do not agree to the terms of this EULA Manufacturer and Microsoft Licensing GP NS are unwilling to license the SOFTWARE to you In such event you may not use or copy the SOFTWARE and you should promptly contact Manufacturer for instructions on return of the unused product s for a refund in fn 6 Select Perform the Express setup from the Top Menu click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER El Step mice Welcome to the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER vnites as EXPRESSBUILDER at the following EXPRESSBUILDER helps you to install the Operating system Check the radio button and click Next If you want to install an Operating System or to build a RAID sub system select Perform the Express setup
167. and then connect the board to the slot IMPORTANT If the board cannot be installed well remove the board once and then install it again Note that adding an excess force to the board may cause it to be damaged PCI guide rail Upgrading Your Server 9 41 7 Close the PCI retention springs A click occurs to lock the tabs sen CL AN Wier S Assemble the server Turn on the power of the server Make sure that no error message appears in the POST If an error message appears write down the message and contact your maintenance service representative for the maintenance 9 42 Upgrading Your Server Setting after installation Depending on the type of the installed board some settings of the server must be modified by using the proper utility such as the BIOS Setup Utility or the setup utility installed in the board after the installation Provide the settings correctly according to the information described in the manual provided with the board The server scans the PCI bus numbers in the ascending order after the power on If the BIOS utility is stored in the optional ROM mounted on the board the PCI bus start messages banners appear in the ascending order of the PCI bus numbers Removal Remove the board connected to the PCI board slot in the following procedure 1 See the section Prepa
168. apter 5 and set that debugging information equivalent to the dump file size is to be written to a separate disk If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the dump file size to be written then after installing the system using the Size required for installation Paging file size install an additional new disk Installing the Service Pack When installing Windows Server 2003 R2 it is not necessary to install the Service Pack 1 5 60 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup FLOW OF SETUP This section visually describes the flow of the setup operated by Express Setup NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Step i gt Loading parameters Step 2 Skip Next A Select the operating system Step 3 Next RAID configuration Step 4 Next Windows Confirm Setting Input Steps 5 to 10 Next Save parameters Step 11 v Next Start Express Setup Step 12 E Perform RAID Configuration Create the OS partition format Copying Windows driver 4 Remove the Floppy Disk and CD DVD ROM from the Drive Copying Selected Application Insert Windows CD ROM Agree Software License Agreement gz Install OS Automatically 4 Process that needs to input or select Log on Automatically Process that proceeds automatically The installation is completed Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 61 INSTALLING
169. ar configuration x Rebuild Rate 30 Chk Const Rate 30 x FGI Rate 30 BGI Rate 30 Disk WC Off x Read Ahead On Bios State Enable Cont on Error Yes Fast Init Enable x Auto Rebuild On x Auto Resume Enable Disk Coercion 1GB Factory Default Virtual Drive Virtual drive operation Virtual Drives Select virtual drive when multiple virtual drives exist Initialize Initialize virtual drive Check Consistency Check virtual drive redundancy View Update Parameters Display virtual drive information e RAID Display RAID level e SIZE Display virtual drive capacity e Stripe SIZE Display stripe size e Stripes Display the number of hard disk drives in virtual drive State Display virtual drive status e Spans e Disk WC Off Write through On Write back e Read Ahead Physical Drive Physical drive operation Physical Drive Selection Menu Select physical drive Make HotSpare Set as hot spare disk for auto rebuilding Force Online Make a disk online Force Offline Make a disk offline Drive Properties Display hard disk drive information e Device Type Hard disk drive type e Capacity Hard disk drive capacity e Product ID Hard disk drive model e Revision No Hard disk drive revision Rebuild Perform rebuilding Check Consistency Perform virtual drive redundancy check
170. as E A D 18 Driver Installation and Advanced Settings c cecccesccssscesecesecesecececseeeseeeeeeneeseeeeeeneeeeeeeereestens D 21 LAN Driver and PROSeti itsc f ii aa aa a a aa e coed A AEAEE RE ES D 21 Network Driyo tena gunpiarnreiiii rann aiie i n i i i R D 22 Optional Network Board Driver N8104 121 125A 126 ssssssssssesssssressserssssreressesersseserse D 22 Setup Teantbresscctereiiceecd e EEEE EE Ces tance E EENE E E N E ERT CERERE A E D 23 Setting WOL ennienni ERNER A E A E E E EE D 26 Graphics Accelerator Drivetrains ee E Eiaa EREE E aei D 27 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 75 107 ccesceseceseceseceeeeeeeseeeseesseeereeneeseeerenes D 27 Installing SAS Controller Driver N8103 104A ssssssssesessesssssreesssesersresersessreeesseseeseesessese D 27 About Windows Activation cccccccescessecsecseecseeeseeeseeseeeeessecnsecseceaecaseceaecaeeeseseaeeneesereearens D 28 S ttinig for Solving Problems eieren eeo tes Rien Hat wt Sah ee ene aie ae D 32 Appendix E Installing Windows Server 2008 ccccceseesseeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeneees E 1 INO AE TE E ca eee cee eeNEt phen tenes toe he E E Mena T EE ST E 1 Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER essssessssserseesersesseeressesresessersrssee E 1 Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports 0 cceccseseescsseeeseeeseeecneeaeereaeereneeaeees E 2 Installing Service ee ssccede sesso EEEE E A E 2 Updating Sy stein aces EE EEE A o
171. ation size If the partition where the operating system is installed is smaller than that required to install the OS and paging file expand the partition size or utilize a larger disk If your system does not have a sufficient dump file size divide the required file space into multiple disks by performing the steps below 1 Set the partition size to a size sufficient to install the OS and paging file 2 See Setting for Solving Problems to write the debug information of the dump file on to another disk If there is not enough disk space to write the debug information add another disk for the dump file Flow of Setup Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 33 Remove the Floppy Disk and CD DVD ROM from the Drive Insert Windows DVD ROM Install OS Automatically EXPRESSBUILDER Loading parameters Step 2 Skip Next Select the operating system Step 3 Next RAID configuration Step 4 TT Next AA Windows Confirm Setting Input Steps 5 to 10 Next Save parameters Step 11 Next v Start Express Setup Step 12 Perform RAID Configuration Create the OS partition format g Copying Windows driver 4 Copying Selected Application Agree Software License Agreement Log on The installation is completed Process that needs to input or select Process that proceeds automatically 5 34 Installing t
172. ations on the display unit before consultation which may provide a significant help to your service representative USE OF THE TERM OPTICAL DISK DRIVE This equipment includes one of the drives below In this document this drive is referred to as the optical disk drive m DVD ROM drive m DVD super multi drive 1 12 Notes on Using Your Server Note that the operation is not guaranteed when attempting use a CD playback device to play back a disc that does not comply with the CD standards such as a copy protected CD USE OF THE TERM HARD DISK DRIVE Unless otherwise specified the term hard disk drive HDD when used in this document refers to the following m Hard disk drive HDD m Solid state drive SSD Notes on Using Your Server 1 13 Advice for Health The longer you keep using the computer equipment the more you become tired which may cause disorders of your body When you use a computer observe the following to keep yourself from getting tired Good Working Posture You have good posture if the following are satisfied when you use a computer e You sit on a chair with your back straight e Your hands are parallel with the floor when you put them on the keyboard e You look at the screen slightly lower than your eye height You have good working posture as described in the above when no part of your body is under excess strain in other words when your muscles are most relaxed You have
173. ault Tolerance Click Finish Click TEAM Team name from Device manager Network adapters to modify the team Click Settings tab and click Modify Team button 9 Refer to the following procedure to set the team member adapter priority status Set Primary Point the adapter and click Set Primary button Set Secondary Point the adapter and click Set Secondary button NOTE Adapter priority config can be confirmed by the following procedure 1 Click TEAM Team name from Device manager gt Network adapters 2 Click Settings and confirm Adapters in team list 10 Click Test Switch Run test to confirm the adapter team is properly setup Confirm the result in Test results 11 Restart the system Remove Team Open the Device Manager Click Network adapters and open TEAM Team name properties Click Setting tab Click Remove Team button Click Yes to the message 2h SOF ee Confirm TEAM Team name adapter in not existing in Network adapters tree and reboot the system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 77 Setting WOL Refer to the following procedure to enable WOL When PROSet is not installed 1 2 os ot ce Start Device Manager Point to Network adapters and double click Intel R 82547L Gigabit Network Connection to open the adapter Properties Click Power Management tab and change setting i
174. bout Removable Media Do not set removable media such as DAT and LTO into the device mounted on this computer during the Windows installation Floppy Disk Drive The internal floppy disk drive is not included in your system at the standard configuration Prepare the optional Flash FDD or USB FDD if necessary Installing Windows Server 2008 E 3 About the System Partition Size The system partition size can be calculated from the following formula When the system is Windows Server 2008 64 bit x64 Edition Required partition size size required to install OS paging file size dump file size application size Size required to install OS 11 600MB Full Installation 12 300MB Full Installation with Service Pack 2 16 720MB Full Installation Service Pack 2 or 4 100MB Server Core Installation 4 800MB Server Core Installation with Service Pack 2 9 220MB Server Core Installation Service Pack 2 Paging file size recommended Installed memory size 1 5 Dump file size Installed memory size 300MB Application size Required size IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging fil
175. bs ancgeslsstsasedsesonsdaciayes ES E 2 Installing on the Mirrored Volume ccccceecescceseceseceecseecseeeseeseeeeeeeeenseeeseeseceaeeaecaeeneeenes E 2 Mounting MO Device E AA E EE ks Beccles TA E 2 About Removable Media cssis cess nciuiee cscs sadcennteds cwseteeessateddeceds n dene a E 2 Floppy Disk DIVE c4 c ceseces cossue ciety eeeacteheaasvagenunens escent tentty de aeuti be wenee E eenagconeeteete E 2 About the Systemi Partition Size senie osese senen EE cece SE EEE E exsevabenceesedeende E E e E 3 Bit PO CK Cisse 25 sets crnee tacts these ten Ai aebte cee a aa a a ag E 5 Installing Windows Server 2008 ccccccceessessceescesecesecesecseecseeeseesaeeneeeeeeseceseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeenaes E 6 Preparations for Installation sic ccsesccesseececesetesceastes nea e uE EEE EEE EERE E S E E 6 Creating Windows Server 2008 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER ereere E 6 Windows Server 2008 Clean Installation ccccecccesccesecseeeseeeseeseeeeeceeessecesecnseeaecnecnseenaeenaes E 9 Procedure for License Authentication cccceeccescesscesceesceeceseceaeceaecseecaeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeereeeeees E 20 Updating the Systems 2c ccshcis sisters eek acl eae ts obies Medd sateen artes pp bite Oo stan oho E 20 Driver Installation and Advanced Settings c cecccesccessceseceecsseceeeseeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeereeetens E 23 LAN Driver and PR O S E a a 28 nea ealeoatons cian Mae mears satan antnreg lites E 23 Network DI
176. button and click Next Ifyou want to install an Operating System or to build a RAID sub system select Perform the Express setup Ifyou want to stop the operation of EXPRESSBUILDER select Exit EXPRESSBUILDER Perform the Express setup C Create the OEM Disk for Windows Save or restore the configuration data of the RAID controller Load the optional driver into che EXPRESSBUILDER Exit EXPRESSBUILDER Next Version 5 XX XXX XX XXX 5 36 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 7 Load parameters steps are displayed NEC EXPRESSBUILDER OOOO OOOO OD UU Step rama Jap 3 gt act gt Version 5 XX XXX XX XXX Do not load parameters 1 Select Do not load parameters 2 Click Next IMPORTANT The setup using a parameter file saved in the Flash FDD is not supported NOTE If a floppy disk drive is not connected select this item Load parameters 1 Insert the floppy disk containing the parameters file 2 Select Load parameters enter the file path of the parameters file into the text box 3 Click Next Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 37 8 Select the installing Operating System Select Install the Windows 32bit editions or Install the Windows 64bit editions from the menu click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ee O Top menu Load Select OS Enter RAID Step parameters l gt gt
177. by yourself Contact your service representative and follow instructions m See the on line help for details of the Off line Maintenance Utility For further information ask your service representative The Off line Maintenance Utility provides the following features BIOS Setup Viewer Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with the SETUP utility to a text file System Information Viewer Provides the functions to view information on the processor and the BIOS and export it to a text file System Information Management Provides the function to make a back up copy of your data Without the backup data the system specific information and or configuration may not be restored Only the authorized personnel is allowed to restore the backup data HWLog Information Viewer Provides the functions to view information of the HWlog and export it to a text file Troubleshooting 8 41 m BIOS FW Updating This menu allows you to update the software module such as BIOS and firmware of the server by using the update disk 3 5 inch floppy disk that is distributed from NEC customer service representative After rebooting the system an update program is started automatically from floppy disk and the various BIOS and firmware programs are updated IMPORTANT Do not turn off the server while the update program is running If the update processing is discontinued the system becomes unab
178. can no longer proceed Power off the server NOTE The server is provided with two levels of password Administrator and User With the Administrator password you can view and change all system parameters With the User password system parameters available for viewing and changing are limited 4 4 Configuring Your Server Description on On Screen Items and Key Usage Use the following keyboard keys to work with the BIOS Setup utility These keys are also listed at the bottom of the menu screen Indicates there are submenus Indicates the current menu Phoenix SecureCore tm ere Item Specific Help Sep yee tten specific Help item gt Console Redirection f menu gt DMI Event Logging Additional setup menu to FRB 2 Policy Retry 3 Times view server managment Boot Monitoring Disabled features Post Error Pause Enabled AC LINK Last State Fan Control Mode CNormal J Online help window F1 Help t Select Item hange Values F9 Setup Defaults Esc Exit Guasa Ja Menu Enter lect gt Sub Menu F10 Save and Exit Explanation of key functions menu Parameter high lights upon selection menu Cursor 4 Move cursor up and down The cursor moves only to the settings that you can change Cursor gt Move between menus and Select the previous value or the next value for the field Enter Execute command or select submenu Esc Exit the current menu and return to the previous menu
179. cates a pause For example the beep interval 1 3 1 1 indicates 1 beep pause 3 beeps pause 1 beep pause and 1 beep notifying that the DRAM refresh test error occurred Beep code Description Recommended action 3 3 ROM checksum error Contact your service representative to replace repetitive the mother board 1 2 2 3 1 3 1 1 DRAM refresh test error Check if the DIMMs are properly connected If the error persists contact your service representative to replace DIMM or mother board 1 3 1 3 Keyboard controller error Disconnect the keyboard and connect it again If the error persists contact your service representative to replace the mother board 1 3 3 1 No memory or capacity check Check if the DIMMs are properly installed If error the error persists contact your service 1 1 1 1 DRAM address error representative to replace DIMM or mother 1 3 4 3 DRAM test Low Byte error board 1 4 1 1 DRAM test High Byte error 2 1 2 1 BIOS ROM copyright test error Contact your service representative to replace 2 2 3 1 Unexpected interrupt test error the mother board 1 2 Option ROM initialization error Check if BIOS SETUP is correctly configured If an expansion of Option ROM for additionally installed PCI board is not displayed check if the PCI board is properly installed If the error persists contact your service representative to replace the mother board or PCI board Troubleshoo
180. cesceesecaeenaecnaecaaecaeecaeeeseeeeeeeeeenreees F 2 Floppy Disk Drives E E A sie vyot E ST F 2 About the System Partition S1Z cccccssecseesseesseeseeeseeeeceeceeeesecsecaecaaecseecaeecaeeeseeeeeeaeeeneenss F 3 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions ccccesccsseesseesseeseeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeneeneenseenaes F 4 Creating Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER F 4 Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Clean Installation ccccecceeseesceeeceseeeseceseenseeneeeneeenes F 7 Procedure for License Authentication cccccesecsseesseesceesceeseeeecesceeecnseceseenaeesaecaecaeeeeeneeats F 11 Updating the System Applying Service Pack ecceeceesceeseeesecesecseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeereneeeneeerees F 12 Driver Installation and Advanced Settings c cccccesccssceseceecsseceecseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeereeseees F 19 PROSeti vs seycassi vlad wane Gn hen etree E RER cee F 19 Network Driver s niren asire nra nne rian acess R E nin avo i eee en i F 21 Optional Network Board Driver cccecceeceessesscessceseeesecaeceecseecaeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeereeeeees F 22 Setup TEAM wise che t EEE OE vasnwed ees EEEE EE EE EE E E F 23 Settna WOD err E E E A A E E O E A O O E O O E i F 25 Graphics Accelerator Driver s cciccessdocescseneejec canoe cesezaccuatasecisedssccae ne naeig E ete F 27 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 75 107 ccccescceseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeene
181. ceseceeeceseenseenseenseenaeenaes 1 7 During Op ra nket rees n ee E o E E E E E aaah ae 1 8 F r Proper Operations a E EE E ac E E EE eS E TEENE EEE 1 9 Transfer to Third Partys seein ara s E E TE E EENE 1 10 Disposal and Consumables cise cscescsscsesgseess cvvbevce vues eatvvnvesnevseeessteeaeeuses Sea EEE EEs 1 11 Regarding the Transportation of this System ccccsscssesssesscessceeeceeecesecesecesecsecaeesecseeeneeeneeses 1 11 WSCESUPPOTE AAAA EE ocean ated ane cptes E E A 1 11 USE of the term Optical Disk drive 0 0 ceccecceeseesseesceesceesceeeceseceseceaeceaecseecaeeeaeeeseeseeeeeeeereneeees 1 11 USE of the term hard disk drive rennin inin ehin eeaeee ie aia 1 12 Chapter 2 General Description cccceeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseessneeeeseeeseneeesneeees 2 1 OVERVIEW cathe nate E A e did coveted be eel A ai hanks 2 2 System Chassis ce ssc scs e cic O A ce ces dn tes 2 3 Front View neeith in seiees E o Sucka hal ks coechcbactush ee Uniti eves Reece teh eae os 2 3 Reat VIEW oaii Beties ie ah R E tote Sashes Rate ees SA Re a eee hs 2 5 Internal ViewWs 135 anil ee eno E ine EA en ee aioe ae he ese 2 7 Mother Board isan tities ee Sin ab ite Rec oe Rete 2 10 Standard Featurese cic 5 eiei RO oie on ee tie hn nGhaatan anata nu SG wad nueteaties 2 11 Remote Power On Feature Wake On LAN cc ccssecsseesseeseeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeensecnseenaeenseeaes 2 12 AG EINK Feature mien a ar E A a tee et nova taa
182. cify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of the memory capacity mounted on Express server 300MB m Incase the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added memory change the write debugging information to Kernel Memory Dump before adding memory The size of debugging information memory dump to be taken also changes due to adding memory Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information memory dump write destination drive Windows Server 2008 32 bit x86 Edition m To specify Complete Memory Dump to write the debug information is recommended If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB Complete Memory Dump cannot be specified so that specify Kernel Memory Dump instead m Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of the memory capacity mounted on Express server 300MB In case the memory capacity is more than 2GB a free area of 2048 300MB or more m Incase the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added memory change the write debugging information to Kernel Memory Dump before adding memory The size of debugging information memory dump to be taken also changes due to adding memory Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information memory dump write destination drive Click Settings on the Performance group box The Performance Options window appears Click Advanced tab on the Performance Options window Click Chan
183. ck No and then go to Step 8 G 16 Installing Windows Server 2003 6 When the following message appears click Yes Applying the Service Pack xi Applying the Service Pack IF you want to continue applying click Yes and select the Service Pack brows the File like an e g If you want to stop applying click No E g AXKAXKAARKARKAA ARKAAK ENU EXE 7 When the following message appears select a Service Pack and click Open and then according to a message apply it Open 2 x Look jn Se Local Disk C eck Documents and Settings ESM My Recent ezclct Documents Intel E PnPDrvrs Desktop WINDOWS LA My Documents My Computer e Cae File name I z Places Files of type Execute file exe Cancel Updating the system The setup does not apply the Service Pack Do you want to reboot The system has been updated Installing Windows Server 2003 G 17 Recovery Process If Updating the System is executed before the application of the Hotfix for Windows Server 2003 KB921411 may be displayed on the USB root hub If is displayed on the USB root hub perform application of the Hotfix for Windows Server 2003 KB921411 and the Updating the System according to the following process 1 Start the Windows Explorer and click Tools and Folder Options 2 Select Files and Folders Hidden files and folders Show hidden
184. configure RAID drives in your system This chapter also provides information on mother board jumper settings Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup describes how to install the operating system Chapter 6 Installing and Using Utilities describes how to install the utilities for the server It also includes a description on using the attached NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD Chapter 7 Maintenance provides you with all the information necessary to maintain successful operation of the server This chapter also includes a description on relocating and storing the server Chapter 8 Troubleshooting contains helpful information for solving problems that might occur with your system Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server provides you with instructions for upgrading your system with an additional processor optional memory optional add in cards hard disk drives peripheral devices and power supply Chapter 10 Internal Cabling Diagram includes cabling information for the SATA2 controller 5 25 inch device and the power supply Appendix A Specification provides specifications for your server Appendix B Other Precautions provides supplementary notes on using the server Appendix C IRQ provides a list of factory set IRQs Appendix D Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 describes how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 without using Express Setup Using the Express Setup tool is recommended for installing Windows Server
185. ct OS Enter RAID Step peer 2 l gt Fee gt Select the installing Operating System f Install other Operating System is selected EXPRESSBUILDER only creates a Logical Drive and finishes the setup Ifyou want to create new logical drive to install Windows Server 2008 select Install other Operating System to complete RAID configuration and then perform the Express setup again install che Windows 32bit editions Install che Windows 64bit editions Install other Operating System Back J Next J Top Version 5 XX RRX XX KXK 9 Enter the setting of a logical drive Enter RAID settings steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Mims t Top menu Load Select OS Enter RAID Specify Enter basic Step parame settings UD f medi MD ffram n I partition Set a parameter to create a logical drive Ifyou are not using a RAID controller select Skip the logical drive creation and press the Next button Ifyou want to use the existing logical drive select Skip the logical drive creation and press the Next button skip the logical drive creation Dic reas oa daana Fa logical drive already exists all the data stored an the logical drive will be deleted RAID controller The number of the total physical devices Number of physical devices used to create the logical drive The number of the physical de
186. ct the cable to the connector aligning the markings on each 9 32 Upgrading Your Server 9 Insert the RAID controller board into the slot on the motherboard 10 Reattach the parts of the server removed at the start Removing the battery Remove the battery unit by reversing the above procedure Upgrading Your Server 9 33 Attaching and removing the N8103 125 additional battery Attaching the battery 1 Attach the connector board and battery control cable supplied with the N8103 125 additional battery to the RAID controller Refer to the user s guide supplied with the additional battery for how to attach the connector board and cable to the RAID controller Prepare the server as shown on Page 9 4 Remove the side cover as shown on Page 9 5 Remove the anchor plate attached to the bottom of the hard disk drive cage LIED LZ w Remove the screw 9 A Remove the screw Slide out the plate in D o C i ae the direction shown gt Cae 5 Remove the three screws that attach the battery pack to the bracket and attach the battery pack to the plate removed in step 4 9 34 Upgrading Your Server 6 Connect the re
187. ctric shock may be caused C Q CQe Indicates a general prohibited action that cannot be specifically identified Mandatory Action Unplug the power cord of the server Otherwise an electric shock or fire may be caused Be sure to provide earthing Otherwise an electric shock or fire may be caused Soa Indicates a mandatory action that cannot be specifically identified Make sure to follow the instruction NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense CE Statement Warning This is a Class A product In domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures EN55022 BSMI Statement BORA we PRWA Mein ER RMSE PE Re gt AY RE Se WON TR gt tah T EME OER RAL BNR o Trademarks NEC ESMPRO and NEC EXPR
188. d Fine Setup m NEC EXPRESSBUILDER system setup utility m BIOS SETUP utility m Parameter File Creator Quietness m The fan can be set to low speed mode for quieter operation High availability m A watchdog timer monitors for stalls 2 12 General Description Remote Power On Feature Wake On LAN The remote power on function turns on the server through a network It sends a special packet from the management computer to a remote server to turn it on if the server is off powered To enable this feature you must select Enabled for each submenu in the Power Management Setup of the Advanced menu of the BIOS SETUP utility See Chapter 4 The remote power on feature is not available in the following cases Press the POWER SLEEP switch once to start the OS and turn off the server in an appropriate procedure m Abnormal previous system shut down m No power supply to the server due to turned off breaker disconnected power cord power blackout etc AC LINK Feature When the power cord of the server is connected to an uninterruptible power supply UPS unit the server supports the power linkage feature that enables control over the power supply from the UPS to the server The AC LINK feature can be enabled or disabled with Power Management Setup in the Server menu of the BIOS SETUP utility See Chapter 4 Security The BIOS SETUP utility provides a number of security features to prevent unauthorized or accidental acce
189. d RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID Other controllers N8103 75 SCSI Controller N8103 95 SCSI Controller N8103 104A SAS Controller N8103 107 SCSI Controller Option E 2 Installing Windows Server 2008 Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to the server supports following combination of the OS installation media and Service Pack m Windows Server 2008 OS installation media with Service Pack 2 OS installation media No Service Pack Service Pack 2 OS installation media No Service Pack Installing Service Pack You can install the Service Pack on the server When the Service Pack is not attached to your system prepare it by yourself Updating System If you modified the Windows system execute Update the system in the Autorun Menu Installing on the Mirrored Volume When re installing the OS to a hard disk drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk only the simple dynamic volume is available for installation If you want to install the OS on a volume that is mirrored using Disk Management invalidate the mirroring and reset to the basic disk before the installation and validate the mirroring again after the installation You can create invalidate or delete the mirror volume by using Disk Management in Computer Management Mounting MO Device Do not mount an MO device on your server during the Windows installation A
190. d Updates Never 3 Customize This Server 2 Customizing your server T Do not show this window at logon Qose If you have selected a Server Core installation 1 After a Server Core installation of Windows Server 2008 is completed press Ctrl Alt Del Press CTRL ALT DELETE to log on tm Windows Server 2008 Standard E 18 Installing Windows Server 2008 2 Select Other User Other User Cancel al i Windows Server 2008 Standard 3 Log on to the system as an administrator You need not enter your password in this dialog box Click the button e administrator strato N F Cancel ial A tm Windows Server 2008 Standard 4 Before you log on you will be prompted to change the password Click OK E The user s password must be changed before logging on the first time OK Cancel a i Tm Windows Server 2008 Standard Installing Windows Server 2008 E 19 5 Change the password and then click the gt button Cancel me Windows Server 2008 Standard NOTE Administrator password that satisfy the next condition are required More than 6 characters m Contains characters from three of the following categories numbers uppercase letters lowercase letters and signs 6 When the following message appears click OK OK Ye Windows Server2008 Standard 7 At the command prompt enter user information cx Administra
191. dapter Fault Tolerance m Adaptive Load Balancing m Static Link Aggregation Switch Fault Tolerance 7 Click Finish IMPORTANT Teaming an adapter with standard network adapter and optional network adapter will cause the following message appear Click OK and continue the setting One or more adapters in the team do not support true NDIS6 20 Receive Side Scaling Receive Side Scaling will be disabled for the team Disabling Receive Side Scaling will negatively impact the performance of the team 8 Click TEAM Team name from Device manager gt Network adapters to modify the team Click Settings tab and click Modify Team button 9 Refer to the following procedure to set the team member adapter priority status Set Primary Point the adapter and click Set Primary button Set Secondary Point the adapter and click Set Secondary button Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 25 NOTE Adapter priority config can be confirmed by the following procedure 1 Click TEAM Team name from Device manager Network adapters 2 Click Settings and confirm Adapters in team list 10 Click Test Switch Run test to confirm the adapter team is properly setup Confirm the result in Test results 11 Restart the system 5 26 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Remove Team Open the Device Manager Click Network adapters and
192. dard graphics accelerator drivers update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system Standard graphics accelerator drivers will be installed automatically Refer to Graphics Accelerator Driver described in Appendix E 29 when you want to reinstall the driver individually Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 75 95 107 If you use the SCSI Controller N8103 75 95 107 you do not need to install the driver manually It is automatically installed by Windows Plug and Play Installing SAS Controller Driver N8103 104A If you use the SAS Controller N8103 104A you do not need to install the driver manually It is automatically installed by Windows Plug and Play Setting for Solving Problems Setup your computer in advance so that it can recover from any trouble precisely and as soon as possible when it should occur For more information refer to Page 5 80 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 55 Windows Server 2003 This section explains how to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 by using the Express Setup NOTES m Express Setup does not support the installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions If you want to install it see Appendix F m If you install Windows Server 2003 without using Express Setup see Appendix G Notes on Windows Installation This section explains the notes on the Windows installation Confirm these notes before starting the Express Setup
193. devices 11 SGPIO connector 20 FAN2 connector for rear cooling fan STANDARD FEATURES High performance E Intel Xeon Processor Intel Pentium Processor Intel Celeron Processor m High speed 1000BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T interface 1Gbps 100Mbps 10Mbps supported m High speed disk access SATA standard and SAS option m Dual channel memory configuration lc High reliability m Memory monitoring feature error correction error detection Temperature detection Cooling fan monitoring feature Voltage monitoring feature BIOS password feature RAID System SATA standard and SAS option Management Utilities m NEC ESMPRO Off line Maintenance Utility RAID System Management Utility ExpressUpdate feature New management function Hardware events can be logged Power Saving Feature Sleep feature available for Windows Server 2003 or later General Description 2 11 Expandability m Four integrated I O expansion PCI slots PCI EXPRESS x16 1 slot PCI EXPRESS x4 1 slot connector x8 PCI EXPRESS x2 1 slot connector x4 PCI bus 32 bit 33MHz 1 slot m Large memory of up to 16GB four 4GB DIMMs m USB interface USB 2 0 Many Available Features m El Torito Bootable CD ROM no emulation mode format support m Remote power on feature m AC LINK feature Onboard RAID Controller SATA Self diagnosis m Power On Self Test POST m Test and Diagnosis Easy an
194. ding the drive letter of the parameters file into the text box and click Next ameters select Do not save parameters Back Next Top Version 5 XX XXX KX XXX If you want to save the parameters set the free formatted floppy disk Select Save parameters enter the file path of the parameters files into the text box and click Next If not select Do not save parameters 5 44 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 17 The Express Setup will start when you click Perform in Start Express setup step Enter Enter Select Win Select Save Start Step network domaift dows cori apici parameters Express protocol account ponents tions setup Now EXPRESSBUILDER gathered all of the parameters for the Express setup The Express setup will start when Perform burton is clicked Back Top Perform Version 5 XX XXX HX XXX 18 Remove NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from the optical disk drive according to the message If you proceed the setup by using setup parameter file remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive 19 Insert Windows Server 2008 DVD ROM into the optical disk drive NOTE Windows Server 2008 and selected applications will be installed automatically and reboots several times Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 45 20 Agree Software License Agreement screen appears Read the license terms carefully If you agree select I accept the licens
195. dition DISC 2 CD ROM from the optical disk drive and restart the system After installation is completed be sure to execute the tasks described in Driver Installation and Advanced Settings and Updating the System of this chapter Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions F 11 Procedure for License Authentication Product Key used in the procedure for license authentication should be matched with the COA label in which the product key contained in Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions is written NOTES m Execute the activation within 30 days System may be locked after 30 days is passed m COA label may be attached to your server F 12 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Updating the System Applying Service Pack Update the system in the situation below m CPU is expanded expanded to single processor to multi processor m Modified system configuration m Recovered the system using recovery process The system update brings the correction program provided by Microsoft to be applied to reinforce the system security The system update is recommended It is necessary to use ServicePack2 or more ServicePack 2 need not be applied again when Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions CD ROM where ServicePack 2 is included is used and it is installed If you install Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions CD ROM which contains Service Pack 2 you do not have to apply Hotfix for Windows x64 or Hotfix for Windows Server 2003
196. dows This option does not keep your files settings and programs The option to make changes to disks and partitions is available when you start your computer using the installation disc We recommend backing up your files before you proceed Help me decide jl Collecting information 2 Installing Windows 12 Select the disk where a partition will be created and then click Drive options advanced p Refresh Drive options advanced Load Driver 1 Collecting information 2 Installing Windows IMPORTANT If the partition has already been created go to step 15 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 D 13 13 Click New enter a partition size and then click Apply NOTE When new partition is created initial 100MB is assigned as boot partition by Windows OS Install Windows i To ensure that all Windows features work correctly Windows might create additional partitions for system files 14 Select the partition created in step 13 and then click Format 15 Select the partition created and then click Next Where do you want to install Windows Total Size Free Type E Disk0 Partition 1 System Reserved 100 0 MB 860MB System 4 Refresh X Delete P Format Load Driver a Extend f Collecting information 2 Installing Windows NOTE The number of partitions displayed to a screen by environment of the use is different
197. dows must be activated with Microsoft before you can continue using it Activation over the Internet is quick and ea You don t need to give your name or other personal information when you activate Windows Do you want to activate Windows Ld let s activate Windows over the Internet now Yes wantto telephone a cusi ers e representative ti e Windows No log me off Micro mitted to your privacy For more information read Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions F 29 The following screen is displayed Activate Windows Activate Windows by phone Just four steps and you re done SEAE Select your location z Step2 Callanum Step3 Pro 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 ck Change product key only if requested to do bythe custo e Step4 Type the confirmation ID thatthe c m vice representative gave you A B c D E F G To continue click SETTING FOR SOLVING PROBLEMS Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5 F 30 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions This page is intentionally left blank Appendix G Installing Windows Server 2003 This section explains how to install the Windows Server 2003 BEFORE INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003 Read the following notes or information before installing the Windows Server 2003 Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your server suppor
198. dress for serial port address 2F8h B 3E8h 2E8h Interrupt IRQ 3 Selects the interrupt for a serial port B IRQ 4 SATA RAID Disabled Indicates whether the RAID disk drives that Enable Enabled uses the onboard SATA is enabled or disabled View only To enable or disable the RAID system use the jumper switch on mother board Factory set Configuring Your Server 4 15 Advanced Chipset Control feature is enabled or disabled Set this option to Enabled to shift from standby mode to sleep mode after a specified time has elapsed by using the OS power control function Option Parameter Description Your Setting Multimedia Timer Disabled Specify whether the system supports Enabled the multimedia timer feature Intel R VT d Disabled Specify whether the Intel R Enabled Virtualization Technology for Directed I O feature is enabled or disabled This item appears only when the processor supports this feature Wake On Disabled Specify whether the remote power on LAN PME Enabled function through a network is enabled or disabled Wake On Ring Disabled Specify whether the remote power on Enabled function through a serial port modem is enabled or disabled Wake On RTC Disabled Specify whether the remote power on Alarm Enabled function that uses the RTC alarm Factory set IMPORTANT If the AC power is turned off while the Wake On Ring feature is enabled this featu
199. e Test summary window Diagnostics tool title Shows the name and version of the diagnostic tool Test window title Shows the progress of the diagnostics Test End is displayed when the diagnostics completes Test result Shows the start end and elapsed time and completion status of the diagnostics Guide line Shows the details of the keys to operate window Test summary window Shows the results of each test that executed the diagnostics Move the cursor and press the Enter key on the cursor line to display the details of the test When an error is detected by the system diagnostics the relevant test result in the Test summary window is highlighted in red and Abnormal End is displayed in the result on the right side Move the cursor to the test that detected the error and press the Enter key Record the error message that has been output to the Detail Information screen and contact your service representative 7 8 Maintenance 7 9 10 11 12 Follow the guide line shown at the bottom of the screen and press the Esc key The Enduser Menu below is displayed TeDoLi TEst amp Diagnosis On Linux Ver001 00 Build020901 1 1m Enduser Menu lt Test Result gt lt Device List gt lt Log Info gt lt Option gt lt Reboot gt Please choose a function by the arrow key and push Enter key lt Test Result gt Shows the diagnostics completion screen of the above diagnostics
200. e a a E E S 6 23 Manual Setup aar HAR Aa A Ann Mane A E aE Ra SOUR AGA RS 6 23 Management of RAID System using NEC ESMPRO Managet cesccesesseeseeeteeneeeneeenes 6 24 Easy Confisurationins sanenndwkanewa ok ucts RAR Gat n eins aE e iaae Awhile aes 6 24 Creating Logical Drive Of RAID 6 cccecceescseseeseceseceseceeecaeeeseeeaeeseeneesseenseeeseenaeeaeceeeneeenes 6 24 NEC Product Info Collection Utility 2 ccccecccccccssecsseeeeseeeesceeeceecnseceseceaecaecaeecaeesaeeeaeeeneeneeeas 6 25 Installation en toutes Teese etsted alnsgets a meee bea OL ht aad tomer Se Le Des eee Ys 6 25 LOR Tata Di EIA AE ci tased Si cevect seas aces E sachets E 6 26 Uns tallations 25 5 scvat sessry chetistt tots bes ttuets Povetntbea sg Saeoentnes ste pantets ET 6 26 Chapter 7 Maintenance 2 ccccceccesseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeneeeeaeeeeeseeesensseaseeeeeseeeseseeeenenees 7 1 Making Backtip Copies ccd oc neha on tok ihn neh ee ee ee ae wee hee ees 7 1 Clean Oeste ists ces toad ome Rane eh aes cet econ Ae RE eee eee eee ewe 7 2 Cleaning the Servet ivcccsieac cela ce Baie teh ec csece E EOR cba eu E Sede thas owes eS eee eteattotheeece 7 3 Cleaning the Keyboard Mouse sonini a i a a 7 3 Cleaning DISC aienea a ied R E E E a R O E E i 7 4 Syst m Diagnostic Sienen aae A E E RO Ras E O a i 7 5 Test Items aiei aieea nets aiee ER EE EA E E a E 7 5 Startup and Exit of System Diagnostics cccccscesecsseesseeseeeseeeseeseeeseceseceseeeaece
201. e a partition will be created and then click Drive Option IMPORTANT If the partition has already been created go to step 19 Click New enter a partition size and then click Apply Select the partition created in step 17 and then click Format Installing Windows Server 2008 E 15 19 Select the partition created and then click Next Creme O E A Where do you want to install Windows Free Space Type 74 5 GB Ep Refresh Pas Delete HP Format H New Load Driver a Extend When the following message appears the installation starts automatically Installing Windows That s all information we need right now Your computer will restart several times during installation y Copying files Expanding files Installing features Installing updates Completing installation NOTE If the disk drive contains NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD you will be prompted to replace a media with that for OS installation Insert the install media according to the on screen message Install Windows Insert Disc Please insert Windows installation disc 1 E 16 Installing Windows Server 2008 20 Log on to the system The steps vary depending on the edition you selected in step 10 If you have selected a full installation 1 After a full installation of Windows Server 2008 is completed the following dialog box will prompt you to set or change the password before you log on
202. e is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system m For more information on Recommended value see About the System Partition Size described earlier m Incase the memory is expanded re specify the paging file to suit the new memory size 5 82 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 12 Click OK The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification In such case follow the message to restart the system When the system is Windows Server 2008 Follow the procedure below to specify 1 Select Control Panel and click System The System dialog box appears 2 Click Advanced system settings The System Properties dialog box appears 3 Select Advanced tab Click Settings on the Startup and Recovery group box 4 Modify Dump file in the Write debugging information group box e g Write the debug information in D drive with the file name MEMORY DMP D MEMORY DMP Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 83 IMPORTANT Windows Server 2008 64 bit x64 Edition m To specify Complete Memory Dump to write the debug information is recommended If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB Complete Memory Dump cannot be specified so that specify Kernel Memory Dump instead m Spe
203. e maximum operating capability of the card itself Even if the operating capability of a PCI card exceeds that of the PCI slot the card operates at the slot capability Standard network Teaming with an identical AFT ALB is possible when using a standard network with the following optional LAN boards N8104 126 N8104 121 N8104 125A Upgrading Your Server 9 39 Installation Install the board to be connected to the PCI board slot depending on the following procedure Refer to the manual provided with the board 1 Before the installation set the switches and jumpers on the installed board appropriately referring to the manual provided with the board if necessary See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Remove the side cover Lift the tab of the PCI board retention springs to release the lock Then open the PCI board retention spring 5 Remove the additional slot cover IMPORTANT Save the removed slot cover carefully 9 40 Upgrading Your Server 6 Make the component side of the board face the bottom of the server put the rear panel of the board on the frame spring securely and push the board fully so that the board connection port is certainly connected to the slot For a long sized board align the board with the groove of the guide rail on the front of the server
204. e terms and then click Next Set Up Windows F C Set Up Windows Please read the license terms MICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS al MICROSOFT WINDOWS SERVER 2008 STANDARD These license terms are an agreement between Microsoft Corporation or based on where you live one of its affiliates and you Please read them They apply to the software named above which includes the media on which you received it if any The terms also apply to any Microsoft 0 updates O0 supplements O0 Internet based services and n sunnort services zi I accept the license tems 21 When the following message appears click Start Set Up Windows E BY Set Up Windows w Thank you 5 46 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 22 When the following message appears press Ctrl Alt Del Press CTRL ALT DELETE to log on 23 Log on to the system lt Full Installation gt When the following screen appears enter your password into Password and click 6 Administrator Cancel t Windows Server 2008 S d lt Server Core Installation gt When the following screen appears click Other User Cane Te Windows Server 206 hadia Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 47 In the following screen enter Administrator into UserName your password into Password and click C E w Windows Server 2003 yandan Hereinafter pr
205. e with the entire system m Regardless of the size of the mounted memory or the Write debugging information type of memory dump the maximum size of the dump file is The size of the mounted memory 300MB m If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs Example The partition size required for a system with an installed memory size of 1GB 1 024MB and a full installation of the operating system 11 600MB 1 024MB 1 5 1 024MB 300MB application size 14 460MB application size If the provided partition size is smaller than that required to install the OS and paging file expand the partition size or utilize a larger disk If your system does not have a sufficient dump file size divide the required file space into multiple disks by performing the steps below 1 Set the system partition size to a size sufficient to install the OS and paging file 2 See Setting for Solving Problems to write the debug information of the dump file onto another disk If there is not enough disk space to write the debug information add another disk for the dump file E 4 Installing Windows Server 2008 When the system is Windows Server 2008 32 bit x86 Edition Required partition size size required to install OS paging file size dump file size application size Size required to install OS 6 300MB Full Installation 9 300MB Full Installation wi
206. ead window Centering hub Centering hole High density media hole 2HD only Write protection hole Write protection switch Front Rear B 2 Other Precautions Notes on use The floppy disk is an important data storage media with delicate structure and requires care Keep the following notes in mind to use it m Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive gently as far as it goes m Attach the label to the correct position Do not write anything directly onto the disk surface with a pencil or ball point pen Do not open the shutter Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place Do not place anything on the floppy disk Do not leave the floppy disk in a high temperature place e g place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a heater Do not leave the floppy disk with foods and drinks or in a place exposed to cigarette smoke Do not leave the floppy disk near any form of liquid or a chemical or in a place where a chemical may be accidentally sprayed over them Do not place any magnetic objects e g magnet near the floppy disk Do not clip the floppy disk or drop it Keep the floppy disk in a floppy disk case that protects it from magnetism and dust Other Precautions B 3 m Write protection A floppy disk has a write protect switch that prevents the stored data from accidental erasure Write protection notch Write Write disabled enabled
207. eady contained Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER you do not need to insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER m If you have created the OEM Disk into the Flash FDD connect the Flash FDD before you start the system The screen of Step 6 is displayed Press Enter and go to Step 11 lt If the SCSI Controller N8103 95 is not connected gt Go to Step 12 G 10 Installing Windows Server 2003 11 A list of mass storage devices is displayed Select the Adaptec Ultral60 SCSI Cards Win Server 2003 and press Enter IMPORTANT If the following message is displayed when you use the N8103 95 SCSI controller press S The driver you provided seems to be newer than the Windows default driver Windows already has a driver that you can use for Adaptec Ultra 160 SCSI Cards Win Server 2003 Unless the device manufacturer prefers that you use the driver on the floppy disk you should use the driver in Windows The screen of Step 5 is displayed Go to Step 12 12 lt Ifthe SAS Controller N8103 104A is connected gt Press S IMPORTANT m Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive If the floppy disk drive has already contained Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER you do not need to insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER m Ifyou have created the OEM Disk into the Flash FDD connect the Flash FDD before you s
208. ears all configuration information on the RAID Controller and hard disk drives The configuration information on all channels of the RAID Controller is also cleared NOTES m When configuration information on the RAID Controller and that on the hard disk drive do not match excluding at replacement of faulty RAID Controller configuration mail fail if you select the configuration information on the RAID Controller In this case execute Clear Configuration to create configuration again m LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility cannot delete each virtual drive Use Universal RAID Utility instead Force Online Puts a hard disk drive being in the FAIL status online Select Objects gt Physical Drive select hard disk drive Force Online from the TOP menu Rebuild Rate Sets the Rebuild Rate Select Objects gt Adapter gt Sel Adapter gt Rebuild Rate from the TOP menu Available value is between 0 and 100 Default value recommended is 30 Hard disk drive information Checks hard disk drive information Select Objects gt Physical Drive select hard disk drive gt Drive Properties from the TOP menu Configuring Your Server 4 43 LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility and Universal RAID Utility You can use Universal RAID Utility for configuration and management monitoring of RAID System after start up operating system The point to keep in mind when I use Universa
209. ected to a separate switch SFT supports two ports per team Static Link Aggregation SLA accounts for the GEC and 802 3ad static protocols SLA is a switch assisted teaming mode and requires configuring ports at both ends of the link server interfaces and switch ports IMPORTANT m AFT ALB setup must be operated after system update and restarting the system m All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming must exist on the same LAN If they are connected to the separate switches they will not work normally m The adapters specified as a group of Adaptive Load Balancing ALB can be connected to only Switching Hub m When exchange the mother board or option network card make sure to remove the adapter team before exchanges and recreate the adapter team after exchange complete Confirm the port setting of switching hub L2 matches the server network adapter Teaming mode m Teaming is not supported with Windows Server Core 5 24 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Create Team Open the Device Manager Open Network adapters Intel R xxx properties Click Teaming tab and check the Team this adapter with other adapters check box Click New Team Fill the name of the team in Specify a name for the team and click Next Include the adapter to the team and click Next Select a team mode and then click Next IMPORTANT Following team types are supported m A
210. ed If you want to keep the current partition remained see Appendix E to re install the system Peripheral Devices such as RDX Depending on your hardware configuration some peripheral devices need to be removed or disabled before starting setup Refer to the instruction manual which came with the peripheral device for pertinent information and proceed accordingly Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 31 About the System Partition Size When the system is Windows Server 2008 64 bit x64 Edition Required partition size size required to install OS paging file size dump file size application size Size required to install OS 11 600MB Full Installation 12 300MB Full Installation with Service Pack 2 16 720MB Full Installation Service Pack 2 or 4 100MB Server Core Installation 4 800MB Server Core Installation with Service Pack 2 9 220MB Server Core Installation Service Pack 2 Paging file size recommended Installed memory size 1 5 Dump file size Installed memory size 300MB Application size Required size IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging
211. ed to only Switching Hub m When exchange the mother board or option network card make sure to remove the adapter team before exchanges and recreate the adapter team after exchange complete Confirm the port setting of switching hub L2 matches the server network adapter Teaming mode m Teaming is not supported with Windows Server Core Create Team Open the Device Manager Open Network adapters Intel R xxx properties Click Teaming tab and check the Team this adapter with other adapters check box Click New Team Fill the name of the team in Specify a name for the team and click Next Include the adapter to the team and click Next 6 Installing Windows Server 2008 E 27 Select a team mode and then click Next IMPORTANT Following team types are supported Adapter Fault Tolerance Adaptive Load Balancing Static Link Aggregation Switch Fault Tolerance Click Finish Click TEAM Team name from Device manager Network adapters to modify the team Click Settings tab and click Modify Team button Refer to the following procedure to set the team member adapter priority status Set Primary Point the adapter and click Set Primary button Set Secondary Point the adapter and click Set Secondary button NOTE Adapter priority config can be confirmed by the following procedure 1 2s Click TEAM Team name from Device manager gt
212. eeenes 5 48 Setting for Solving Problems 2 08 ssc Richie hank wants dR aes 5 54 Windows Server 2003 05 kciecsecihiehini oo atetlisiusten aoiashhdiise aeeheal eatin E as 5 55 Notes on Windows Installation ceeceesecsesecesesseesecaeeseceeeeceseceeeeceaecaessecaeesecneeeeceaeeeeeneeas 5 55 Flow of Setups enren eeri ae eit aH AR Re a a ae eo ees 5 60 Installing Windows Server 2003 cccecscesscesscesecesecececseeeseeeneeseeeeeceseeeseceaeceeeeaeenseceaeceaeeaeeseeenes 5 61 Installing and Setting Device Drivers cccesccesessseesseeseescecseeeseeeeeeecesecnseensecnseesecseeceeeeeeneeaes 5 71 PROS Cts seis care a E vues tees ce ens eye us pues barons eave wash ye uaa bese E coeds ootegeuney 5 71 Network Driver suram centai oea oni gE niin Aetna tats ata 5 73 Optional Network Board Drivet sseesessesesssesersresreressreressesersestrstsstsressesresteserstestenessesressee 5 74 Setup Team sirana E a TE E EE A T TE ETE A EA E TEA 5 75 Setting W OL mernet EEE ee Ea EREE E E EE EES EERE SE eae 5 77 Graphics Accelerator Driver esesesseseeseeseesessteressesetsestestssteressestesrestesessteneseesteseenessestestee 5 79 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 75 95 107 ccsccesseesseeseeesceseceeeceseenseensecseeeaeeenes 5 79 Installing SAS Controller Driver N8103 1O4A oe cececsceeseeesceeeceeeceeeceseeeseceaeenseceeeneenes 5 79 Setting for Solving Problems 0 ccceccceesceseceseeeseccecseecsecseecaeecseceneee
213. eel tired you should stop working and do light exercises 1 14 Notes on Using Your Server This page is intentionally left blank Chapter 2 General Description This chapter provides information that you should be familiar with before using the server It includes names and functions of the components and features of the server 2 2 General Description OVERVIEW Your server is a modular multiprocessing server based on the Intel microprocessor family It is a solid performer and offers the latest technology The combination of compute performance memory capacity and integrated I O provides a high performance environment for many server market applications These range from large corporations supporting remote offices to small companies looking to obtain basic connectivity capability such a file and print services e mail web access web site server etc Your server is housed and available as a tower based system Ua Front View As application requirements increase you can expand your server with an additional memory add in boards and peripheral devices tape devices DVD ROM and hard disk drives The server features the following major components A high performance Intel Xeon Processor Intel Pentium Processor or Intel Celeron Processor Up to 16GB of memory using 4GB DIMMs Minimum configuration is 1GB of memory m Dual channel memory configuration Four integrated I O e
214. eenseeereeseens F 27 Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 95 ceeccescceseceseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenseeereeseens F 27 Installing SAS Controller Driver N8103 LO4A ee ceeeesecesecsseeseeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeneenseenaees F 27 About Windows Activations ene boctevtesdacriecstescte a A E EAE F 28 Setting for Solving Problems oreen O E A EEE A E E O E R i F 29 Appendix G Installing Windows Server 2003 ccccssssseseeeeeeseeneeeeseeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeees G 1 BEFORE INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003 ccessssesesseseesceeseeecseeaeecaeeaeecaeeaeaeeaeers G 1 Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER oe eceeceeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeseceeeeeaeenees G 1 Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports 0 ccccessessescsseeeseneeseeecaeeaeeecneeeenteaeers G 2 Application of Service Pack ec 2028 e a E ieee Ve Tes a ee G 2 Updating Systems ci tena e lek a he tik eT ee A We Reid eds G 2 Re installing to the Hard Disk which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk e eee G 2 Mounting MO Device sess neenon eae a a E ci he wR a ae Re ae G 2 About Removable Mediad c3 5 c08 20 ees ne eae ie wn e N Rik Anan S G 2 Floppy Disk Drive sezesio Ree ie neti hehe A ea oie AO a a ween G 2 About the System Partition Size ssrin eeen nosno enire eese eni eee eieae G 3 Installing Windows Server 2003 cccecccesscesscesscesecesecesecseecseeeseeeaeeeeseeeseseseeeeeseeeneeneenseenaeenaes G 5 Creating Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk
215. einstall the driver individually 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive If the autorun menu is displayed close menu screen 2 Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run setup exe in the following directory 015 win winnt ws2008x64 r2 video 4 Follow the message to continue the installation If the dialog message Digital Signature could not been found appears select Yes to continue 5 Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from the optical disk drive restart the system Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 75 107 If you use the SCSI Controller N8103 75 107 you do not need to install the driver manually It is automatically installed by Windows Plug and Play Installing SAS Controller Driver N8103 104A If you use the SAS Controller N8103 104A you do not need to install the driver manually It is automatically installed by Windows Plug and Play D 28 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 About Windows Activation Windows Server 2008 R2 must be activated before you can use Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows activation process is as follows For a server running a full installation 1 Select Control Panel and click System and Security then select System IMPORTANT If the following message appears Windows has already been activated on your system system oix m la CJC E ControlPanel System and Security Syste
216. em using the BIOS SETUP Utility Several unique system parameters are configured using the BIOS SETUP which is stored in the system FLASH memory The RAID configuration utility configures the RAID System and logical drives connected to the Onboard RAID Controller or optional RAID Controller If your system has been factory configured the BIOS SETUP or RAID configuration utility do not need to be run unless you want to change the password or security features add certain types of option boards or devices upgrade your system board or change the RAID configuration This chapter also provides information on several system configuration parameters that are set by jumpers on the system board However these parameters do not usually require change 4 2 Configuring Your Server SYSTEM BIOS BIOS SETUP UTILITY The BIOS Setup utility is provided to make basic hardware configuration for the server This utility is pre installed in the flash memory of the server and ready to run The server is configured with the correct parameters using the BIOS Setup utility and shipped in the best conditions Thus you don t need to use the BIOS Setup utility in most cases However you might wish to use the BIOS Setup utility in the cases described below IMPORTANT m The BIOS Setup utility is intended for system administrator use only m The BIOS Setup utility allows you to set a password The server is provided with two levels of password Super
217. emove the side cover as shown on Page 9 5 Upgrading Your Server 9 29 4 Remove the anchor plate attached to the bottom of the hard disk drive cage aL T PT lt lt LO o Slide out the plate in the direction shown T 5 Remove the three screws that attach the battery pack to the bracket and attach the battery pack to the plate removed in step 4 9 30 Upgrading Your Server 6 Connect the battery control cable to the battery pack Make sure that the cable is inserted firmly and straight into the connector Do not wriggle the cable head while inserting it Correct connection Connect the cable to the connector aligning the markings on each IMPORTANT Do not apply excessive force to the section of the battery cover indicated in the picture below when attaching it to and removing it from the server as this may damage the battery pack components Upgrading Your Server 9 31 7 Attach the battery unit to the server using the screw removed in step 4 TA A CLL 8 Attach the other end of the battery control cable to the connector board on the RAID controller Make sure that the cable is inserted firmly and straight into the connector Do not wriggle the cable head while inserting it Correct connection Conne
218. en after installing the system using the Size required for installation Paging file size install an additional new disk Installing Windows Server 2003 G 5 INSTALLING WINDOWS SERVER 2003 Preparations for Installation m NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition CD ROM m Windows Server 2003 Service Pack CD ROM m User s Guide m Getting Started m Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER Creating Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER Before installing create Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER NOTE If you have already Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER for NEC Express5800 Server which you are going to install Windows Server 2003 you do not need to create it again You can create Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two procedures Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER use this procedure If Windows Server 2003 or Windows can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server you can use the other procedure described later Follow the steps below 1 Prepare one Flash FDD or 3 5 inch floppy disk 2 Turn on your NEC Express5800 Server 3 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server 4 Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt
219. en differs depending on the RAID controller The correspondence between the position of each hard disk drive and its slot number SLT is shown below Be sure to note this correspondence when referencing a log file or replacing a hard disk drive Example of HDD or SSD slot number SLT displayed on the Windows System Event Log n Event Properties Event 702 raidsrv General Detaits raidsrv Configuration LD 10D 0 RAIDS Biia g4 System Source raidsrv Event ID 702 Level Information User N A OpCode More Information CTRL 1 1D 0 LSI Corporation MegaRAID SAS Hitachi HUA72202A20N STS Online Hitachi HUA72202A20N STS Online Hitachi HUA72202A20N STS Online Hitachi HUA72202A20N STS Online PD 10D 0 ENC T 1 ATA PD 2 D 1 ENC 1 SLT 2 ATA PD 3 D 2 ENC 1 SLT 3 ATA PD 4 ID 3 ENC 1 SLT 4 ATA Event Log Online Help Logged 3 11 2010 11 28 28 PM Task Category None Keywords Classic Computer Nicolas Slot position in server unit Displayed slot number on the OS screen Onboard RAID Optional RAID Controller Controller N8103 109 116A 0 SLT 1 SLT 1 1 SLT 2 SLT 2 2 SLT 3 SLT 3 3 SLT 4 SLT 4 x Slot number Upgrading Your Server 9 25 Slot position in server unit
220. er than 2 097 144MB at RAID system m Ifyou select Create a new partition at Windows system drive settings the contents of the hard disk will be all deleted m If Use existing partitions is selected when you operate Windows Server 2008 R2 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER installs the Operating System to the Windows partition The Boot partition if it exists and the Windows partition are deleted The data in the other partition is kept if the system has two or more partitions See the figure below Boot Windows User Data Partition Partition Partition Deleted Deleted Retained If Use existing partitions is selected when you operate Windows Server 2008 or Windows Server 2003 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER installs the Operating System to the 1st partition 1st partition is deleted The data in the other partition is kept if the system has two or more partitions See the figure below First Second Third Partition Partition Partition Deleted Retained Retained You can not re install the system with the existing partition that is upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained Do not select Use existing partitions at Windows system drive settings Installing and Using Utilities 6 15 9 Enter the user information and client license mode Enter basic parameters steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 MM Parameter F
221. erver 4 23 RAID SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This section describes how to use the internal hard disk drives as RAID System by Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID About the optional RAID Controller N8103 109 116A 117A refer to the documents provided with optional RAID Controller IMPORTANT When Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID or Optional RAID Controller N8103 109 116A 117A is used do not let the system enter hibernation or standby mode RAID Overview of RAID System What is RAID Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks RAID is an abbreviation for Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks The RAID technology allows more than one hard disk drive HDD to be handled collectively In actual RAID can configure more than one HDDs as a single disk array disk group to operate the HDDs effectively This can bring higher performance than a single HDD of a large capacity The Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID has a feature to divide a single disk group into several logical drives virtual disks Operating system recognizes these logical drives as if it were a single hard disk drive Operating system accesses to more than one hard disk drive configuring a disk group in parallel Some RAID levels can recover data from remaining data and parity by using rebuild feature if an error occurs in a single HDD This can provide high reliability for the system 4 24 Configuring Your Server
222. es D 1 Note areenide g ee E e e Pies cere dee neem sea E ede ih EE D 1 Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER essesesseseeesssrsersreseesersreeesersessee D 1 Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports ccccecccsssssesseesceseeseeseeseseeseesesaeenenaes D 2 Installing Service Packo mnra sted eechs E A EErEE easter eles D 2 Updating Systemic Sec E nash SE a D 2 Installing on the Mirrored Volume cccccescescessceeeceecesecesecaeecseeeaeeeseeseeeeeeseeeeeeneenseesaeenaes D 2 Mounting MO Device oi cd wien ahd ed nasi Beton shad wane a D 2 About Removable Mediai naiasccisiehauwiahoa wheats nana b latices D 2 Floppy Disk Dive AEN cate wdiiee ee Sak ead natin E be huni hah Suukeiente D 2 About the System Partition Sizes ener here aone e ea E Er Oa E E a a Eia aaie D 3 E OOE a a tae Ah adie kik Dae a alk oh deed Lied D 4 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 o ccceecceescesscesecesecesecseecseeeaeeeseceneeeeescenseeeseeeaeeaeeaecseeeaeeenes D 6 Preparations for Installation cccesccesccesecesecesecseecseeeseeeseeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseenseceeeeesecnaeenseceeeneeaes D 6 Creating Windows Server 2008 R2 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER sses D 6 Windows Server 2008 R2 Clean Installation ccc ccccesseesseesceeseeeeceeeceeceseenseesaeenseeseeaeeenes D 9 Procedure for License Authentication cccceeccescceseceseceseceeeceecseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeereeeeees D 18 Updating the System A E E 8 eos hac ties Sched d
223. essary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DOO O o OO Step IES n gt IES gt aout gt the up itap I protoc account ponents tions setul Enter the settings of the network protocol If you want to set the IP address select Customized settings and click Detail settings If not select Standard setting and click Next Standard setting c Customized settings Back Next Top Default Version 5 XX XXX XX Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 67 13 Enter the domain or workgroup name to be used Enter domain account steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER O OO SE Enter Enter Select Win Select Save Start Ste p network domain gt dows cfi gt applica gt pardmeters gt Exis tions protocol account ponents setup If you want to join in a domain enter the account name password of the domain If not select Join in a workgroup and click Next Join in aworkgroup Workgroup name WORKGROUP Join in a domain i Back Next Top Default Version 5 XX XXX XX 14 Select the installing components Select Windows components steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER O O O ae Enter Enter Select Win Select Save Start Ste p network domai dows c
224. est is not supported Go to the Microsoft website http support microsoft com kb 2003968 en us There is the case that the following message is displayed at the time of shutdown when you executes Updating the system in Windows Server 2008 R2 1 program still needs to close Waiting for Task Host Window This event does not affect system operation Ignore this message For more details see http support microsoft com kb 975777 en us The following system events are logged when Windows Server 2008 is installed Event ID Source Level Description Event ID Source Level Description Event ID Source Level Description 134 Microsoft Windows Time Service Warning NtpClient was unable to set a manual peer to use as a time source because of DNS resolution error on time windows com 0x9 NtpClient will try again in 15 minutes and double the reattempt interval thereafter The error was No such host is known 0x80072AF9 263 PlugPlayManager Warning The service ShellHWDetection may not have unregistered for device event notifications before it was stopped 7000 Service Control Manager Error The Parallel port driver service failed to start due to the following error The service cannot be started either because it is disabled or because it has no enabled devices associated with it 8 20 Troubleshooting Event ID Source Level Description 15016 Microsoft Windows Http Er
225. etwork Monitor at Adding Services Network Monitor can monitor the frame or the packet that the computer installing Network Monitor sends or receives This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble For information on how to install the tool see the Setting for Solving Problems described later in this chapter 5 74 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Optional Network Board Driver If you want to use optional Network Board N8104 111 112 119 120 121 125A 126 123A the network driver will be installed automatically Therefore the driver attached to the Network board should not be used If you want to use optional Network Board N8104 111 112 119 120 121 125A 126 123A install the driver stored in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD m Incase of using N8104 111 015 win winnt dotnet r148 pro100 win32 ndis5x m Incase of using N8104 112 119 120 121 125A 126 015 win winnt dotnet r148 pro1000 win32 ndis5x If the procedure of installation is not clear refer to the installation procedure described in the section Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver m Incase of using N8104 123A Please refer to the installation manual provided with the board Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver Start Device Manager 2 Click Network adapters and double click Network Adapter Name Network Adapter Name Properties appears NOTE Intel R PRO 1000 is the name of On Board
226. even numbered port ggg SATA cable for odd numbered port Internal Cabling Diagrams 10 3 If two or more SATA hard disk drives are connected you can configure a RAID System by using the RAID Controller on the motherboard 10 4 Internal Cabling Diagrams When a SAS Hard Disk Drive SATA Hard Disk Drive or Solid State Drive is Connected to the RAID Controller If any drive is connected to the RAID Controller you need the dedicated interface cable for connection m 3 5 inch hard disk drive K410 221 00 Internal SAS cable m 2 5 inch hard disk drive K410 220 00 Internal SAS cable Fill the hard disk drive cage with the hard disk drives from the bottom to top 5 25 inch device bay Mother board a 4th hard disk drive RAID Controller 3rd hard disk dri N8103 109 116A 117A vrd hard disk arive St 2nd hard disk drive J 1st hard disk drive A mE SAS cable gages SATA cable for optical disk drive K410 220 00 or K410 221 00 NOTES The RAID Controller must be connected when using a SAS hard disk drive IMPORTANT m SAS and SATA hard disk drives cannot be installed together m RAID LED cable To let the DISK Access lamp on the front panel indicate the access states of the hard disk drives connected to the RAID Controller connect the LED cable provided with the server to the LED Internal Cabling Diagrams 10 5 connector on the mother board and the optional RAID Con
227. ewer the runtime component of the Microsoft Visual C 2005 SP1 library is required Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Vista SP1 or later Windows 7 include the runtime component of the Microsoft Visual C 2005 SP1 library Therefore you do not need to install the runtime component of the Microsoft Visual C 2005 SP 1 library in case of using them as operating system Management of RAID System using NEC ESMPRO Manager Using NEC ESMPRO Manager Ver 5 2 or later allows you to view monitor and operate the RAID System managed by the Universal RAID Utility This feature is available on Windows system only See the instruction of NEC ESMPRO Manager about system requirements and how to use Easy Configuration You can not use the function of Easy Configuration to LSI Embedded MegaRAID Creating Logical Drive of RAID 6 Use WebBIOS when you create the Logical Drive of RAID 6 by using three Physical Devices Universal RAID Utility cannot create the Logical Drive of RAID 6 by using three Physical Devices Installing and Using Utilities 6 25 NEC PRODUCT INFO COLLECTION UTILITY The NEC Product Info Collection Utility is used to collect various system configuration and log information for maintenance or troubleshooting purpose of the server This utility can be installed from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD NOTE Supported Operating Systems of this utility is as follows m Windows Server 2003 m Windows Serve
228. f the system displays Hit any key please hit any key IMPORTANT To use the Windows HyperTerminal Emulation program on serial console setup as shown below is required lt Example On Windows XP gt 1 From the menu bar of HyperTerminal select File Properties 2 Inthe Properties dialog box select Settings ASCII Setup Remove a checkmark from Wrap lines that exceed terminal width checkbox ASCII Setup ASCII Sending C Send line ends with line feeds C Echo typed characters locally 0 Line delay milliseconds Character delay 0 milliseconds ASCII Receiving C Append line feeds to incoming line ends C Force incoming data to 7 bit ASCII Wrap lines that exceed terminal width Maintenance 7 7 Select Test and diagnostics Select End User Mode and the system diagnostics starts The diagnostics will be completed in approximately three minutes When the diagnostics is completed the screen of the display changes as shown below Diagnostics tool title Test window title TeDoLi TEst amp Diagnosis On Linux Ver001 00 020901 1 1m Test End Test result Start 10 06 58 End 10 09 58 Pass 000 03 00 TestTime 000 03 00 Test End NormalEnd 03 AbnormalEnd 00 ForceEnd 00 lt System gt 16 count NormalEnd CACHE Cache 49 count NormalEnd lt SCSI gt HDD_02 000 DK32DJ 36W 89 count NormalEnd Enter Detail Information ESC Return to Enduser Menu Guide lin
229. files and folders radio button from Advanced settings in the View tab 3 Check off the following check box in the Files and Folders from Advanced settings in the View tab and then click OK Q Hide extensions for know file type Q Hide protected operating system files Recommended When the message You have chosen to display protected operating system files is displayed click Yes 4 Make sure of the files Open lt System drive gt WINDOWS system32 drivers directory and make sure usbhub sys and usbport sys are exists in the directory If you can not found them copy the files according to the following process 1 Open lt System drive gt WINDOWS system32 dllcache directory 2 Copy usbhub sys and usbport sys from the directory noted above to lt Systemdrive gt WINDOWS system32 drivers Restart the system Refer to Application process of the Hotfix KB921411 and apply the Hotfix for Windows Server 2003 KB921411 7 Refer to Application process of Updating the System and execute Updating the System 8 Restart the system With that process is finished G 18 Installing Windows Server 2003 DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section refer to the document attached to the driver PR
230. fix for Windows x64 KB921411 or Hotfix for Windows Server 2003 KB921411 had been applied NOTE If you install Windows CD ROM that contains Service Pack 2 to your system you do not have to apply Service pack 2 again 1 Log on to the system with the account that has administrative privilege e g administrator 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of server The Autorun Menu will be displayed 3 Left click on Setup Windows and then click Update the system NOTE Right clicking on the Autorun Menu produces the same outcome 4 Follow the message of the screen to proceed the application OK dialog box will be displayed Updating the system x sp Setup is going to Updating the System v If you apply the update process click OK If you wish to cancel the update process click Cancel Cancel NOTE The following box appears during the update if you have deployed a full installation of Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition Wait until the update completes Performing Updating the System Please wait for a while gt gt Checking the OS information Updating the drivers Performing the end process of Updating the System F 16 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions 5 When the following message appears Updating the System was finished Updating the system i 9 Updating the System was finished wy The setup will apply the Service P
231. gases sulfur dioxide hydrogen sulfide nitrogen dioxide chlorine ammonia ozone etc exist Also do not set it in the environment where the air or dust includes components accelerating corrosion ex sulfur sodium chloride or conductive metals There is a risk of a fire due to corrosion and shorts of an internal printed board Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to a power source Make sure to power off the server and unplug the power cord from a power outlet before installing removing any optional internal device or connecting disconnecting any interface cable to from the server If the server is off powered but its power cord is plugged to a power source touching an internal device cable or connector may cause an electric shock or a fire resulted from a short circuit Do not use any unauthorized interface cable Use only interface cables provided by NEC and locate a proper device and connector before connecting a cable Using an authorized cable or connecting a cable to an improper destination may cause a short circuit resulting in a fire Also observe the following notes on using and connecting an interface cable Do not use any damaged cable connector a Do not step on the cable a Do not place any object on the cable m Do not use the server with loose cable connections Notes on Using Your Server 1 7 Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices A
232. gation Switch Fault Tolerance 7 Click Finish IMPORTANT Teaming an adapter with standard network adapter and optional network adapter will cause the following message appear Click OK and continue the setting One or more adapters in the team do not support true NDIS6 20 Receive Side Scaling Receive Side Scaling will be disabled for the team Disabling Receive Side Scaling will negatively impact the performance of the team 8 Click TEAM Team name from Device manager gt Network adapters to modify the team Click Settings tab and click Modify Team button 9 Refer to the following procedure to set the team member adapter priority status Set Primary Point the adapter and click Set Primary button Set Secondary Point the adapter and click Set Secondary button NOTE Adapter priority config can be confirmed by the following procedure 1 2 Click TEAM Team name from Device manager gt Network adapters Click Settings and confirm Adapters in team list 10 Click Test Switch Run test to confirm the adapter team is properly setup Confirm the result in Test results 11 Restart the system Remove Team 1 Open the Device Manager 2 Click Network adapters and open TEAM Team name properties oe o Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 D 25 Click Setting tab Click Remove Team button Click Yes to the message Conf
233. ge on the Virtual memory group box Uncheck the Automatically manage paging file size for all drives box and check Custom size 5 84 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 9 On the Paging file size for each drive box specify as follows A value larger than the recommended size shown in Total paging file size for all drives for Initial size A value larger than the Initial size for Maximum size Then click Set IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system m For more information on Recommended value see About the System Partition Size described earlier m Incase the memory is expanded re specify the paging file to suit the new memory size 10 Click OK The message to restart the system may appear according to the modified specification In such case follow the message to restart the system When the system is Windows Server 2003 Follow the procedure below to specify 1 Select Control Panel and click System The System Properties dialog box appears Select Advanced tab Click Settings on the Startu
234. hased and then click Next You will see only possible editions that have been determined by Windows based on the key you entered in step 6 Install Windows toma D Select the edition of Windows that you purchased Windows Version Windows Server 2008 Standard Full Installation Windows Server 2008 Enterprise Full Installation Windows Server 2008 Datacenter Full Installation Windows Server 2008 Standard Server Core Installation Windows Server 2008 Enterprise Server Core Installation Windows Server 2008 Datacenter Server Core Installation If you enter your product key Windows can automatically determine which edition you purchased To enter your product key click the Back button to return to the previous page I you choose not to enter your product key now make sure that you select the edition of Windows that you purchased If you select the wrong edition you will need to purchase that edition or you will need to reinstall the correct edition of Windows later and potentially lose files and information T Ihave selected the edition of Windows that I purchased 1 Collecting information 2 Installing Windows NOTE The Windows versions listed on the screen vary depending on the Windows Server 2008 DVD ROM you are using 11 Read the license terms carefully If you agree select I accept the license terms and then click Next Install Windows _u AN Please read the license terms
235. he Team this adapter with other adapters check box Click New Team Fill the name of the team in Specify a name for the team and click Next Include the adapter to the team and click Next F 24 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions 6 Select a team mode and then click Next IMPORTANT Following team types are supported m Adapter Fault Tolerance m Adaptive Load Balancing m Static Link Aggregation Switch Fault Tolerance Click Finish Click TEAM Team name from Device manager Network adapters to modify the team Click Settings tab and click Modify Team button 9 Refer to the following procedure to set the team member adapter priority status Set Primary Point the adapter and click Set Primary button Set Secondary Point the adapter and click Set Secondary button NOTE Adapter priority config can be confirmed by the following procedure 1 Click TEAM Team name from Device manager gt Network adapters 2 Click Settings and confirm Adapters in team list 10 Click Test Switch Run test to confirm the adapter team is properly setup Confirm the result in Test results 11 Restart the system Remove Team 1 Open the Device Manager Click Network adapters and open TEAM Team name properties Click Setting tab Click Remove Team button Click Yes to the message Sr ee Confirm TEAM Team name adapter in
236. he Operating System with Express Setup Installing the Windows Server 2008 Express Setup proceeds the setup by selecting or inputting several parameters on the wizard You can also save the parameters to a floppy disk as a parameters file 1 Turn the power of peripheral device on and then turn on the server 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server 3 Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server The system will boot from the DVD and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts Select Os installation default from the Boot selection menu If you do not hit any key Os installation is selected automatically The Top menu will appear Tool menu Redirection mode Automatic select at 18 seconds 4 Select English from the Select Language click OK 9 select anguege x EXPRESSBUILDER THAY SH BERR TEAL Select a language to use for the EXPRESSBUILDER c BAB English Francais Italiano Deutsch e Espanol Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 35 5 When the Software Licence Agreement screen of Windows PE appears click Yes A he Confirm the following End User License Agreement To use this software agree this license END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR MICROSOFT WINDOWS PREINSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT IMPORTANT RE
237. he drivers necessary for NEC Express5800 Series 1 Log on to the system using an administrator account 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive 3 Hereinafter the setup process is depending on the content selected at Installing Windows Server 2008 follow each of the instructions Ifyou have selected a full installation If the menu is displayed click Setup Windows and click Update the system NOTE Right clicking on the Menu produces the same outcome Ifyou have selected a Server Core installation 1 Execute the following command line from command prompt to specify the optical disk drive e g D drive ed d d 015 win winnt bin oschk C Users administrator gt cd d D 015 win winnt bin oschk 2 Type following command line and press Enter oschk bat D 015 win winnt bin oschk gt oschk bat 4 The following box appears Updating the system x Setup is going to Updating the System If you apply the update process dick OK n If you wish to cancel the update process dick Cancel This process disables the Scalable Networking Pack SNP function If you use the SNP function enable it after the reboot Lo ae E 22 Installing Windows Server 2008 5 Read the message and then click OK The update starts NOTE The following box appears during the update if you have deployed a full installation of Windows Server 2008 Wai
238. he dump file size is to be written to a separate disk If the disk does not have enough free space to enable the dump file size to be written then after installing the system using the Size required for installation Paging file size install an additional new disk F 4 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions INSTALLING Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Preparations for Installation NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition CD ROM Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Service Pack 2 CD ROM User s Guide Getting Started Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER Creating Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER Before installing create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER NOTE If you have already Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER for NEC Express5800 Server which you are going to install Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions you do not need to create it again You can create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two procedures Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions F 5 Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER If you have only NEC Express5800 Server to create Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER use this procedure If Windows Server 2003 or Windows can be
239. he remote power on function is used cycle the power once to load the OS and turn off the power again in the normal way 8 44 Troubleshooting This page is intentionally left blank Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server This chapter describes internal optional devices available for the server procedures for install or removing such optional devices and notes on using them IMPORTANT m Optional devices described in this chapter may be installed or removed by any user However NEC does not assume any liability for damage to optional devices or the server or malfunctions of the server resulted from installation by the user NEC recommends you ask your service representative for installing or removing any optional devices m Use the options and cables approved by NEC You will be charged by any repair of a malfunction fault or defect occurring in a server in which one or more component not approved by NEC are used m Always update the system if the hardware configuration is changed See Chapter 5 for details 9 2 Upgrading Your Server SAFETY NOTES Observe the following notes to install or remove optional devices safely and properly A WARNING Y Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow CK A these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages S 1 3 to 1 8 for details i a Do not disassemble repair or alter the server Do
240. his section describes how to use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD that comes with your server and to install the utilities stored on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 6 2 Installing and Using Utilities NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER helps you install the Operating system the Management software or use the maintenance utilities When you insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive and reboot the system the following menu appears Boot selection Redirection mode Automatic select at 18 seconds Installing and Using Utilities 6 3 m OS installation If you select this item the Top menu appears NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Mi Step I menu p Welcome to the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER writes as EXPRESSBUILDER at the following EXPRESSBUILDER helps you to install the Operating system Check the radio button and click Next If you want to install an Operating System or to build a RAID sub system select Perform the Express setup If you want to stop the operation of EXPRESSBUILDER select Exit EXPRESSBUILDER Perform the Express setup Create the OEM Disk for Windows Save or restore the configuration data of the RAID controller C Load the optional driver into the EXPRESSBUILDER Exit EXPRESSBUILDER Version 5 XX XXX XX IMPORTANT This tool is Configuration Tool that built on Windows PE 3 0 technology Pay attention to the automatic reboot that occurs after 72 ho
241. i Salha U U I a U o al fo ep U ean err Y 5 V Y Jel a IZ Sna 11 f 1 L U al A s nOi 5 10 Dho E l 5 A SS 9 8 7 6 Power supply DIMM slots Optical disk drive 5 25 inch device bay An optical disk drive is factory installed in bottom bay PCI guide rail Hard disk drive cage Hard disk drive optional Mother board Processor cooling fan PCI board retention spring Rear cooling fan khOND CSOANOW _ 2 10 General Description Mother Board 19 3 a 3 a m a Bi LI 6 0 6 2 6 4 1 DIMM sockets 12 USB connector for flash memory card The last digit indicates connector number 13 USB connector for front USB port 2 Power connector 14 USB connector for device bay 3 CPU socket 15 LED SW connector 4 FAN1 connector for CPU cooling fan 16 COM B connector for N8117 01A 5 RAID LED cable connector 17 PCI board slots 6 Serial ATA connectors 0 to 5 17 1 PCI EXPRESS x16 The last digit indicates connector number 17 2 PCI EXPRESS x4 x8 connector 7 Lithium battery 17 3 PCI EXPRESS x2 x4 connector 8 Buzzer 17 4 PCI 32bit 33 MHz 9 CMOS configuration jumper switch 18 DUMP switch 10 RAID configuration jumper switch 19 Connectors for external
242. ick Remove Uninstallation starts automatically When InstallShield Wizard Completed appears click Finish Restart the system Installing Windows Server 2008 E 25 Network Driver Specify the details of network driver Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically but the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified manually 1 Open the Device Manager 2 Double click Network Adapter Name in the list 3 Click the Link Speed and specify the Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Click OK Restart the system Also add or delete any protocols and services if necessary You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from Network and Dial up Connection NOTE We recommend you to add Network Monitor at Adding Services Network Monitor can monitor the frame or the packet that the computer installing Network Monitor sends or receives This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble For information on how to install the tool see the Setting for Solving Problems described later in this chapter Re install the Network Driver The network driver will be installed automatically Optional Network Board Driver N8104 112 119 120 121 125A 126 The following optional network boards are available for the N8104 112 119 120 121 125A 126 To use the N8104 125A Adapter see Usi
243. ile Creator NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Load Select OS Enter RAID Specify Enter basic Step parameters settings medium parameters partition Enter the basic parameters Enter gt Jg gt protocol The computer name is less than 15 characters Do not use the same name as another computer name domain name or workgroup name The weer name and the organization s name are less than 50 characters The Administrator password is more than 6 characters and the password contains characters from three of the four categories A Z a z 0 9 Non alphanumeric characters User information Computer name I necessary User name Administrator password necessary Confirm password I necessary Default Windows Server 2003 W Parameter File Creator NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Load Select OS Enter RAID Specify Enter basic Step prnmits settingi mediurg parameters partition x Enter the basically parameters gt I Enter network gt protocdl The computer name is less than 15 characters Do not set the same name as other computer name domain name or workgroup name The user name and the organization s name are less than 50 characters p User information Coniptter nata E User name J enacessary Organization s name L y Administrator password Confirm password A f Client licence Der server mods 5 Der user or per device m
244. ime server NTP server If the system clock is remarkably delayed or advanced as the passage of time in spite of adjustment contact your service representative for maintenance Processor Settings Configuring Your Server 4 11 Option Parameter Description Your Setting CPU Speed Displays clock speed for the processor View only Processor CPUID Numeral xxxx Displays the processor ID View only Processor L2 Cache Displays L2 cache size for processor Processor L3 Cache Displays L3 cache size for processor Active Processor Cores ALL Specifies the number of valid cores 1 in the processor 2 Execute Disable Bit Enabled Enables or disables the Execute Disabled Disable Bit feature Displayed only when the CPU supports Execute Disable Bit Intel SpeedStep R Enabled Enables or disables the Intel R Technology Disabled SpeedStep feature Fixed to Disabled if the processor does not support this feature Turbo Boost Enabled Enables or disables the Intel R Technology Disabled Turbo Boost Technology Displayed only when the CPU supports this feature C1 Enhanced Mode Enabled Enables or disables the C1 Disabled Enhanced Mode Processor C3 Report Disabled Specifies the ACPI state to which ACPI C2 the C3 state of the processor is ACPI C3 mapped Virtualization Enabled Enables or disables the Intel R Technology Disabled virtualization techn
245. indows Activate Windows by phone Just four steps and you re done SEAE Select your location X Step2 Calla number below to speak with a customer service representative Toll free number Toll number Step3 Provide the customer o n ji ing installation ID 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 bythe c mer service Step 4 Type the confirmation ID that the customer service representative gave you A B c D E F G Change Product key Remind Me Later SETTING FOR SOLVING PROBLEMS Set for collecting memory dump using the procedure described in Chapter 5 Appendix H Using a Client Computer Which Has a CD Drive The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER disk is DVD so that a client computer which you want to use for managing the server needs a DVD drive If you want to install the management software of EXPRESSBUILDER to the client without the DVD drive make a CD R from EXPRESSBUILDER DVD according to the following steps NOTE This procedure can copy only one CD at the purpose of installing the management software to the client 1 Insert the EXPRESSBUILDER DVD to the computer which has a DVD drive If Autorun menu appears close the menu Copy the below files of EXPRESSBUILDER to a hard disk by using Explorer root folder copy version xml 015 ar_menu copy this sub folder doc copy this sub folder win copy this sub folder 4 Delete the ar_menu autorun_menu xml on the hard disk a
246. indows Server 2003 x64 Edition or Windows Server 2003 Q During the application of the ChipSet driver by Updating the System process the driver for the USB device may be deleted Follow the process detailed below 1 Start the Recovery console 2 Copy lt Systemdrive gt system32 dIlcache pci sys to under lt Systemdrive gt system32 drivers 3 Exit the Recovery console and restart the system 4 Refer to Recovery process and follow to the process detailed to apply Hotfix for Windows x64 KB921411 or Hotfix for Windows Server 2003 KB921411 and Updating the System For Recovery process see Appendix F or Appendix G for details During installation the following message is registered in the DMI Event Log PCI Express Correctable This message might be registered in the log during installation but there is no problem on operation Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Troubleshooting 8 27 When the server is not booted from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD check the following Q Did you set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the server Ifyou do not set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER during POST and restart the server an error message will appear or the OS will boot Q Is BIOS configuration correct The boot device order may be specified with the BIOS SETUP utility of the server Use the BIOS Setup utility to change the boot device order to boot the system from the optical
247. ing the Operating System with Express Setup Supported Mass Storage Controllers The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system supports the following mass storage controllers for installation m Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup N8103 109 RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO 1 5 6 N8103 116A RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO0 1 N8103 117A RAID Controller 128 MB RAID0 1 5 6 Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID m Other controllers N8103 75 SCSI Controller N8103 104A SAS Controller N8103 107 SCSI Controller Option About the Hardware Components When you install the Windows Server 2008 R2 Express Setup requires several preparations if this computer uses the following hardware components Installing on the Mirrored Volume When re installing the OS to a hard disk drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk only the simple dynamic volume is available for installation If you want to install the OS on a volume that is mirrored using Disk Management invalidate the mirroring and reset to the basic disk before the installation and validate the mirroring again after the installation You can create invalidate or delete the mirror volume by using Disk Management in Computer Management Mounting MO Device Do not mount an MO device on this computer during the Windows installation About Removable Media Do not set removable media such as DAT and
248. installation procedure described in the section Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver m Incase of using N8104 123A Please refer to the installation manual provided with the board Installation of the Optional Network Board Driver Start Device Manager 2 Click Network adapters and double click Network Adapter Name Network Adapter Name Properties appears NOTE Intel R PRO 1000 is the name of On Board adapter All other names show the Optional Network Board 3 Click Driver tab and click Update Driver Hardware Update Wizard appears 4 Select the Install from a list or specific location Advanced radio button and click Next 5 Select the Search for the best driver in these locations radio button and uncheck the Search removable media floppy CD ROM check box 6 Check the Include this location in the search check box and when using N8104 111 specify 015 win winnt w2k3amd r148 pro100 winx64 ndis5x Then click Next When using N8104 112 119 120 121 125A 126 specify 015 win winnt w2k3amd r148 pro1000 winx64 ndis5x Then click Next 7 Click Finish 8 Restart the system Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions F 23 Setup Team Adapter Fault Tolerance AFT is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the group when
249. installing Operating System Select Install the Windows 32bit editions from the menu click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top menu Load Select OS Enter RAID Step parameters l gt e gt Logical Drive and finishes the setup elect Install other Operating System Version 5 XX KXX XX XXX 9 Enter the setting of a logical drive Enter RAID settings steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next eo EXPRESSBUILDER Step eS pane gt fh eect gt ES gt hi Set a parameter to create a logical drive If you are not using a RAID controller select Skip the logical drive creation and press the Next button If you want to use the existing logical drive select Skip the logical drive creation and press the Next button Skip the logical drive creation Create a logical drive using the settings that follow Ufa logical drive already exists all the data stored on the logical drive will be deleted RAID controller MegaRAID SAS PCI Express TM ROMB The mmber of the total physical devices 1 Number of physical devices used to create the logical drive z RAID level RADo x The mmber of the physical devices specified as the hot spare oz The mmber of the free physical devices o Back Next Top Default Version 5 XX KXX XX m You can use only the physical devices that have same model number to configure
250. intenance Tools The Maintenance Tools is used for maintenance and fault analysis of the server This tool is usually used by the service representative System Diagnostic Utility The system diagnostic utility contained in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is useful to detect hardware failures See Chapter 7 for details General Description 2 15 USING YOUR SERVER This section describes basic operations of your server including how to use devices such as the floppy disk drive and the optical disk drive See Appendix B for notes on using the floppy disk CD ROM and accessories including the keyboard and the mouse POWER SLEEP Switch Use the POWER SLEEP switch to turn on off the server Power On Press the POWER SLEEP switch on the front of the server The POWER SLEEP lamp lights in green POWER SLEEP switch Jm POWER SLEEP lamp IMPORTANT m Ifthe power cord is connected to a power control device such as a UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply make sure that the power control device is powered m Do not turn off the server until characters appear on the screen 2 16 General Description POST POST Power On Self Test is the self diagnostic program stored in the system memory When you power on the server the system automatically rans POST to check the mother board ECC memory module CPU module keyboard and mouse POST also displays messages of the BIOS Setup utility such as the start up mess
251. ions Remove Options appears 4 In Remove Options click Remove Intel R Network Connections Remove Software appears 5 Select Yes The uninstallation starts automatically 6 When InstallShield Wizard Completed appears Click Finish Restart the system Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 49 For a server running a Server Core installation 1 Note down the current settings e g IP addresses of the standard and optional adapters teamed for network redundancy before uninstalling LAN driver Configure the settings after reinstalling the LAN driver At a command prompt run dxsetup exe in your removable medium containing the Driver Set Windows Server 2008 64 bit x64 Editions lt drive letter gt 015 win winnt ws2008x64 r1 48 apps prosetdx vistax64 dxsetup exe Windows Server 2008 32 bit x86 Editions lt drive letter gt 015 win winnt ws2008 r148 apps prosetdx vista32 dxsetup exe In Intel R Network Connections InstallShield Wizard click Next Select Remove and click Next Click Remove Uninstallation starts automatically When InstallShield Wizard Completed appears click Finish Restart the system 5 50 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Network Driver Specify the details of network driver Two standard network drivers that are mounted will be installed automatically but the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified
252. ions and parameters as well as the factory set for each menu 4 10 Configuring Your Server Main Option Parameter Description Your Setting System Time HH MM SS Set the system time System Date MM DDIYYYY Set the system date Hard Disk Pre Delay Disabled When accessing the IDE device 3 seconds for the first time during POST 6 seconds the system waits for the 9 seconds specified time until the device 12 seconds becomes ready 15 seconds 21 seconds 30 seconds SATA Port 0 SATA Port 1 SATA Port 2 SATA Port 3 SATA Port 4 SATA Port 5 Shows the information on the device connected to each channel on the submenu The settings of some items may be changed However leave the items as they are at the shipment Processor Settings Shows the processor settings submenu Language English US Fran ais Deutsch Espa ol Italiano Select which language BIOS displays Factory set IMPORTANT Check and adjust the system clock before the operation if any of the following conditions is applicable m After carriage of device m After storage of device m After the device is entered into the pause state under the environmental condition enduring device operation temperature 10 C 35 C humidity 20 80 Check the system clock at the rough rate of once per month When the system clock is installed in a system requiring high time precision it is recommended to use a t
253. irm TEAM Team name adapter in not existing in Network adapters tree and reboot the system D 26 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 Setting WOL Refer to the following procedure to enable WOL 1 2 Start Device Manager Point to Network adapters and double click Intel R 82547L Gigabit Network Connection to open the adapter Properties Click Power Management tab and change setting in Wake On LAN according to the following list Setting item Change setting Wake On Magic Packet ON Wake on Magic Packet from power off state ON Wake on Link OFF Wake on Pattern Match OFF NOTES m Power Saver Options setting is not necessary to change m Above setting will be maintained until manually resetting are executed IMPORTANT The parameters of Wake On LAN will not exist if the network ports are not available for WOL 4 Click OK 5 Restart the system Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 D 27 Graphics Accelerator Driver If you use standard graphics accelerator drivers update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system Standard graphics accelerator drivers will be installed automatically NOTE lt Windows Server 2008 gt The graphics accelerator driver is supported only on a server running a full installation Use VGA on a server running a Server Core installation Observe the following procedure when you want to r
254. isk drive PCI BEV IBA GE Slot xxxx Onboard LAN Other indication Optional PCI board 1 When BIOS detects a bootable device it displays the information on the device in the relevant indication To boot the server from a desired device the device must be registered as a boot device Up to eight boot devices can be registered 2 Pressing X after selecting a device allows the selected device to be registered as a boot device or deleted from the registration With eight boot devices being registered any other device cannot be registered as a boot device even if you press X To register a device as a boot device newly first delete the registration of a device registered as a boot device but not booted any more You can change the boot priority first to eighth of each device by using 7 and or To change the priority of a device move the cursor to the device by using the f or and press or 4 22 Configuring Your Server Exit The options on the menu are described below Exit Saving Changes Exit after writing all modified BIOS SETUP item values to CMOS Exit Discarding Changes Exit leaving CMOS unmodified User is prompted if any of the setup fields were modified Load Setup Defaults Load default values for all BIOS SETUP items Discard Changes Read the previous values of the all BIOS SETUP items from CMOS Save Changes Write all BIOS SETUP item values to CMOS Configuring Your S
255. isk for Mass storage device and Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver of Parameter File Creator in Chapter 6 m Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup N8103 109 RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO 1 5 6 N8103 116A RAID Controller 128 MB RAID0 1 N8103 117A RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO0 1 5 6 Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID m Other controllers N8103 75 SCSI Controller N8103 95 SCSI Controller N8103 104A SAS Controller N8103 107 SCSI Controller Option NOTES m The driver of option card mentioned above is stored in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD m Ifyou use the board not mentioned above the ExpressSetup will fail Refer to the instructions attached to the board Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 57 About the Hardware Components When you install the Windows Server 2003 Express Setup requires several preparations if this computer uses the following hardware components Installing on the Mirrored Volume If you want to install the Windows Server 2003 on the volume that is mirrored using Disk Management invalidate the mirroring and set back to the basic disk before the installation and validate the mirroring again after the installation You can create invalidate or delete the mirror volume by using Disk Management in Computer Management Mounting MO Device Do not mount an MO device on this computer d
256. ists on the hard disk drive this step is unnecessary The Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions setup screen will appear If the screen is not displayed Enter was not pressed properly Begin after turning on the system power again 4 Ifthe RAID Controller is used press F6 in a few seconds when the window is in either of the following states Setup is inspecting your computer s hardware configuration or Press F6 if you need to install a third party SCSI or RAID driver is displayed Ascreen with a solid blue background is displayed IMPORTANT m Ifthe RAID Controller is not used you do not need to press F6 m There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed 5 The following message is displayed Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your system or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter Currently Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices OU Ifthe RAID Controller is used press S 0 Ifthe RAID Controller is not used go to Step 8 F 8 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions 6 The following message is displayed Please insert the disk labeled manufacturer supplied hardware support disk into Drive A Press ENTER when ready Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and press Enter A list of mass storage devices is dis
257. isual C 2005 SP1 Redistributable Package x86 Apply OEM Disk for mass storage device Back Next Top Default Version 5 xx xxx xx xxx Save the parameters Save parameters steps are displayed NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Enter Enter Select Win Select Save Start Step network domaidd dows cfi apiet parimet Ewes protocol account ponents tions setup If youwant to save the parameters set the free formatted floppy disk Select Save parameters enter the file path of the parameters file into the text box and click Next If not select Do not save parameters b Select Do not save parameters when this computer does not connect a floppy disk drive Do not save parameters C Save parameters Browse Back Next Top Version 5 XX KXX XX If you want to save the parameters set the free formatted floppy disk Select Save parameters enter the file path of the parameters files into the text box and click Next If not select Do not save parameters Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 69 17 The Express Setup will start when you click Perform in Start Express setup step NEC Enter Enter Select Win Select Save Start Step network domaid dows c m applica parfinets Express protocol account ponents tions setup Now EXPRESSBUILDER gathered all of the parameters for the Express setup The Express setup will start when Perform button is clicked
258. itecture of the server x86 architecture and specifications of supported operating systems Memory hole The x86 architecture IA 32 adopts Memory Mapped I O method which reserves the fixed memory area memory hole for controlling various I O devices e g onboard device and PCI devices The memory hole reserves 4GB or less physical memory area as reserved memory area regardless of mounted memory capacity The OS cannot access this reserved area thus the available memory capacity may be less than the actual mounted memory capacity due to the memory hole m Memory Reclaim feature The server provides Memory Reclaim feature for complementation of memory hole The Memory Reclaim feature remaps physical memory addresses in the memory hole on hardware chipset By remapping the whole capacity of mounted memory can be used Note however the remap memory area may not be available depending on the memory capacity supported by OS Accordingly the available memory capacity depends on the supported OS Memory hole Memory Reclaim feature with physical 4GB memory installed with physical 4GB memory installed Memory capacity unavailable for OS Approx 700MB Physical lemory capacity memory unavailable for Physical 4GB OS Approx memory Remaps physical 700MB 4GB memory in the memory hole on hardware The OS can use whole physical memory mounted Memory capacity
259. itions with ServicePack 2 5900MB Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Service Pack 2 CD ROM Paging File Size Recommended Mounted Memory Size 1 5 Dump file Size Mounted Memory Size 1MB Application Size Required Size IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system m Regardless of the size of the mounted memory or the Write debugging information type of memory dump the maximum size of the dump file is The size of the mounted memory 1MB m If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs For example if the mounted memory size is 1G 1 024MB the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as follows 4 100MB 1 024MB 1 5 1 024MB 1MB Application Size 6 661MB Application Size Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk 1 2 Set the Size required for installation Paging file size See Chapter 5 and set that debugging information equivalent to t
260. kgroup WORKGROUP EER Windows activation Mice aA 2 days until automatic activation Activate Windows now Windows Update Product ID XXXXX XXX XXXXXXX XXX TA Windows Activation o D 30 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 4 Activate Windows A windows Activation a The Windows activation is complete Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 D 31 For a server running a Server Core installation 1 At the command prompt type slmgr dli and press Enter inistrator C Windows system32 cmd exe C Users Administrator gt slmgr dli IMPORTANT If the following message appears Windows has already been activated on your system Click X to exit Windows Script Host x Name Windows Server R ServerStandardCore edition Description Windows Operating System Windows Server R OEM_SLP channel Partial Product Key xxxxx License Status Licensed 2 Type slmgr ipk lt PID gt and press Enter PID is your product key on the COA label cs Administrator C Windows system32 cmd exe C Users Administrator gt slmgr ipk RARKR RRRAR RRARRKR RRARKRAR RARRAL 3 Type slmgr dti to obtain an installation ID for Windows activation and press Enter cs Administrator C Windows system32 cmd exe C Users Administrator gt slmgr dti 4 See systemroot system32 sppui phone inf for the phone number of the Microsoft customer service D 32 Installing
261. l RAID Utility together with LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility is as follows Terms LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility and Universal RAID Utility are different in term When you use Universal RAID Utility together with LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility please convert terms by the following list Term of LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility Term of Universal RAID Utility Adapter RAID Controller Virtual Disk Logical Drive Array Disk Array Physical Drive Physical Device Number and ID The number to manage each component of disk array of Universal RAID Utility is different to LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility Adapter and RAID Controller LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility manages Adapter by a number beginning with 0 You can see a number of Adapter where Sel Adapter in Objects menu Universal RAID Utility manages RAID Controller by a number beginning with 1 You can see a number of RAID Controller where Number in the property of RAID Controller on RAID Viewer Also you can see the number of Adapter managed by LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility where ID in the property of RAID Controller by Universal RAID Utility Logical Drive LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility manages Logical Drive by a number beginning with 0 You can see a number of Logical Drive where Logical Drives in Objects menu Universal RAID Utility manages Logical Drive by a number beginning
262. le to start ROM DOS startup FD Creates a support disk for starting the ROM DOS system m Test and diagnostics Execute various tests on the server system to check if the server functions are normal and if the connection between the server and additional board is normal After the Test and diagnostics is executed a system check program assigned to each model starts See Chapter 7 for details m System Management The parameters of BMC Baseboard Management Controller are set for remote control and alert This function is not supported in this server 8 42 Troubleshooting RESETTING THE SERVER m If the server halts before starting the OS press and hold Ctrl and Alt and press Delete This restarts the server m Pressing the RESET switch on the front panel reboots the server IMPORTANT Resetting the server clears the DIMM memory and the data in process To reset the server when it is not frozen make sure that no processing is in progress Troubleshooting 8 43 FORCED SHUTDOWN Use this function when an OS command does not shutdown the server the POWER SLEEP switch does not turn off the server or RESET button does not work Press and hold the POWER SLEEP switch on the server for at least four seconds The power is forcibly turned off To turn on the power back again wait approximately 10 seconds after turning off the power Press here for at least 4 seconds Uf IMPORTANT If t
263. lectric shock A A Keep animals away from the server S Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock A S Do not leave the CD tray open If dust gets on the lens of optical disk drive the drive may have problems ae Disconnect the power plug from the outlet when a thunderstorm is approaching reading your disks Also the CD tray may be broken by contacting any objects l S Do not place any object on top of the server The server may fall and cause property damage to the surroundings Notes on Using Your Server 1 9 FOR PROPER OPERATION Observe the following notes for successful operation of the server Use of the server ignoring the notes will cause malfunctions or failures of the server Install the server in a place that meets requirements for successful operation For details see Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server If the power cord supplied with your system is not compatible with the AC wall outlet in your region contact your service representative to obtain a suitable power cord Make sure to power off the server before connecting or disconnecting cables between the server and peripheral devices Verify that the access lamp on the server is unlit before turning off the server or ejecting the floppy disk When plugging the power cord to the system you may experience 10 seconds delay from the time you press the POWER SLEEP switch on the front panel This is normal system operatio
264. leshooting Collecting Event Log This section describes on how to collect the log of various events that occurred on the server 3 4 5 IMPORTANT If STOP error system error or stall occurred follow the procedure below after restarting the system Click Management Tool Event Viewer from the Control Panel Select the type of the log to collect On Application Log the events related to the running application is archived On Security Log the events related to the security is archived On System Log the events occurred at the item which configures Windows system is archived Click Save as in the Run menu Input the file name of archived log in the File Name box Select the type of the log file you want to save in the File Type list box and click OK For more information refer to Windows Online Help Collect Configuration Information This section describes on how to collect the information on hardware configuration and inside specification In order to collect information Diagnostic Program is used 2 SN eR a IMPORTANT If STOP error system error or stall occurred follow the procedure below after restarting the system Point to Settings in Start menu and click Control Panel The Control Panel dialog box appears Double click Management Tool and double click Computer Management The Computer Management dialog box appears Click System Tool System
265. licked Back Top Perform Version 5 XX KXX XX XXX 18 Remove NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from the optical disk drive according to the message If you proceed the setup by using setup parameter file remove the floppy disk from the floppy disk drive 19 Insert Windows Server 2008 R2 DVD ROM into the optical disk drive NOTE Windows Server 2008 R2 and selected applications will be installed automatically and reboots several times 5 20 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 20 Agree Software License Agreement screen appears Full Installation only Read the license terms carefully If you agree select I accept the license terms and then click Next CO os Set Up Windows A an MICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS MICROSOFT WINDOWS SERVER 2008 R2 STANDARD These license terms are an agreement between Microsoft Corporation or based on where you live one of its affiliates and you Please read them They apply to the software named above which includes the media on which you received it if any The terms also apply to any Microsoft updates supplements Internet based services and sunnort services accept the tense tems 21 When the following message appears press Ctrl Alt Del Press CTRL ALT DELETE to log on 22 Log onto the system lt Full Installation gt When the following screen appears enter your password into Password and click Administrator F m 1
266. loads For installation procedure and detailed explanations on NEC ESMPRO refer to the online document in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD 6 22 Installing and Using Utilities NEC ExpressUpdate Agent The NEC ExpressUpdate Agent enables you to control the version of the firmware and software that is installed on the server Using the NEC ESMPRO Manager you can download update packages automatically and install them simply without terminating the system Refer to Installation Manual in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for more information about an installation and functions of the NEC ExpressUpdate A gent IMPORTANT To get the information of the update package which does not support NEC ExpressUpdate refer to the web site below http www nec com global prod express index html Installing and Using Utilities 6 23 Universal RAID Utility Universal RAID Utility is an application to manage or monitor the following RAID Controllers m LSI Embedded MegaRAID N8103 109 RAID Controller 128 MB RAID0 1 5 6 N8103 116A RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO 1 m N8103 117A RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO 1 5 6 Before attempting to operate Universal RAID Utility read the Universal RAID Utility Ver2 1 User s Guide contained in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD The manual explains the installation procedure and notes on operating Universal RAID Utility Setup with Express Setup You can install Universal RAID Utility with Express Setup contained
267. logical drive m Ifthe process is not finished normally the driver may not be stored in the EXPRESSBUILDER Refer to Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER described earlier in this chapter Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 65 10 Specify the installing medium and the Windows system partition Specify medium Partition steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Select OS Enter RAID Specify i medium partition 11000 me 6 349MB 1 907 726MB 1GB 1 024MB Next Top Default IMPORTANT If you install Windows Server 2003 R2 and Service Pack apply Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 after Express Setup completion and then install Service Pack by Updating the system About partition size Specify the partition size larger than required minimum size for OS installation Do not specify larger partition size than the capacity of connected hard disk drive You can not specify a logical drive larger than 2 097 144MB at RAID system If you select Create a new partition at Windows system drive settings the contents of the hard disk will be all deleted If Use existing partitions is selected EXPRESSBUILDER installs the Operating System to the 1st partition 1st partition is deleted The data in the other partition is kept if the system has two or m
268. logon notification subscriber lt GPClient gt failed a notification event These events do not affect system operation Ignore these messages Troubleshooting 8 21 The following system event is logged when Windows Server 2008 is installed Event ID Source Description 10 VDS Dynamic Provider The provider failed while storing notifications from the driver The Virtual Disk Service should be restarted hr 80042505 Go to the Microsoft website http support microsoft com kb 948275 en us The following application events are logged when Windows Server 2008 is installed Event ID Source Level Description Event ID Source Level Description 1021 Microsoft Windows Security Licensing SLC Warning SLUINotify service has failed to start hr 0x80070424 1534 Microsoft Windows User Profiles Service Warning Profile notification of event Create for component 56EA1054 1959 467f BE3B A2A787C4B6EA failed error code is 2147023591 These events do not affect system operation Ignore these messages There are some cases that an event log is registered as follows when you install Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Source Category Event ID Description DCOM Error 10016 The application specific permission settings do not grant Local Activation permission for the COM server application with CLSID 555F3418 D99E 4E51 800A 6E89CFD8B1D7 to the user NT AUTHORITY LOCAL SERVICE SID S
269. m Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 75 95 107 If you use the SCSI Controller N8103 75 95 107 update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system The SCSI Controller driver will be installed automatically Installing SAS Controller Driver N8103 104A If you use the SAS Controller N8103 104A update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system The SAS Controller driver will be installed automatically Installing Windows Server 2003 G 23 About Windows Activation Windows Server 2003 must be activated before you can use Windows Server 2003 Windows activation process is as follows 1 NOTE When you use Windows Server 2003 R2 Backup CD ROM activation process is not needed Click Run on Start menu Type as follows in the Open box and click OK oobe msoobe a Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it for you R Activate Windows Let s activate Windows This copy of Windows mu c d with Microsoft before you can continue using it A over the Internetis quick a You don t need to give your name or other personal information when you activate Windows er the Internet now stomer service representative to a To continue click Next G 24 Installing Windows Server 2003 The following screen is displayed 3 Process Windows activation according to the following message Activate W
270. m Search C A Control Panel Home E e iai Pene o Device Manager Windows edition Remote settings Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard 3 Advanced system settings Copyright 2009 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved System Processor Intel R Xeon R CPU E5506 2 13GHz 2 13GHz Installed memory RAM 4 00 GB System type 64 bit Operating System Pen and Touch No Pen or Touch Input is available for this Display Computer name domain and workgroup settings Computer name WIN ROG6GHQKR 5EQ4 Full computer name WIN RO6HOQKR5EQ4 Computer description Workgroup WORKGROUP Windows activation Windows is activated I for Product ID XXXXX XXX XXXXXXX XXXXX genuine See also Mic rosoft Action Center Learn more online Windows Update Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 D 29 2 In the following screen click Change product key Control Panel Home Windows edition Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard 8 Device Manager Copyright 2009 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Remote settings Advanced system settings System Processor Intel R Xeon R CPU E5506 2 13GHz 2 13GHz Installed memory RAM 4 00 GB System type 64 bit Operating System Pen and Touch No Pen or Touch Input is available for this Display Computer name domain and workgroup settings Computer name WIN ROGHQKR5EQ4 Change settings Full computer name WIN ROSHQKR5EQ4 Computer description Wor
271. m applic Da pardinet rs gt Expites protocol account ponents tions setup Select the installing Windows components Application Server I Intemet Information Services IIS Detail settings p Management and Monitoring Tools Simple Network Management Protocol Detail settings I Network Monitor Tools Networking Services Other Network File and Print Services I Simple TCP IP Services IT File Services for Macintosh nfiguration Protocol DHCP I Print Services for Macintosh I Dynamic Host I Domain Name System DNS IT Print Services for Unix I Windows Intemet Name Services WINS Back Next Top Default _ ae Version 5 XX XXX XX 5 68 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 15 16 Select the installing applications Select applications steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Enter Enter Select Win Select Save Start Step network domai dows cf applied um AET f Exitod protocol account ponents tions setup Select an application to be installed The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP setting is required to install the NEC ESMPRO Agent In case you are using a disk driver which is not included in EXPRESSBUILDER select Apply OEM Disk for mass storage device Selected applications List of applications NEC ESMPRO Agent Universal RAID Utility Microsoft V
272. m In this case the Windows Setup screen may not be displayed Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 according to the following procedures m You can install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 after the application of System update Be sure to install Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 In this case note that the Windows Setup screen is not displayed 17 Insert Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 CD ROM into the optical disk drive Confirm the parameters and click OK 18 When the installation has completed remove Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 CD ROM from the optical disk drive and restart the system 19 When the installation has completed be sure to execute the tasks described in Driver Installation and Advanced Settings and Updating the System of manual G 12 Installing Windows Server 2003 Procedure for License Authentication Product Key used in the procedure for license authentication should be matched with the COA label in which the product key contained in Windows Server 2003 is written NOTES m Execute the activation within 30 days System may be locked after 30 days is passed m COA label may be attached to your server Updating the System Applying Service Pack Update the system in the situation below m CPU is expanded expanded to single processor to multi processor Modified system configuration m Recovered the system using recovery pr
273. manually 1 Open the Device Manager 2 Double click Network Adapter Name in the list 3 Click the Link Speed and specify the Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Click OK Restart the system Also add or delete any protocols and services if necessary You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from Network and Dial up Connection NOTE We recommend you to add Network Monitor at Adding Services Network Monitor can monitor the frame or the packet that the computer installing Network Monitor sends or receives This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble For information on how to install the tool see the Setting for Solving Problems described later in this chapter Optional Network Board Driver N8104 112 119 120 121 125A 126 The following optional network boards are available for the N8104 112 119 120 121 125A 126 To use the N8104 125A Adapter see Using N8104 125A Adapter after System Update in Pages 5 48 to 5 49 The drivers for other network boards are automatically installed by Windows Plug and Play You do not need to install them manually Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 51 Setup Team Adapter Fault Tolerance AFT is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter i
274. mote battery control cable to the battery pack No dot on the top 7 Attach the battery unit to the server using the screw removed in step 4 Upgrading Your Server 9 35 Insert the RAID controller board into the slot on the motherboard Aw 9 Reattach the parts of the server removed at the start Removing the battery Remove the battery unit by reversing the above procedure 9 36 Upgrading Your Server PCI Board The server is equipped with five slots for installing PCI boards IMPORTANT m Any PCI board is easily affected by static electricity Make sure to wear the wrist strap an arm belt or anti static glove and discharge static electricity from your body before handling the PCI board Do not make bare hands contact with terminals and components on the PCI board In addition do not put the PCI board on a non anti static desk directly See Static Precautions in this chapter for details of the static electricity m The long sized board full length board can be installed only to the PCI slots 4 Care must be taken to avoid damage to the components on the mother board when installing the long sized board PCI slot 1 PCI EXPRESS x16 PCI slot 2 PCI
275. n When you have just turned off the server wait at least 10 seconds before turning it back on If the server is connected to the UPS set at least 10 seconds delay in the power on schedule For the disk which does not conform to the CD standard the playback of such a disk with the CD drive is not guaranteed Turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet before relocating the server Clean the server on a regular basis See Chapter 7 for cleaning Regular cleaning proactively prevents various failures of the server Lightning may cause a momentary voltage drop To prevent this problem it is recommended to use of an uninterruptible power supply unit Make sure to use optional devices supported by the server Some non supported devices may be physically installed connected but cause failures of the server as well as malfunctions of the server NEC recommends you use NEC s genuine products Some third party products claim that they support the server However repair of the server due to a failure or damage resulted from use of such third party products will be charged Turn off the cellular phone or pager Radio interference may cause malfunctions of the server 1 10 Notes on Using Your Server TRANSFER TO THIRD PARTY The following must be observed when you transfer or sell the server or software provided with the server to a third party Make sure to provide this manual along with the server to a third part
276. n Wake On LAN according to the following list Setting item Change setting Allow the computer to turn off this device to save power ON Allow this device to bring the computer out of standby ON or OFF IMPORTANT E Set Allow this device to bring to ON WOL by DirectedPacket or MagicPacket will be available on Standby state E WOL by DirectedPacket is not available on Hibernate and Shutdown state 1 Packet with the Ethernet address of the adapter in ethernet header or Packet with an IP address assigned to the adapter in IP header Click Advanced tab and point to Enable PME Set the Enable in Value Click OK Restart the system 5 78 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup When PROSet is installed Start Device Manager 2 Point to Network adapters and double click Intel R 82547L Gigabit Network Connection to open the adapter Properties 3 Click Power Management tab and change setting in Wake On LAN according to the following list Setting item Change setting Wake On Directed Packet ON or OFF Wake On Magic Packet ON Wake on Magic Packet from power off state ON Wake on Link OFF IMPORTANT DirectedPacket will not wake up the system on Shutdown state even Wake On Directed Packet is setting to ON Only on Sleep or Hibernate state will wake up by a DirectedPacket NOTES m
277. n allows you to diagnose this computer See Chapter 7 System Management You can configure the parameters of BMC Baseboard Management Controller This function is not supported in this server Installing and Using Utilities 6 5 m Tool menu Redirection mode If you want to operate this computer via the BIOS redirection the console less function select this item System information is displayed TOOL MENU _ TOOL MENU Automatic select at 18 seconds Managed and set The menu s functions are the same as the Tool menu Normal mode IMPORTANT To use the Windows HyperTerminal Emulation program on serial console setup as shown below is required lt Example On Windows XP gt l 2 From the menu bar of HyperTerminal select File Properties In the Properties dialog box select Settings ASCII Setup Remove a checkmark from Wrap lines that exceed terminal width checkbox ASCII Setup ASCII Sending C Send line ends with line feeds C Echo typed characters locally Line delay 0 milliseconds Character delay 0 milliseconds ASCII Receiving C Append line feeds to incoming line ends C Force incoming data to 7 bit ASCII Wrap lines that exceed terminal width 6 6 Installing and Using Utilities Autorun Menu When the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD is inserted into the optical disk drive Windows automatically launches the menu as shown below W NEC EXPR
278. n anti static bag until you actually install it to the server Hold a component by its edge to avoid touching any terminals or components To store or carry any component place it in an anti static bag 9 4 Upgrading Your Server PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL Prepare the installation or removal of a component depending on the following procedure Shut down the OS 1 Or press the POWER SLEEP switch to turn off the power of the server The POWER SLEEP lamp goes off POWER SLEEP switch POWER SLEEP lamp Pull out the power cord from the AC inlet on the server 2 KG OEEO Remove all the cables connected to the server on the rear panel 3 Upgrading Your Server 9 5 INSTALLATION OR REMOVAL PROCEDURE Install or remove a component from the server in the following procedure Side Cover The side cover should be removed to access to built in devices and or mother board in the server Removal Remove the side cover in the following procedure amp WARNING A Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may result in death or serious personal injury See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details a Disconnect the power plug before working with the server 1 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare 2 Unlock the side cover if required
279. n found appears select Yes to continue 5 Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from the optical disk drive restart the system Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 75 107 If you use the SCSI Controller N8103 75 107 update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system The SCSI Controller driver will be installed automatically Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 95 If you use the SCSI Controller N8 103 95 you do not need to install the driver manually It is automatically installed by Windows Plug and Play Installing SAS Controller Driver N8103 104A If you use the SAS Controller N8103 104A update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system The SAS Controller driver will be installed automatically F 28 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions About Windows Activation Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions must be activated before you can use Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Windows activation process is as follows NOTE When you use Windows Server 2003 R2 x64 Editions BackUp CD ROM activation process is not needed 1 Click Run on Start menu Type as follows in the Open box and click OK oobe msoobe a f Type the name of a program folder document or r Internet resource and Windows will open it for you 2 When the screen as follows is displayed click Next A Activate Windows Let s activate Windows This copy of Win
280. n the BIOS SETUP and select Advanced Memory Configuration Memory Retest Enabled to clear the error information of the removed DIMM See Chapter 4 for details 8 Set the paging file size to the recommended value or larger See Chapter 5 for details 9 50 Upgrading Your Server File Device The server has two 5 25 inch device slots on which backup devices including DVD RAM MO and magnetic tape drives are installed the factory installed optical disk drive occupies the bottom slot NOTE According to the installed device the optional controller board and internal cable are required See Chapter 10 for details Additional slot 5 25 inch device slot Optical disk drive Upgrading Your Server 9 51 5 25 inch Device Installation Install a file device in the following procedure This section describes how to install an optional SCSI device for an example 1 Provide the proper setting for the device See the table below for the settings of the devices which can be installed in the device bay Device Settings SCSI device Termination resistance OFF If the terminator is not attached to the optional internal SCSI cable set the termination resistance to ON When installing a SCSI device make sure that the settings of the installed SCSI device are not the same as those of an external SCSI device with the same SCSI ID co
281. n the group when any trouble occurred on that adapter Adaptive Load Balancing ALB is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and enhances the throughput by operating packet transmission from the server by all the adapters This feature includes AFT feature Switch Fault Tolerance SFT is a feature that provides a failover relationship between two ports when each port is connected to a separate switch SFT supports two ports per team Static Link Aggregation SLA accounts for the GEC and 802 3ad static protocols SLA is a switch assisted teaming mode and requires configuring ports at both ends of the link server interfaces and switch ports IMPORTANT m AFT ALB setup must be operated after system update and restarting the system m All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming must exist on the same LAN If they are connected to the separate switches they will not work normally m The adapters specified as a group of Adaptive Load Balancing ALB can be connected to only Switching Hub m When exchange the mother board or option network card make sure to remove the adapter team before exchanges and recreate the adapter team after exchange complete Confirm the port setting of switching hub L2 matches the server network adapter Teaming mode m Teaming is not supported with Windows Server Core Create Team 1 Open the Device Manager Open Network adapters Intel R
282. nd rename the ar_menu autorun_en xml on the hard disk to the autorun menu xml 5 Copy the above files folders to a CD R Match the root folder when you burn a CD R Delete the files folders that you copied at step 3 Insert the CD R to a client computer which you want to install the management software Kick the below file of the CD R by using Explorer 015 ar_menu autorun_menu exe for Windows 32 bit edition autorun_menu_x64 exe for Windows 64 bit edition H 2 Using a Client Computer Which Has a CD Drive This page is intentionally left blank Appendix Product Configuration Record Table Use this table for information about setup and system environment change Hardware Main Unit Model name Serial No Date Installed CPU 1 Clock Serial No Date Installed Memory 1 Size Serial No Date Installed 2 Size Serial No Date Installed 3 Size Serial No Date Installed 4 Size Serial No Date Installed Monitor Type Model name Serial No Date Installed Hard Disk Drive Slot 0 Type Serial No Capacity Date Installed Type number Slot 1 Type Serial No Capacity Date Installed Type number Slot 2 Type Serial No Capacity Date Installed Type number Slot 3 Type Serial No Capacity Date Installed Type number l 2 Product Configuration Record Table 5 25 inch Device
283. nect the power plug before working with the server A CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Avoid installation in extreme temperature conditions a Make sure to complete board installation Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap Maintenance 7 3 Cleaning the Server For daily cleaning wipe the external surfaces of the server with a dry soft cloth Follow the procedure below if stains remain on the surfaces IMPORTANT m To avoid altering the material and color of the server do not use volatile solvents such as thinner and benzene to clean the server m The power receptacle the cables the connectors on the rear panel of server and the inside of the server must be kept dry Do not moisten them with water Make sure that the server is off powered the POWER SLEEP lamp goes off Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth O N D Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or lukewarm water and squeeze it firmly Rub off stains on the server with the cloth prepared in Step 4 Soak a soft cloth in water squeeze it firmly wipe the server with it once again Wipe the server with a dry cloth o Nog Wipe off dust from the fan e
284. nfiguration of RAID Redundant Arrays of Inexpensive Independent Disks m Select set a RAID level Onboard RAID Controller RAIDO RAID1 or RAID10 Optional RAID Controller RAIDO RAID1 RAIDS RAID6 or RAID10 When installing a system in an internal hard disk drive you should use Express Setup to perform all the procedures for RAID System configuration OS installation and then OS setup Use Express Setup even when not installing a system Start Express Setup select OS Selection Others The installer automatically performs all the procedures for RAID System configuration and then maintenance utility installation When making the setup in manual mode use the RAID System configuration utility in the chip on the board You can start the utility during execution of POST that automatically starts immediately after you turn on the POWER SLEEP switch For details see the online document in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD provided with the server For details on the data transfer rate RAID and RAID System configuration see the manual provided with the RAID Controller as well as the online document IMPORTANT m When N8103 109 116A 117A is installed do not let the system enter hibernation or standby mode Configuring RAID System by SATA hard disk drives together with SAS hard disk drives is not permitted 9 28 Upgrading Your Server Additional Battery for Optional RAID Controller When installing a RAID controller N
285. ng BIOS Version Displays the current BIOS version View only Board Part Number Displays the part number of mother board View only Board Serial Number Displays the serial number of mother board View only System Part Number Displays the part number of the system View only System Serial Number Displays the serial number of the system View only Chassis Part Number Displays the part number of the chassis View only Chassis Serial Number Displays the serial number of the chassis View only Onboard LAN MAC Address Displays the MAC address of the onboard LAN port 1 View only GBIA Module Version Displays the current GBIA version View only Factory set 4 20 Configuring Your Server Console Redirection Option Parameter Description Your Setting Console Disabled Specify the address interrupt of the Redirection Serial Port A serial port to which a remote console Serial Port B is connected Baud Rate 9600 Specify the baud rate used for the 19 2K interface with the remote console 38 4K connected 57 6K 115 2K Flow Control None Specify the flow control method Xon Xoff CTS RTS Terminal Type PC ANSI Specify the type of remote console VT100 VT UTF8 Continue Disabled Specify whether to continue console Redirection after Enabled redirection feature after completion of POST POST Remote
286. ng N8104 125A Adapter after System Update in Pages E 23 to E 24 The drivers for other network boards are automatically installed by Windows Plug and Play You do not need to install them manually E 26 Installing Windows Server 2008 Setup Team Adapter Fault Tolerance AFT is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the group when any trouble occurred on that adapter Adaptive Load Balancing ALB is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and enhances the throughput by operating packet transmission from the server by all the adapters This feature includes AFT feature Switch Fault Tolerance SFT is a feature that provides a failover relationship between two ports when each port is connected to a separate switch SFT supports two ports per team Static Link Aggregation SLA accounts for the GEC and 802 3ad static protocols SLA is a switch assisted teaming mode and requires configuring ports at both ends of the link server interfaces and switch ports IMPORTANT m AFT ALB setup must be operated after system update and restarting the system m All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming must exist on the same LAN If they are connected to the separate switches they will not work normally m The adapters specified as a group of Adaptive Load Balancing ALB can be connect
287. nk Speed and specify the Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Click OK Restart the system Also add or delete any protocols and services if necessary You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from Network and Dial up Connection NOTE It is recommend to add Network Monitor at Adding Services Network Monitor can monitor the frame or the packet that the computer installing Network Monitor sends or receives This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble For information on how to install the tool see the Setting for Solving Problems described later in this chapter Re install the Network Driver The network driver will be installed automatically F 22 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions Optional Network Board Driver If you want to use optional Network Board N8104 111 112 119 120 121 125A 126 123A the network driver will be installed automatically Therefore the driver attached to the Network board should not be used If you want to use optional Network Board N8104 111 112 119 120 121 125A 126 123A install the driver stored in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD m Incase of using N8104 111 015 win winnt w2k3amd r148 pro100 winx64 ndis5x m Incase of using N8104 112 119 120 121 125A 126 015 win winnt w2k3amd r148 pro1000 winx64 ndis5x If the procedure of installation is not clear refer to the
288. nnected to the controller See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Remove the side cover and front bezel as described earlier in this chapter Remove the EMI cover for the 5 25 inch device slot 9 52 Upgrading Your Server Remove the two dedicated screws attached to the front of the server 5 PDP LLL a Bcerccecereceteteces ECEESERECECESERES iLL EREE CEL ELEL EELS ete HRH Upgrading Your Server 9 53 6 Fasten the two screws removed in step 5 to the right side of the device file Dedicated screws NOTE m When installing the N8151 59 76 90 101 102 insert the device plates supplied with the server on the right side of the device and attach the device to the server using the supplied screws m Install the device plates so that the round hole is at the front and slotted hole is at the back 9 54 Upgrading Your Server 7 Insert a file device into the file bay 8 Align the screw holes on the device with those on the file bay and secure the device by using the two screws provided with the servver Screw Set 504 9 Connect the interface and power cables to the 5 25 inch device See Chapter 10 for details 10 Assemble the server 11 Ifa SCSI device is installed set the parameters including the transmission rate using the BIOS utility of the SCSI co
289. ns four sockets in which DIMMs are installed A 1GB DIMM is factory installed in DIMM 1 The DIMMs factory installed may be replaced Up to 16GB 4GB x 4 of memory can be added DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM 1 DIMM 3 IMPORTANT m The DIMM is easily affected by static electricity Make sure to wear the wrist strap an arm belt or anti static glove and discharge static electricity from your body before handling the DIMM Do not make bare hands contact with terminals and components on the DIMM In addition do not put the DIMM on a non anti static desk directly See Static Precautions for details of the static electricity Do not use any DIMM not approved by NEC If an unapproved third party s DIMM is installed in the server not only the DIMM but also the server itself may be defected You will be charged by any repair of a malfunction or defect caused by such a device within the warranty period The mother board in your server supports the single channel memory configuration and dual channel memory configuration The dual channel memory configuration provides increased performance over the single channel memory configuration 9 46 Upgrading Your Server Maximum Memory Capacity The available memory capacity depends on the basic arch
290. nstallation of the server and connections to the server A CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instructions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See A pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself Do not install the server in any place other than specified The following figure illustrates a site suitable for installing the server Room that satisfies the following conditions lt While operating gt Temperature 10 to 35 C Humidity 20 to 80 Temperature gradient 10 C h Atmosphere 749 to 1040 hpa lt While halting gt Temperature 10 to 55 C Humidity 10 to 80 Temperature gradient 15 C h Atmosphere 749 to 1040 hpa Allow clearance of at least 150 mm in front of and behind the server Close enough to connect the mouse and the display Install the server on a flat rigid desk 100 to 120 Vac 200 to 240 Vac parallel bi polar wall power outlet with the vl ground line Clean and tidy room It is recommended that the server should be used in a room where temperature is in the range between 15 to 25 C Setting Up Your Server 3 5 When you have selected a server site hold the server by its bottom with at least three persons and carry it to the site then place it slowly and gently IMPORTANT Do not hold the serve
291. nta esha seven EE 9 56 Chapter 10 Internal Cabling Diagrams ccccssseecceseseeeeeeeeeeeenseeeeeeeeeeeeeenseseeneeeeenenes 10 1 Interface Cables meanen a Aa A A A A NRS 10 2 Addition of Hard Disk Drive x cis sccsceevesneiiieste neee stn wa ati TE EE EEEE TERR 10 2 Connection of 5 25 inGh DEVi CEs esisi een ENEE o TE EEE E EE E 10 6 Power Cables irsin oaae E EEE E E AE EE aed E Ate es 10 9 Onboard SATA HDD rnis aS E S O AE Y 10 9 With Optional RAID Controller Installed cece cececeseesceesceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeesceeeeeeeeneenseenseeaees 10 10 Appendix A Specifications ccccccceceeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeneeeeeeeeseneeeaeeeeesseeeseseesseaneeeeeeens A 1 viii Appendix B Other Precautions cccccsssccecesseceeeseeeceeeseeneeeeeseenseseseaeseseseenseseseenseeeeseaes B 1 Transfer Rate of the On board LAN Controller sssseneesseeeeseesessseserseeseeeessrseesseseeseeseeeesseseesss B 1 Server Management SoftWare neni tact ce eee ieee A eA ee eee ot B 1 BIG ppy Diskesnc22 seit n i eis Reels SER eS ee O RN B 1 DVD CD2ROM ieie E i ee eae een nie Atel dS cee et B 4 Tape Medias onen e Se Co ieee eis Be Ge LA eae Ati ed B 4 Keyboard eesisecea skh E isc eh his SI eee bese O E O E B 5 MOUSE sae a ten ncsite n Gin ace tee a heute teh ie loans a a S N etapa B 6 Appendix CIR Orern fasted eaten isin earth eA eas A tee A ANA C 1 Appendix D Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 s cccesseneeseeeeeeeeeeeenseeeseeneeeeeeea
292. ntroller Refer to the manual provided with the SCSI controller for details Upgrading Your Server 9 55 12 Install the device driver for the installed device if needed Refer to the manual provided with the device for details Removal The file device can be removed in the reverse order of the installation If the device is removed but not installed again install the EMI and dummy covers 9 56 Upgrading Your Server Optical Disk Drive You may replace the factory installed optical disk drive with an optional DVD SuperMULTI drive IMPORTANT Be sure to use the DVD SuperMULTI drive authorized by NEC Replacement Procedure Take the following steps to install the optional DVD SuperMULTI drive 1 2 3 4 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Remove the side cover and front bezel Disconnect all the interface and power cables from the factory installed optical disk drive Remove the two screws securing the left side of the factory installed optical disk drive Screw Set 504 Upgrading Your Server 9 57 5 Remove the factory installed optical disk drive 6 Remove the two dedicated screws securing the right side of the factory installed optical disk drive 7 Mount the two dedicated screws removed in Step 4 to the right side of the optional DVD SuperMULTI drive
293. o access your hard drive insert the installation media containing the driver files and then click OK NOTE The installation media can be a floppy disk CD DVD or USB flash drive OK Cancel Click Browse and go to Step 14 QO If the N8103 109 116A 117A RAID Controller is not used Go to Step 16 E 14 14 15 16 17 18 Installing Windows Server 2008 The folder reference dialog box appears Select a path in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD and then click OK Ifthe N8103 109 RAID Controller is used Windows Server 2008 32 bit x86 Edition lt drive letter gt 015 win winnt oemfd ws2008 fd 1 stexstor Windows Server 2008 64 bit x64 Edition lt drive letter gt 015 win winnt oemfd ws2008x64 fd 1 stexstor 0 If the N8103 116A 117A RAID Controller is used Windows Server 2008 32 bit x86 Edition lt drive letter gt 015 win winnt oemfd ws2008 fd1 megasas Windows Server 2008 64 bit x64 Edition lt drive letter gt 015 win winnt oemfd ws2008x64 fd1 megasas After you select the path a list of drivers is displayed Select the following driver and then click OK Go to Step 15 Q If the N8103 109 RAID Controller is used Promise SuperTrak EX SAS RAID Controller Q If the N8103 116A 117A RAID Controller is used LSI Logic MegaRAID SAS 8708EM2 RAID Controller Remove the EXPRESSBUILDER and set Backup DVD ROM or Windows Server 2008 DVD ROM Select the disk wher
294. o protect your valuable data and programs from loss m Three generation data management NEC recommends that you should employ three generation data management for data storage Three generation data management uses three cartridge tapes A B and C You save data to tape A on the first day tape B on the second day tape C on the third day tape A on the forth day and so on That is you save data into cartridge tapes cyclically from tape A through C This enables you for example to use tape B to restore the data when tape C makes a read error Also when both tapes B and C make a read error you can restore your valuable data by using the data stored in tape A Other Precautions B 5 Keyboard The keyboard is a device to instruct you computer by entering alphanumeric characters or symbols IMPORTANT Do not pour any liquid such as water or put anything into the keyboard Doing so may cause a failure of the keyboard m The keyboard provided with the server is designed for adjustment of an angle Adjust the keyboard angle at which the keyboard is easy to operate The adjustment assists in reducing strain on your shoulders arms and fingers NOTE The keyboard functions depend on the software Refer to the manual that comes with the software for details B 6 Other Precautions Mouse Like the keyboard the mouse is a device to instruct your computer Many OS s and application software require the
295. oceed operations according to the message Now the Setup using Express Setup has completed After Express Setup has completed be sure to execute the tasks described in Installing and Setting Device Drivers 5 48 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Installing and Setting Device Drivers Follow these steps to install and configure the device drivers LAN Driver and PROSet The LAN driver and PROSet have been installed automatically while your system was being updated in the previous section NOTE To change the LAN driver and PROSet settings log on to the system from a local console using an administrator account Remotely changing the settings by using the operating system s remote desktop feature is not supported Using N8104 125A Adapter after System Update To use the N8104 125A Adapter after updating your system you must first uninstall the LAN driver and PROSet and then update your system with the N8104 125A Adapter connected For a server running a full installation 1 Remove a team of network adapters NOTE Before you remove note down the current settings e g IP addresses of the standard and optional adapters teamed for network redundancy Configure the settings after reinstalling the LAN driver and PROSet To remove the team see Setup Team 2 In Control Panel click Uninstall Program 3 Double click Intel R Network Connections 14 8 43 0 Intel R Network Connect
296. ocess The system update brings the correction program provided by Microsoft to be applied to reinforce the system security The system update is recommended Service Pack 2 need not be applied again when Windows Server 2003 CD ROM which Service Pack 2 is included is used and it is installed Go to the section of Updating the System Perform Updating the System and application of the Hotfix KB921411 IMPORTANT In the situation below make sure to apply Updating the System and Hotfix KB921411 m Modified system configuration m Recovered the system using recovery process NOTE If you use Windows Server 2003 CD ROM which includes Service Pack 2 the application of Hotfix KB921411 is not required Application Process of the Hotfix KB921411 Apply the Hotfix KB921411 before execute Updating the System 1 Log on to the system by the account with administrator authority to the server such as administrator 2 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server Installing Windows Server 2003 G 13 3 Click Start menu and Run and then execute the following command lt When the English version of Windows Server 2003 R2 is used gt 015 win winnt dotnet qfe enu kb921411 exe lt When the Simplified Chinese version of Windows Server 2003 R2 is used gt 015 win winnt dotnet qfe chs kb921411 exe lt When the Traditional Chinese version of Windows Server 2003 R2 is u
297. ode Default 6 16 Installing and Using Utilities IMPORTANT Computer name and User name are required parameters NOTE Even if you do not input value into Administrator password Confirm password is displayed 10 Enter the setting of the network protocol Enter network protocol steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next W Parameter File Creator NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Load Enter RAID Speeily Enter basic Enter Step parameters settings wadini parameters network nd partition protocol Enter the settings of the network protocol If you want to set the IP address select Customized settings and click Detail settings If not select Standard setting and click Next Standard setting Custos Detail Settings NOTE The order of entry in custom setting may differ from the numbering of LAN port Installing and Using Utilities 6 17 11 Enter the domain or workgroup name to be used Enter domain account steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next W Parameter File Creator NEC EXPRESSBUILDER me Enter Select Win Select Save Step domain F limp dows n E i ump f parsing tions account ponents If you want to join in a domain enter the account name password of the domain Inot select Join in a workgroup and click Next T
298. of the Express server In addition make sure that the used cable conforms to the network interface standard QO Is BIOS configuration correct The internal LAN controller may be disabled with the BIOS SETUP utility of the server Check the setting with the BIOS setup utility Q Have the protocol and service already configured Install the distinctive network driver for the server Make sure that the protocol such as TCP IP and services are properly specified Q Is the transfer speed correct Open the network property dialog box in control panel to specify the link speed and duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Troubleshooting 8 25 The Telnet Service is not installed Adjust the computer name to 14 characters or less and then install the Telnet Service according to lt How to install the Telnet Service gt lt How to install the Telnet Service gt 1 Click Run on Start menu 2 Type tlntsvr service in the Open box and click OK 3 Click Start menu point to Control Panel and click Computer Management and then click the Services to specify whether the Telnet Service is registered When the installation of Telnet Service is finished there is no problem if the computer name is set to 15 characters or more Power ON OFF Wake On LAN feature does not work Immediately after the AC power is turned on the Remote Power ON OFF feature Wake ON LAN is disabled Start Windows 2
299. ology Factory set 4 12 Configuring Your Server Advanced Option Parameter Description Your Setting Boot time Diagnostic Enabled When enabled the BIOS will display Screen Disabled the POST progress When disabled the BIOS will display the NEC logo during POST Cannot be disabled during console redirection Reset Configuration Data No Select Yes if you want to clear the Yes system configuration data during the next boot Automatically reset to No in the next boot NumLock On Enables or disables Numlock Off feature at system startup Memory Error Boot This option is used to specify Halt whether the system stops at the end of POST when a memory error has been detected during POST This option is enabled when POST Error Pause on the Server menu is set to Enabled If there is no usable memory in the system the system will stop at the end of POST even if Boot is specified for this option Factory set IMPORTANT Be sure to take a note of boot priority before selecting Yes for Reset Configuration Data because the information on boot device will be cleared Select Exit Saving Changes to restart the system run BIOS SETUP utility and provide settings for boot device order again Configuring Your Server 4 13 Memory Configuration Option Parameter Description Your Setting Installed memory Indicates the t
300. on media No Service Pack Installing Service Pack You can install the Service Pack on the server When the Service Pack is not attached to your system prepare it by yourself Updating System If you modified the Windows system execute Update the system in the Autorun Menu Re installing to the Hard Disk Drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk If you want to leave the existing partition when installing the system on the hard disk drive upgraded to Dynamic Disk note the following issue Do not select the partition that OS had been installed as the partition to install the OS newly m Select Use the current File System for the format of OS partition Mounting MO Device Do not mount an MO device on your server during the Windows installation About Removable Media Do not set removable media such as DAT and LTO into the device mounted on this computer during the Windows installation Floppy Disk Drive The internal floppy disk drive is not included in your system at the standard configuration Prepare the optional Flash FDD or USB FDD if necessary Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions F 3 About the System Partition Size The system partition size can be calculated from the following formula Size necessary to install the system Paging File Size Dump File Size Application Size Size necessary to install the system 4100MB Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions 4100MB Windows Server 2003 x64 Ed
301. on supplied with the RAID Controller Q Is the hard disk drive applicable to the server Operation of any device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed Q Is the hard disk drive properly installed See Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 8 15 Fail to access the internal or external SCSI devices Q m Is the SCSI device applicable to the server Operation of any SCSI device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed Is the cable connection changed See Chapter 10 for cable connection Are SCSI devices properly configured When the server has external SCSI devices connected hard disk drive settings including SCSI ID and terminator are required Refer to the manual that comes with the SCSI device for details Is cable length exceeded Refer to the manual that comes with the SCSI device for details Are the optional SCSI controllers properly configured Use the BIOS Setup utility for proper configuration of SCSI devices connected to the SCSI connector on the mother board When the server has an optional SCSI controller installed and SCSI devices connected to it use the BIOS Setup utility that comes with the optional SCSI controller for proper configuration See the manual that comes with the optional SCSI controller for details 8 16 Troubleshooting Event Type Event Source Event Category Event ID Description Event Type Event Source Event Category E
302. on the content selected at Installing Windows Server 2008 follow each of the instructions Ifyou have selected a full installation If the menu is displayed click Setup Windows and click Update the system NOTE Right clicking on the Menu produces the same outcome Ifyou have selected a Server Core installation 1 Execute the following command line from command prompt to specify the optical disk drive e g D drive ed d d 015 win winnt bin oschk C Users administrator gt cd d D 015 win winnt bin oschk 2 Type following command line and press Enter oschk bat D 015 win winnt bin oschk gt oschk bat 4 The following box appears Updating the system x gt Setup is going to Updating the System If you apply the update process click OK If you wish to cancel the update process dick Cancel This process disables the Scalable Networking Pack SNP function If you use the SNP function enable it after the reboot Lox J oe D 20 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 5 Read the message and then click OK The update starts NOTE The following box appears during the update if you have deployed a full installation of Windows Server 2008 Wait until the update completes Updating the system Performing Updating the System Please wait for a while Checking the OS information Updating the drivers Performing the end process of Updating the
303. or RAID driver is displayed Ascreen with a solid blue background is displayed IMPORTANT m Ifthe RAID Controller is not used you do not need to press F6 m There is no visible indication on screen when F6 has been pressed 5 The following message is displayed Setup could not determine the type of one or more mass storage devices installed in your system or you have chosen to manually specify an adapter Currently Setup will load support for the following mass storage devices 0 Ifthe RAID Controller is used press S 0 Ifthe RAID Controller is not used go to Step 8 G 8 Installing Windows Server 2003 The following message is displayed Please insert the disk labeled manufacturer supplied hardware support disk into Drive A Press ENTER when ready Insert the Windows Server 2003 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive and press Enter A list of mass storage devices is displayed NOTE If you use the Flash FDD the message above is not displayed Select the proper RAID Controller and press Enter The screen of Step 5 is displayed LSI MegaRAID SAS RAID Controller Driver Server 2003 32 bit When N8103 116A 117A RAID Controller is installed Promise SuperTrak EX SAS RAID Controller 32bits platform When N8103 109 RAID Controller is installed LSI Embedded MegaRAID Windows XP 2003 When Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded
304. or future use PENNAN NEE S SERRE Install the 2 5 inch hard disk drive cage support bracket with four screws 6 2 5 inch Hard disk drive cage support bracket CC Qs wy SAN ARAN AASS Upgrading Your Server 9 21 7 Hold the 2 5 inch hard disk drive with the connector side facing toward you and the board side facing downward and then insert the hard disk drive into the slot slowly and gently IMPORTANT Use the screws provided with the hard disk drive If not use the screws provided with the server to secure it Using screws longer than the required length may cause the hard disk drive to be damaged 8 Align the guide on the chassis then insert the hard disk drive cage into the server carefully 9 22 Upgrading Your Server IMPORTANT m Be careful not to make the hard disk drive cage hit on any components on the mother board m When inserting the cage be careful not to have the hard disk drive damage the cables 9 Secure the hard disk drive cage with the four screws removed in step 5 10 Connect the interface cable and power cable to the hard disk drive Connect cables removed in Step 4 NOTE Use the red cables for even numbered ports and blue cables for odd numbered ports when using the SATA hard disk drive 11 Assemble the server 12 Run BIOS SETUP utility and check
305. or not on booting At first the supervisor password must be set If the supervisor password is set and this option is disabled BIOS determines that a user is booting Fixed disk boot sector Disable USB Port Normal Write Protect Disabled Front Rear Internal Front Rear Front Internal Rear Internal Front Rear Internal Specify whether to permit writing into boot sector of the IDE hard disk drive or not The server does not support IDE hard disk drive Select the USB port to be disabled or enabled Factory set Configuring Your Server 4 17 Server Option Parameter Description Your Setting FRB 2 Policy Disable FRB2 Timer Specify the operation of the processor Retry 3 Times when FRB level 2 error occurred in Always Reset BSP Boot Monitoring Disabled Specify whether to enable or disable 5 Minutes the boot monitoring function on 10 minutes booting or select the time limit for 15 minutes timeout 20 minutes 25 minutes 30 minutes 35 minutes 40 minutes 45 minutes 50 minutes 55 minutes 60 minutes Boot Monitoring Retry 3 Times Specify the processing at the Policy Always Reset occurrence of timeout during boot monitoring If Retry 3 times is selected the system is reset after the occurrence of timeout and OS boot is retried up to three times If Always Reset is selected the system is reset after the occurrence of timeout and OS boot is
306. ore partitions See the figure below First Second Third Partition Partition Partition Deleted Retained Retained You can not re install the system with the existing partition that is upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained Do not select Use existing partitions at Windows system drive settings 5 66 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 11 12 Enter the user information and client license mode Enter basic parameters steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top menu Load Select OS Enter RAID Specify Enter basic Step parameters settings medium parameters gt partition Enter the basically parameters The computer name is less than 15 characters Do not set the same name as other computer name domain name or workgroup name The user name and the organization s name are less than 50 characters User information Computer name i necessary User name necessary Organization s name Administrator password Confirm password Client licence Per server mode 5 Peruser or per device mode Back Next Top Default Version 5 XX XXX XX NOTE Even if you do not input value into Administrator password Confirm password is displayed Enter the setting of the network protocol Enter Network Protocol steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if nec
307. otal capacity of the base memory View only Available under Indicates the capacity of memory 4GB available in the area under 4GB View only DIMM1 4 Status Normal Indicates the current memory status Disabled Normal indicates the normal status Not installed Disabled indicates a memory error Not Error installed indicates no DIMM installed and Error indicates the system is forcibly started with memory error View only Memory Retest Yes Causes BIOS to retest all memory on the No next boot Automatically reset to No at the next boot Extended RAM 1MB 1MB indicates that the memory test is Step Disabled done in the unit of 1MB Disabled indicates that only memory initialization is done Only pressing Space is acceptable to suspend the test during the memory test PCI Configuration Factory set board connected to PCI slot Set this item to Enabled when the RAID Controller or SCSI controller is connected with the hard disk drive which contains an OS Set this item to Disabled when the LAN controller which contains ROM BIOS is used but the board does not provide network booting Disabling Option ROM Scan saves memory consumption and time for startup Option Parameter Description Your Setting PCI Slot 1 4 Enabled Displays the submenu to specify whether to Option ROM Disabled enable or disable the BIOS on the device Factory set IMPORTANT If the
308. otnet r148 apps prosetdx win32 The Intel R PROSet InstallShield Wizard dialog starts Click Next Choose I accept the terms in the license agreement and click Next 5 72 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Click Next Click Install When InstallShield Wizard Completed window is displayed click Finished Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from the optical disk drive restart the system Oo Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 73 Network Driver Specify the details of network driver One standard network driver that is mounted will be installed automatically but the link speed and Duplex mode need to be specified manually When PROSet is not installed 1 Open the Device Manager Double click Network Adapter Name in the list Click the Advanced and specify the Link Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Click OK Restart the system When PROSet is installed 1 Open the Device Manager Double click Network Adapter Name in the list Click the Link Speed and specify the Speed amp Duplex value the same as the value specified for HUB Click OK Restart the system Also add or delete any protocols and services if necessary You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from Network and Dial up Connection NOTE It is recommend to add N
309. ower Saver Options setting is not necessary to change m Above setting will be maintained until manually resetting are executed IMPORTANT The parameters of Wake On LAN will not exist if the network ports are not available for WOL 4 Click OK 5 Restart the system Installing Windows Server 2008 E 29 Graphics Accelerator Driver If you use standard graphics accelerator drivers update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system Standard graphics accelerator drivers will be installed automatically NOTE lt Windows Server 2008 gt The graphics accelerator driver is supported only on a server running a full installation Use VGA on a server running a Server Core installation Observe the following procedure when you want to reinstall the driver individually 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive If the autorun menu is displayed close menu screen 2 Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer 3 Run setup exe in the following directory Windows Server 2008 64 bit x64 Edition 015 win winnt ws2008x64 r1 video Windows Server 2008 32 bit x86 Edition 015 win winnt ws2008 video 4 Follow the message to continue the installation If the dialog message Digital Signature could not been found appears select Yes to continue 5 Remove the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD from the optical disk drive resta
310. owing notes in mind to use the DVD CD ROM for the server m Press the center of the storage case to remove the DVD CD ROM from the case Do not drop the DVD CD ROM Do not place anything on the DVD CD ROM or bend the DVD CD ROM Do not attach any label onto the DVD CD ROM Do not touch the signal side nothing is printed on this side with your hand Place the DVD CD ROM with its printed side upward and gently put it on the tray Do not scratch the DVD CD ROM or write anything directly on it with a pencil or ball point pen Do not leave the DVD CD ROM with foods and drinks or in a place exposed to cigarette smoke Do not leave the DVD CD ROM in a high temperature place e g place exposed to direct sunlight or close to a heater When dust or fingerprints are attached on the DVD CD ROM wipe the DVD CD ROM from its center to edge with a dry soft cloth slowly and gently m Use the dedicated cleaner to clean the DVD CD ROM Do not use record spray cleaner benzene or thinner m Keep the DVD CD ROM in the dedicated case when not in use Tape Media The following describes data handling with the DAT or AIT optionally available for the server m Saving your valuable data When you save your valuable data or programs into the cartridge tape you should save them into two cartridge tapes to make the primary and secondary tapes This enables you to restore your data from one tape when the other makes a read error as well as t
311. ows Server 2008 can be operated on NEC Express5800 Server you can use the other procedure described later Follow the steps below 1 2 3 4 o Prepare one Flash FDD or 3 5 inch floppy disk Turn on your NEC Express5800 server Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server Press the RESET switch or press Ctrl Alt and Delete to reboot the server You may also turn off and then on again to reboot the server The system will boot from the DVD and NEC EXPRESSBUILDER starts Select Create the OEM Disk for Windows from Tools Menu step Connect the Flash FDD or insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive Select Create a Windows Server 2008 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER at Create OEM Disk and click Perform NOTE In case of creating the disk for Windows Server 2008 64 bit x64 Edition select Create a Windows Server 2008 x64 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER Windows Server 2008 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely NOTE If the following message is displayed the floppy disk is write protected Creation of OEM Disk x v Failed in the deletion of the file Please confirm whether the media is not write protected state or not Cancel write protected state If you have already cancelled write protected state connect the floppy disk drive again E 8 Installing Windows Server 2008 Create from Au
312. p and Recovery group box Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 85 IMPORTANT Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions To specify Complete Memory Dump to write the debug information is recommended If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB Complete Memory Dump cannot be specified so that specify Kernel Memory Dump instead Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of the memory capacity mounted on Express server 1MB In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added memory change the write debugging information to Kernel Memory Dump before adding memory The size of debugging information memory dump to be taken also changes due to adding memory Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information memory dump write destination drive Windows Server 2003 To specify Complete Memory Dump to write the debug information is recommended If the mounted memory size is larger than 2GB Complete Memory Dump cannot be specified so that specify Kernel Memory Dump instead Specify the drive where there is a free area more than the size of the memory capacity mounted on Express server 12MB In case the memory capacity is more than 2GB a free area of 2048 12MB or more In case the mounted memory size exceeds 2GB due to the added memory change the write debugging information to Kernel Memory Dump before adding memory The size of debugging informa
313. played NOTE If you use the Flash FDD the message above is not displayed 7 Select the proper RAID Controller and press Enter The screen of Step 5 is displayed LSI MegaRAID SAS RAID Controller Driver Server 2003 for x64 When N8103 116A 117A RAID Controller is installed Promise SuperTrak EX Family Controller 64bits platform When N8103 109 RAID Controller is installed LSI Embedded MegaRAID Windows XP 2003 64 bit When Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID is used 8 lt If the SCSI Controller N8103 75 107 is connected gt Press S IMPORTANT m Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive If the floppy disk drive has already contained Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER you do not need to insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER m Ifyou have created the OEM Disk into the Flash FDD connect the Flash FDD before you start the system The screen of Step 6 is displayed Press Enter and go to Step 9 lt If the SCSI Controller N8103 75 107 is not connected gt Go to Step 10 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions F 9 9 A list of mass storage devices is displayed 10 11 Select the Adaptec Ultra320 SCSI Cards Windows 64 bit and press Enter IMPORTANT If the following message is displayed when you use the N8103 75 107 SCSI controller pre
314. plication to be installed The Si rk Man col SNMP setting is required to install the NEC ESMPRO Agent ch is not included in EXPRESSBUILDER select Apply OEM Disk for mass storage device cations Selected applications NEC ESMPRO Agent Universal RAID Utility Apply OEM Disk for m Add gt amp Delete Back Next Top Default 16 Save the parameters Save parameters steps are displayed NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Enter Enter Select Win Select Save Start Step network domaid dows cfc antlbed parimet Elbo protocol accourt ponents tions setup Ifyou want to save the parameters set a free formatted media luding the drive letter of the parameters file into the text box and click Next e parameters Back Next Top Version 5 XX XXX KX XXX If you want to save the parameters set the free formatted floppy disk Select Save parameters enter the file path of the parameters files into the text box and click Next If not select Do not save parameters Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 19 17 The Express Setup will start when you click Perform in Start Express setup step Enter Enter Select Win Select Save Start Step network domaift dows com applica parameters Express protocol account ponents tions setup Now EXPRESSBUILDER gathered all of the parameters for the Express setup The Express setup will start when Perform button is c
315. pplication size Required size IMPORTANT m The above mentioned partition size is the minimum partition size required for system installation Ensure sufficient partition size for system operation Following numbers are the recommended size Full Installation 32 768MB 32GB or more Server Core Installation 10 240MB 10GB or more 1GB 1 024MB m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the Windows Partition is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system m Regardless of the size of the mounted memory or the Write debugging information type of memory dump the maximum size of the dump file is The size of the mounted memory 300MB m If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs D 4 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 NOTE When new partition is created initial 100MB is assigned as boot partition by Windows OS Example If you make a partition of 40 960MB 40GB usable space will be 40 960MB 100MB 40 860MB Blank area Windows Partition 40 860MB Boot Partition 100MB The boot partition is not recognized from the operating system
316. press F10 to start initialization A confirmation screen for execution appears Select Yes to start initialization When the progress bar in the Initialize Virtual Drive Progress screen indicates 100 initialization is completed Configuring Your Server 4 37 16 Execute Check Consistency on the virtual drive that has been initialized See Check Consistency for details 17 Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit from LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility IMPORTANT m Be sure to execute Check Consistency after creating configuration m Be sure to execute Consistency Check if you have configured the RAID drives by Express Setup 4 38 Configuring Your Server Manual Rebuild Replace hard disk drive y Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility y Execute rebuilding y Exit LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility Replace a hard disk drive and turn on the server Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility Select Rebuild from the TOP menu The Rebuild PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU screen appears m Rebuild PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU PORT o ONLIN A00 00 1 FAIL A00 01 4 Move the cursor onto the hard disk drive displaying FAIL and then press Space to select it Multiple hard disk drives can be selected simultaneous rebuilding The FAIL indication for the hard disk drive selected starts blinking 5 When hard disk dri
317. problem contact Error Info An uncorrectable error your service representative BOXX occurred for PCI 3 POST POST Error A POST error For the recommended action see POST Error Code occurred Error Messages XXXX WDT WDT Info The watchdog timer Restart the equipment If this does not timeout 00XX timed out last time the resolve the problem contact your service POST was started representative WDT Info The watchdog timer Restart the equipment If this does not 00CO timed out last time the resolve the problem contact your service OS was started representative WDT Info The watchdog timer Restart the equipment If this does not 01C0 timed out last time the resolve the problem contact your service OS was running representative Log Area None The DMI log area was This is not an error Cleared initialized and the log was deleted System None The POST finished This is not an error Boot Troubleshooting 8 11 SOLVING PROBLEMS When the server fails to operate as expected see the following to find out your problem and follow the instruction given before asking for repair If the server still fails to operate successfully after solving your problem take a note on the on screen message and contact your service representative Problems with NEC Express Server No screen display appears and beep occurs Q Is the DIMM board installed securely Check whether the DIMM board is inserted
318. ption board or peripherals are installed Incorrect installations may result in damage to the system and lead to accidents Halka O SDIFTEO LNRS ALTFEL B OFER ERM AF PATRAFEE RAMEE o To avoid the risk of personal injury x careful when accessing the neide of the system BOHRDSLIT BHOR RBORHELODOHD CHHSLITT FAL prone et PESHBRSRR FREE ACME AREAS aS AE ALTE ESS tie BETTE o A Firmly hold the bottom of the system when required to lift and carry the system Notes on Using Your Server 1 3 SAFETY NOTES This section provides notes on using your server safely Read this section carefully to ensure proper and safe use of the server For symbols see SAFETY INDICATIONS provided earlier General amp WARNING S at ad Do not use the server for services where critical high availability may directly affect human lives Your server is not intended to be used with or control facilities or devices concerning human lives including medical devices nuclear facilities and devices aeronautics and space devices transportation facilities and devices and facilities and devices requiring high reliability NEC assumes no liability for any accident resulting in personal injury death or property damage if the server has been used in the above conditions Do not use the server if any smoke odor or noise is present If smoke odor or noise is present immediately turn off the server and disconnect
319. r 2003 R2 above shown event log will be registered For more details refer to Enabling Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Hardware Management on the following site NEC Express5800 Web Site http www nec com global prod express download W2K3_R2 index html The system displays the message below and fails to log on Troubleshooting 8 23 Windows Product Activation To shut down the computer click Cancel This copy of Windows must be activated with Microsoft before you can continue You cannot log on until you activate Windows YES NO Cancel In Windows Server 2003 the above message will be displayed if you use the operating system without executing the license authentication Select Yes and execute the procedure for license authentication Cannot install the operating system correctly Q Did you confirm the notes on installing the operating system See Chapter 6 Fail to start the OS with the 3GB switch System often fails to start the OS with the 3GB switch In this case adjust the capacity of the user mode area using the userva switch in reference to the following URL http support microsoft com kb 316739 en During installation the following warning is registered in the System Log of the Event Viewer Error detected on the device Device CdRom0 during the paging operation There is no problem on this issue Fail to
320. r 2003 x64 Editions m Windows Server 2008 Installation You can install this utility according to the following procedure 1 Insert NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD in the optical disk drive after OS starts 2 Click from the menu displayed with Auto run in order of Setup software gt Product Info Collection Utility 3 The installation of this utility is started Thereafter install it according to the message in the dialog box In default it is installed in System drive ezclct folder x NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Ce Setup software s TEAVET er ese ESMPRO roduct Info Collection Utility Universal RAID Utility IMPORTANT m Log in the system in account with the administrator authority m 2 5GB or more free space is required for the installation drive 6 26 Installing and Using Utilities Using Utility Execute stdclct collect exe in the installation folder of this utility The log folder is made in the above mentioned folder and various information on this device is stored in the data compressed file zip form Uninstallation Except for Server Core Choose Add or Remove Programs Product Info Collection Utility Vx x x from the control panel Thereafter uninstall it according to the message in the dialog box For Server Core Enter the following command from the command prompt Wmic product where name Product Info Collection Utility call uninst
321. r by its front bezel to lift the server The front bezel may be disengaged and damage the server Do not install the server in the following locations as it may cause malfunctions of the server m Places with drastic changes in temperature e g near a heater air conditioner or refrigerator m Places with strong vibration m Places with corrosive gas in presence near chemicals or with possibilities of chemicals sprayed over m Ona non antistatic carpet m Places with possibilities of falling objects m Places where a power outlet that shares the ground line with another especially the one to which a device with large power consumption is connected must be used for the server m Do not install the server near equipment that generates power noise e g contact spark at power on power off of commercial power supply through a relay To install the server near equipment that generates power noise ask your service representative for separating the power wiring or installing a noise filter 3 6 Setting Up Your Server CONNECTING PERIPHERAL DEVICES Connect peripheral devices to the server The server is provided with connectors for wide variety of peripheral devices The figure on the next page illustrates available peripheral devices for the server in the standard configuration and locations of the connectors for the devices A CAUTION Observe the following instructions to use the server safely Failure to follow these instr
322. r service representative Memory Error Info An uncorrectable error Restart the equipment and then run the Uncorrecta 0100 occurred for DIMM 1 BIOS SETUP utility Check the DIMM status ble Error Info An uncorrectable error DIMM Group 1 to 4 Status displayed in 0200 occurred for DIMM 2 Memory Configuration which is on the Error Info An uncorrectable error Advanced menu 0300 occurred for DIMM 3 Check whether the DIMM for which the error Error Info An uncorrectable error occurred is inserted correctly and then 0400 occurred for DIMM 4 restart the equipment If this does not resolve the problem contact your service representative PCIPERR Error Info A parity error occurred Check whether the optional card in PCI slot XXXX for PCI 4 4 is inserted correctly and then restart the PCI SERR Error Info A system error equipment If this does not resolve the XXXX occurred for PCI 4 problem contact your service representative PCle Error Info An uncorrectable error Restart the equipment If this does not UncErr 80XX occurred for the resolve the problem contact your service on board LAN representative Error Info An uncorrectable error Check whether the optional card in the PCI 90XX occurred for PCI 1 slot for which the error occurred is inserted Error Info An uncorrectable error correctly and then restart the equipment If AOXX occurred for PCI 2 this does not resolve the
323. r team Static Link Aggregation SLA accounts for the GEC and 802 3ad static protocols SLA is a switch assisted teaming mode and requires configuring ports at both ends of the link server interfaces and switch ports IMPORTANT m AFT ALB setup must be operated after installing the drivers PROSet and restarting the system m All the adapters specified as a group of Adapter Teaming must exist on the same LAN If they are connected to the separate switches they will not work normally m The adapters specified as a group of Adaptive Load Balancing ALB can be connected to only Switching Hub m When exchange the mother board or option network card make sure to remove the adapter team before exchanges and recreate the adapter team after exchange complete Confirm the port setting of switching hub L2 matches the server network adapter Teaming mode Create Team 1 Open the Device Manager Open Network adapters Intel R xxx properties Click Teaming tab and check the Team this adapter with other adapters check box Click New Team Fill the name of the team in Specify a name for the team and click Next Include the adapter to the team and click Next 5 76 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 6 Select a team mode and then click Next IMPORTANT Following team types are supported m Adapter Fault Tolerance m Adaptive Load Balancing m Static Link Aggregation Switch F
324. ramework Version 2 0 Redistributable Packa Microsoft Visual C 2008 SP1 Redistributable Package x86 Default 14 Save the parameters Save parameters steps are displayed W Parameter File Creator NEC EXPRESSBUILDER ee Enter Select Win Select Step domain dows c m applica parameters account ponents tions Select Save the parameter and specify the destination in which to save the parameters file If you do not wish to save the parameters file select Do not save the parameter If you want to save the parameters set the free formatted floppy disk Select Save parameters enter the file path of the parameters files into the text box and click Next If not select Do not save parameters 6 20 Installing and Using Utilities 15 Saved to a floppy disk A Saved parameters file Now the floppy disk containing the parameters file has been created A Close Parameter File Creator Click Yes to exit Parameter File Creator NOTES m Ifyou modify existing information file parameter file click Load Parameters at Load Parameters screen Refer to help to modify information file m Ifyou cancel operation on the way click X at the upper right corner of the screen Installing and Using Utilities 6 21 NEC ESMPRO The NEC ESMPRO lets a system administrator manage remote servers across a network NEC ESMPRO monitors server hardware and sof
325. rd Table cccccccscesseecceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 1 Hardware ci avdidie netsh oo a e aah tn alg late I 1 SOMWA cook ee IT EOE ER Chi pe ae MBB ee Res hectic 1 3 Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server This chapter includes information necessary for proper and safe operation of your server 1 2 Notes on Using Your Server WARNING LABELS The warning label is attached to components with possible danger or their vicinity in your server to inform the user that a hazardous situation may arise when operating the server Do not intentionally remove or damage any of the labels If you find any labels totally partially removed or illegible due to damage contact your sales representative E A j CAUTION ATIAYORA RAL BISERTISIEIY CY SHE NBRECRRLCWST TIVERUT RAL HT ARRAN SCRA IE REA MEE PR HRP SMR SERS NT THAR AUR EDS ATES GR ae Pi cA T PROMIERS REISI Pa A SFR REIA Disconnect all AC power cords from both system RSL BMeE and external peripherals prior to installing removing options HERE Eee seg sae es Leto TA CEBEAL PIATRA EETUNAR REENT SIRIARA ANER o Do not drop any screws inside the system N RRUT TY 3 VARORRORE MT1 Y 271 RESRL ELCRRLT FEU Boicekild MEPNKKORACEOET WREAR DRE HTERN AA ASR APH EMH TER WR BIE n a SS RMRRAKRHAE i Rel DERS SIRF RALAR AAIR EIT EE 0 A BRIA ARAy AIRE SMAI ASS Refer to the User s Guide when o
326. rd product key you typed is invalid for activation gt Type a different product key gt Contact Microsoft to help resolve this problem 3 Type the product key shown on your COA label and click Next R windows Activation x Change your product key for activation Changing your Windows Server Standard product key requires you to activate Windows You must activate Windows to continue using all Windows features You can find your product key sticker on your computer or on the installation disc holder inside the Windows package Hee ea een eee l es ONIN Example Sticker a 21 waar GT TTT TU Product Key E 32 Installing Windows Server 2008 4 Activate Windows T Windows Activation The Windows activation is complete Installing Windows Server 2008 E 33 For a server running a Server Core installation 1 At the command prompt type slmgr dli and press Enter Administrator C Windows system32 cmd exe Microsoft Windows Version 6 0 6001 1 Copyright lt c 2666 Microsoft Corporation C Users Administrator gt slmgr dli IMPORTANT If the following message appears Windows has already been activated on your system Click XI to exit Windows Script Host g x Name Windows Server R ServerStandard edition Description Windows Operating System Windows Server R OEM_SLP channel Partial Product Key 7CYMX License Status Licensed
327. re in the server as well as the hard disk drive Repair of any failure or damage in the server caused by such a hard disk drive will be charged Hard disk drive cage Hard disk drive Slot 3 Hard disk drive Slot 2 Hard disk drive Slot 1 Hard disk drive Slot 0 9 12 Upgrading Your Server Installation Follow the procedure as described below to install 3 5 inch hard disk drives 1 Configure the operation mode of hard disk drives according to the manual supplied with the hard disk drive Hard disk drive Cage to Install Serial ATA connector on mother board First hard disk drive Slot 0 Serial ATA connector 0 Second hard disk drive Slot 1 Serial ATA connector 1 Third hard disk drive Slot 2 Serial ATA connector 2 Fourth hard disk drive Slot 3 Serial ATA connector 3 Serial ATA connector 0 Serial ATA connector 1 Serial ATA connector 3 Serial ATA connector 2 Mother board 2 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare 3 Remove the side cover 4 Disconnect the interface cable and power cable from the hard disk drive if connected
328. re is disabled at the next system boot after AC power on You need to press the Power switch to boot the system If the AC power is turned off Wake On Ring feature on power management chip is disabled until the next DC power on 4 16 Configuring Your Server Security Press Enter on Set Supervisor Password or Set User Password to display the password entry screen Enter the passwords on the dialog box IMPORTANT m User password can be set only when Supervisor password is already set Set the passwords only after OS is installed If you forget the passwords contact your service representative Option Parameter Description Your Setting User Clear Indicates the user password setting Password Is Set status Supervisor Clear Indicates the supervisor password Password Is Set setting status Set Supervisor Up to eight Press Enter to display the Password alphanumerics supervisor password entry screen This password enables all the SETUP menus to be accessed This setting can be done only on login with the password input of Supervisor at start of SETUP Set User Up to eight Press Enter to display the user Password alphanumerics password entry screen For this password accessing to the SETUP menu is restricted This setting can be done only on login with the password input of Supervisor at start of SETUP Password on boot Disabled Enabled Specify whether the passwords are entered
329. re you need an extension cord Use of a cord that does not meet the power specifications of your server may heat up the cord and cause a fire Do not connect the power cord to an outlet that has an illegal number of connections The electric current exceeding the rated flow overheats the outlet which may cause a fire Do not pull the cable when disconnecting it When disconnecting the cable from the device hold the cable connector and pull it straight out Pulling the cable out by the cable portion or giving mechanical stress to the connector could damage the cables and connectors to result in an electrical shock hazard or a fire Insert the power plug into the outlet as far as it goes Heat generation resulting from a halfway inserted power plug imperfect contact may cause a fire Heat will also be generated if condensation is formed on dusty blades of the halfway inserted plug increasing the possibility of fire Notes on Using Your Server 1 5 A CAUTION Use the authorized power cord only Use only the power cord that comes with your server Use of an unauthorized power cord may cause a fire when the electric current exceeds the rated flow Also observe the following to prevent an electric shock or fire caused by a damaged cord Do not stretch the cord harness Do not pinch the power cord Do not bend the power cord Keep chemicals away from the power cord Do not twist the power cord Do no
330. red for system installation Ensure sufficient partition size for system operation Following numbers are the recommended size Full Installation 32 768MB 32GB or more Server Core Installation 10 240MB 10GB or more 1GB 1 024MB m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the Windows Partition is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system m Regardless of the size of the mounted memory or the Write debugging information type of memory dump the maximum size of the dump file is The size of the mounted memory 300MB m If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 7 NOTE When new partition is created initial 100MB is assigned as boot partition by Windows OS Example If you make a partition of 40 960MB 40GB usable space will be 40 960MB 100MB 40 860MB Blank area Windows Partition 40 860MB Boot Partition 100MB The boot partition is not recognized from the operating system The partition size required for a system with an installed memory size of 1GB 1 024MB and a f
331. retried repeatedly Post Error Disabled Specify whether to stop the POST Pause Enabled once at the end of POST if an error occurs during the POST AC LINK Stay Off Specify the state of power when the Last State AC power to the server is turn off Power On once and then on Fan control Normal If the silent mode available on the Mode Low system specifying Low lets the system enter into the silent mode where rotation of fans are controlled Factory set 4 18 Configuring Your Server The table below shows the operation when the AC power to the server is turn off once and then on again depending on the setting of AC LINK System status before AC power off Setting of AC LINK Stay Off Last State Power On Operating Off On On Aborting DC power being off also Off Off On Forced shutdown Off Off Off Press the POWER SLEEP switch continuously for four seconds or longer This forcibly turns off the power After this operation the system does not turn on the power even though the AC LINK setting is set to Power On IMPORTANT m To power on the server from the UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply select Server AC Link Power On m Ifthe server is connected to the UPS set at least 10 seconds delay in the power on schedule Configuring Your Server 4 19 System Management Option Parameter Description Your Setti
332. ring for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Remove the side cover Open the PCI board retention springs following the installation steps 4 Remove the board 2 oe E Install the additional slot cover and then close the PCI board retention springs following the installation steps 7 Assemble the server 7 Turn on the power of the server Make sure that no error message appears in the POST If an error message appears write down the message and contact your service representative for the maintenance 8 Run the BIOS Setup Utility to set the Reset Configuration Data in the Advanced menu to Yes This is required to update the hardware configuration information See Chapter 4 for details Upgrading Your Server 9 43 Installation of N8117 01A RS 232C Connector Kit The shipping carton contains the following components Item No Name Specification No Q ty Remarks 1 RS 232C Connector Kit 856 125671 002 1 Handling Guide 2 RS 232C cable A 804 063264 020 1 3 RS 232C cable B 804 062746 820 1 4 PCI bracket 1 243 112122 001 1 Attached to the cable 5 PCI bracket 2 243 112122 002 1 For Full Height PCI board Use Item No 3 RS 232C cable B and No 5 PCI bracket 2 Install N8117 01A in the following procedure 1 2 3 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare Remove the side cover
333. rity violation if it does not correctly impersonate user requests This event does not affect system operation Ignore this message The following system event is logged when Windows Server 2008 R2 is installed Event ID Source Level Description 134 Microsoft Windows Time Service Warning NtpClient was unable to set a manual peer to use as a time source because of DNS resolution error on NtpClient will try again in 3473457 minutes and double the reattempt interval thereafter The error was No such host is known 0x80072AF9 This event does not affect system operation Ignore this message 8 18 Troubleshooting The following application event is logged when Windows Server 2008 R2 is installed Event ID Source Level Description 1534 Microsoft Windows User Profiles Service Warning Profile notification of event Create for component 56EA1054 1959 467f BE3B A2A787C4B6EA failed error code is The revision level is unknown This event does not affect system operation Ignore this message The following system event is logged when I use the system recognizing iSCSI Event ID Source Level Description 1 iScsiPrt Error Initiator failed to connect to the target Target IP address and TCP Port number are given in dump data Go to the Microsoft website http support microsoft com default aspx kb 976072 en us The following warnings are logged to application event log when
334. rmation for maintenance General Description 2 19 Power Off Follow the procedure below to power off the server If the power cord of the server is connected to a UPS refer to the manual that comes with the UPS or the manual for the application that controls the UPS IMPORTANT Always allow POST to complete before turning off the server 8 Shut down the OS Press the POWER SLEEP switch on the front of the server The POWER SLEEP lamp goes out 10 Power off peripheral devices SLEEP Switch The POWER SLEEP switch allows you to save almost all power of the server power saving mode or sleep mode Press the POWER SLEEP switch on the front of the server to place the server in the power saving mode The POWER SLEEP lamp blinks In the power saving mode the server retains the memory data and the status of the previous operations To resume the original state press the POWER SLEEP switch again It may take a little time to resume the original state NOTE The operational level in the power saving mode depends on the OS in use Available for Windows Server 2003 IMPORTANT Do not change system configuration while turning into the power saving mode or in the power saving mode Otherwise you may fail to resume the original state 2 20 General Description Optical Disk Drive The optical disk drive is installed in the front of the server One of the following optical disk drives can be used
335. rom boot order put the cursor onto the device then press X to move it to Boot priority order 4 6 Configuring Your Server Memory To check the installed memory DIMM board status Select Advanced Memory Configuration and check the status indications The on screen DIMM group numbers and socket locations on the mother board are associated as shown in the following figure ptt dy i JI I JJ DIMM 2 DIMM 4 DIMM 1 DIMM 3 To clear the memory DIMM board error information Select Advanced Memory Configuration Memory Retest Yes and reboot To run power on memory test Select Advanced Memory Configuration Extended RAM Step 1 MB and reboot CPU To check the installed CPU status Select Main Processor Settings Processor CPUID and check the status indications Configuring Your Server 4 7 Keyboard To set Numlock Select Advanced Numlock On Off Security To set passwords on the BIOS Select Security Set Supervisor Password and enter a password Select Security Set User Password and enter a password Set Supervisor password first then User password External Devices To set up external device
336. ror Unable to initialize the security package Kerberos for server side authentication The data field contains the error number These events do not affect system operation Ignore these messages The following application events are logged when Windows Server 2008 is installed Event ID Source Level Description Event ID Source Level Description Event ID Source Level Description 63 Microsoft Windows WMI Warning A provider Ncs2 has been registered in the Windows Management Instrumentation namespace Root cimv2 to use the LocalSystem account This account is privileged and the provider may cause a security violation if it does not correctly impersonate user requests A provider IntelEthernetDiag has been registered in the Windows Management Instrumentation namespace Root CIMv 2 to use the LocalSystem account This account is privileged and the provider may cause a security violation if it does not correctly impersonate user requests A provider WmiPerfClass has been registered in the Windows Management Instrumentation namespace root cimv2 to use the LocalSystem account This account is privileged and the provider may cause a security violation if it does not correctly impersonate user requests 6000 Microsoft Windows Winlogon Warning The winlogon notification subscriber lt GPClient gt was unavailable to handle a notification event 6001 Microsoft Windows Winlogon Warning The win
337. ror message Cause The format went wrong It is write protected or the floppy disk may be damaged Please check a floppy disk and perform creation of OEM Disk again Failed in the deletion of the file Please confirm whether the media is not write protected state or not The Flush FDD or the floppy disk is write protected Cancel write protected state If you have already canceled write protected state connect the USB floppy disk drive again 8 28 Troubleshooting Problems with Express Setup Specified to join the Domain but the system is installed as Workgroup When the setup fails to join the Domain during the installation it will install the system as Workgroup Open System in Control Panel to specify joining the Domain Unable to specify the details of Network adapter In Express Setup you can not specify the details of Network adapter Specify them from Control Panel after starting Windows There is unused area on the lead of HDD QO Did you install Windows Server 2003 If you had installed Windows Server 2003 by Express Setup the head 8MB of HDD may be unused area It is not a problem in operating the system Product key was not asked Q Case of Windows Server 2008 Ifyou install using BackUp DVD ROM product key is not required If you install using the DVD ROM other than BackUp DVD ROM product key screen is displayed twice at during OS installation and before
338. rs modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Enter Enter Select Win Select Save Start Step network fa ff doi aap foon Sita a0 su parses ap vied protocol account ponents tions setup Enter the settings of the network protocol Ifyou want to set the IP address select Customized settings and click Detail settings Mfnot select Standard setting and click Next standard setting O Cunina mering Detail settings Back Next Top Default Version 5 XX XXX XX XXX 13 Enter the domain or workgroup name to be used Enter domain account steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Mm Enter Enter Select Win Select Save Start Ste p network domain gt dows comm gt applicd gt parameters gt Exitess tions protocol account ponents setup Ifyou want to join in a domain enter the secount name password of the domain Ifnot selece Join in a workgroup and click Next F Joinin aworkgroup Workgroup name WORKGROUP F Joinin domain A E E Back Next Top Default Version 5 XX XXX XX XXX Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 17 14 Select the installing components Select Windows components steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next lt Full Installation gt NEC EXPRESS
339. rt the system Installing SCSI Controller Driver N8103 75 95 107 If you use the SCSI Controller N8103 75 95 107 you do not need to install the driver manually It is automatically installed by Windows Plug and Play Installing SAS Controller Driver N8103 104A If you use the SAS Controller N8103 104A you do not need to install the driver manually It is automatically installed by Windows Plug and Play E 30 Installing Windows Server 2008 About Windows Activation Windows Server 2008 must be activated before you can use Windows Server 2008 Windows activation process is as follows For a server running a full installation 1 Go to the Start menu and in the Run dialog box type slui and press Enter E Ron Xt Type the name of a program folder document or Internet resource and Windows will open it for you Open slui This task will be created with administrative privileges ox cane Browse IMPORTANT If the following message appears Windows has already been activated on your system Click Close to exit R windows Activation F x Z Si A Windows Activation Activation was successful Activation helps verify that your copy of Windows is genuine With ask for genuine Microsoft are Installing Windows Server 2008 E 31 2 Inthe following screen click Type a different product key R windows Activation xi The Windows Server Standa
340. rtition Specify medium Partition steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER step Ie a ow 3 5 Fee J pegin Specify the installing medium and the Windows syst 8 Refer to the User s guide sbout the Service Pack instal If Use existing partitions is selected EXPRESSBUILDER installs the Operating System to the lst partition Medium selection Windows family edition Windows Server 2008 Standard Full instalation jE English 5 rc Keyboard layout Defaut z Time zone 40960 AB 9 455MB 2 097 144MB 1GB 1 024MB Tor Default Version xXx xxx xx xxx Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 39 IMPORTANT m About partition size Specify the partition size larger than required minimum size for OS installation Do not specify larger partition size than the capacity of connected hard disk drive You can not specify a logical drive larger than 2 097 144MB at RAID system m If you select Create a new partition at Windows system drive settings the contents of the hard disk will be all deleted m If Use existing partitions is selected EXPRESSBUILDER installs the Operating System to the 1st partition 1st partition is deleted The data in the other partition is kept if the system has two or more partitions See the figure below First Second Third Par
341. rver automatically starts the self diagnostic program POST Power On Self Test When the POST detects any error it displays an error message and its measure on the display unit Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors However even when there is no hardware failure use of the keyboard or mouse at the following timing causes the POST to assume a keyboard controller error and stop processing Immediately after the server is powered Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to a keyboard instruction simultaneous key entry of Ctrl Alt Delete Immediately after the system is rebooted in response to an OS instruction m During hardware initialization following restart of the POST When the POST detects a hardware failure due to the above reason restart the server once again If the same error message reappears you may assume there is no hardware error To ensure normal operation of the server however make sure to follow the following restrictions m Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the memory count appears on the screen following the server power on m Do not make any keyboard entry or use the mouse before the start up message of the Configuration Utility appears on the screen following the server reboot IMPORTANT Take a note on the on screen message before contacting your service representative The alarm indication would be a great help for maintenance 8 6 Troubleshooting
342. rvice Pack 2 CD ROM Paging File Size Recommended Mounted Memory Size 1 5 Dump File Size Mounted Memory Size 12MB Application Size Required Size IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system m The maximum paging file size which can be set on one partition is 4095MB If the above paging file size exceeds 4095MB specify 4095MB for the paging file size m The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory mounted is 2048MB 12MB m If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs For example if the mounted memory size is 1GB 1 024MB the partition size will be calculated by the above formula as follows 3 500MB 1 024MB 1 5 1 024MB 12MB Application Size 6 072MB Application Size Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 59 Dividing into the partition of the recommended size into multiple disks as written below will solve problem that it cannot be reserved in one disk 1 Set the Size required for installation Paging file size 2 See Ch
343. s Select Advanced Peripheral Configuration and set up each device Internal Devices To install the RAID Controller card or SCSI controller card Select Advanced PCI Configuration PCI Slot n Option ROM Enabled n slot number To clear the hardware configuration data after installing removing internal devices Select Advanced Reset Configuration Data Yes and reboot Running the Server with the Fan Low speed Silent Mode To run the server with the fan set to low speed silent mode Select Server Fan Control Mode Low If a board is inserted in the server s PCI slot the fan cannot be set to low speed silent mode Saving the Configuration Data To save the current configuration data and exit from SETUP Select Exit Exit Saving Changes To discard changes to the current configuration data and exit from SETUP Select Exit Exit Discarding Changes To load the default setup Select Exit Load Setup Defaults To discard changes to the current configuration data Select Exit Discard Changes 4 8 Configuring Your Server To save the current configuration data Select Exit Save Changes Configuring Your Server 4 9 Menu and Parameter Descriptions The SETUP utility has the following six major menus m Main m Advanced m Security m Server m Boot m Exit To set minute functions select a submenu from the above menus The following describes available funct
344. s ecn a a e Gahanna tei RAR Ra eee A 9 2 Static Precautions y c c 05 cen WARE Ee ok a aE Ban ends weet pes RAR A rae Re 9 3 Preparing for Installation and Removal ccccesscesseeseceseceseceeecseecseeeseeeneeeeeseeeserenseeeseeneenaeenaes 9 4 Installation or Removal Procedure ccecceessessceseceeecesecesecssecseecseecseeeseceneseeeueeesereneeeseeeseeeenaees 9 5 DIDS COMER rect ieas lesen schist ieienes tases taser his aston c ice te aston g ch to2 2 tes ct acne begets ee 9 5 PrOnt BeZe ls ce casas teers tat satenn eck sta itetenct ig E lt te a ten os Matias aa Ss 2 9 9 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drive aeneae e a a aie r eaaa aia E E a e Ra ai 9 11 2 5 inch Hard Disk Drive Cage Option s ssssssesssssssssessrsessrerssstsreseeeessesressesersessrenessesresse 9 18 Use of Internal Hard Disk Drives in the RAID System ss essseeeseesessresersersreresersessrsessesees 9 23 Additional Battery for Optional RAID Controller ec eeceeecceeeeeceseeeeeseceeeeeceeeeeneeneeerenee 9 28 PCT Boat oi ic sscc ccc sectedecsecccceenia geben cee eck ggeoie E RE a eeeees anita E Aa eae estos tees 9 36 Installation of N8117 01A RS 232C Connector Kit ecccccccccceeseessceeecesecesecseeceeeseeneeeeeenes 9 43 DIMM pri piein n ave hint mies eatin a Sean nevi ae pea ee ed 9 45 File DeviCe vecisccceccss eecces shies E sided ts eek tens dec esseten Dela E E EE E EE HEE 9 50 Optical Disk Drive secs sccccc e0 dig ni iraani dicen tens cabiesendei E ve
345. sed gt 015 win winnt dotnet qfe cht kb921411 exe 4 When the following message is displayed click Next After that follow the message to continue the process Software Update Installation Wizard Use this wizard to install the following software update Hotfix for Windows Server 2003 KB921411 Before you install this update we recommend that you Back up your system Close all open programs You might need to restart your computer after you complete this update To continue click Next 5 When the following message is displayed make sure to click Finish to restart the system G 14 Installing Windows Server 2003 Software Update Installation Wizard Completing the Hotfix for Windows Server 2003 KB921411 Installation Wizard You have successfully completed the KB921411 Setup Wizard To apply the changes the wizard has to restart Windows To restart Windows automatically click Finish If you want to restart later select the Do not restart now check box and then click Finish With that application process of the Hotfix KB921411 is finished Application Process of Updating the System Updating the System applies the drivers necessary for NEC Express5800 Series Follow this process after Hotfix for Windows Server 2003 KB921411 had been applied NOTE If you install Windows CD ROM that contains Service Pack 2 to your system you do not have to apply Service pack 2 again
346. select the power saving mode with a command DISK ACCESS Lamp The DISK access lamp lights in green every time any of internal hard disk drive or optical disk drive is accessed Access Lamp The Access lamp for the optical disk drive lights when access is made to a media in the drive LINK ACT Lamp The link ACT lamp indicates the state of each network port normally equipped with the server If the power is supplied to the server and the hub and they are correctly connected with each other the lamp is lit green LINK state If information is transmitted through a network port the lamp blinks green ACT state If the lamp is not lit in the LINK state check the network cable and the cable connection If the lamp is not lit still after the checking the network LAN controller may be defected Contact your service representative 1000 100 10 Lamp The 1000 100 10 lamp indicates whether each of the network ports normally equipped with the server is operated through the 1 OOOBASE T 100BASE TX or 1OBASE T network interface If the lamp is lit orange the network port is operated through 1000BASE T If the lamp is lit green the network port is operated through 100BASE TX If the lamp is off the network port is operated through 1OBASE T Troubleshooting 8 5 ERROR MESSAGES If an error occurs in the server an error message appears on the display unit connected to the server Error Messages after Power on Powering on the se
347. sereseati a A A A EN e 2 12 SOCUPILY ee as nies Se RE RRA E E Se RU R ae BONE on aS 2 12 Running the Server with the Fan Set to Low speed Mode Silent Mode ccssesseeseees 2 13 NEC EXPRESSBUILDER 4 sescsiscocavtsgveues oo usaseves coon ve SENSE boos ean do theatlos Fans 2 13 NEC ESMERO osons oes had e dee AE Ohba wie dea ev courts en dacebgo E C 2 14 Maintenance Tools 22 0 scseaciedcsnciiteen omnia hen Rede edie eerie AS Ohare Pas 2 14 System Diagnostic Utility 0 0 ccc cccecccecssessesseeeeceseceseceaecsaecsaecseeeseeeaeeseeeeeeseeeseeeseseaeesaeenaeenaes 2 14 UW sine Y Our Servers E E ET TE A ET 2 15 POWER SLEEP Switi eiei pa aaa aiea A eaea a aE e aaie es 2 15 Power Off EEEE A E NEE E 2 19 SLELE S e a a aa aa E a A E A 2 19 Optical Disk Dive EE ERE E T 2 20 Blash FID D T E AE AE A AAEN PEE E EA EE EA T A E E TE 2 23 Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server cccccccceceesseeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseesseaeeeseeeseneeeeeeeees 3 1 SOM FO Worcs a a a Had eee kA oe Ba ee a we ee 3 2 UNPAGKING THE SYSTEM i ccoseaissescesectatheleud ses terviectaluescess ib tend scot oibleatelutatesaededhe vteseodivts 3 3 Selecting Server Site nuconecsen week Neieees wile da ciaested Gentencceshes aes ected hae obs Geeta ee 3 4 Connecting Peripheral Devicess we cisceseurceneai nares uti ater T he deen anit nee 3 6 Connectie Power Cordier E a E EE uae tie cnc E E I EE EE 3 8 Torning On the Serye scesi as e E E n R E E E A E ae 3 10 Installing
348. service representative IMPORTANT Before installing the operating system adjust the system date and time by using the BIOS setup utility SETUP See Chapter 4 for detail 5 2 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup About Express Setup Express Setup helps you to install the Windows Operating System The setup automatically configures the RAID System and installs the Operating System and some management software IMPORTANT Executing the Express Setup erases all data on the hard disk drive NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Mu Step ewer 3 gt The Parameter File Creator creates and modifies the parameters file To create a parameters file select Do not load a parameter To load a parameters file select Load a parameter Input the path of the parameters file Do not load parameters Load parameters Referer Version 5 XX XXX XX You can also use Parameter File at Express Setup in order to save or backup parameters for installation If you want to set up the server as before execute the Express Setup with the parameter file you have saved before NOTES m If you want to create a parameters file have a blank floppy disk MS DOS 1 44MB format ready m When using a floppy disk a Flash FDD or USB FDD is required m If you want to use the drivers located on the OEM Disk for Mass Storage Device that ships with optional boards a parameters file is mandatory m You c
349. ss S The driver you provided seems to be newer than the Windows default driver Windows already has a driver that you can use for Adaptec Ultra 320 SCSI Cards Windows64 bit Unless the device manufacturer prefers that you usethe driver on the floppy disk you should use the driver in Windows The screen of Step 5 is displayed Go to Step 10 lt If the SAS Controller N8103 104A is connected gt Press S IMPORTANT m Insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER into the floppy disk drive If the floppy disk drive has already contained Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER you do not need to insert the Windows Server 2003 x64 Edition OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER m If you have created the OEM Disk into the Flash FDD connect the Flash FDD before you start the system The screen of Step 6 is displayed Press Enter and go to Step 11 lt If the SAS Controller N8103 104A is not connected gt Press Enter and go to Step 12 A list of mass storage devices is displayed Select the LSI Fusion MPT SAS Driver Server 2003 x64 and press Enter The screen of Step 5 is displayed Press Enter and go to Step 12 F 10 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions 12 When the following message is shown press Enter to start Welcome to Setup Welcome to Setup IMPORTANT If you install Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions on the hard disk larger than 2 097 152MB
350. ss to the system Once the security measures are enabled access to the system is allowed only after the user enters the correct password s For example m Set and enable an administrative password m Set and enable a user password m Check the user account when entering the BIOS SETUP utility or booting the system General Description 2 13 Running the Server with the Fan Set to Low speed Mode Silent Mode The fan inside the server can be set to low speed silent mode as follows allowing the server to run much more quietly Setting the fan to low speed mode m Make sure that there is no board in the PCI slot of the server m Change the Fan Control Mode setting on the Server tab in the BIOS Setup utility from Normal to Low NOTE If a board is inserted in the PCI slot POST displays an error on the screen and the fan operates in Normal mode when the server starts up NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The DVD ROM that comes with the server contains a setup utility called NEC EXPRESSBUILDER The major functions of the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER are m To install the Operating System Express Setup helps you to install the Windows Operating System See Chapter 5 m To diagnose the system NEC EXPRESSBUILDER includes the System Diagnostics to check your server See Chapter 6 m To create a support disk Use this function to create the support disks used to boot the utilities from the floppy disk or the OEM disk used for
351. stallation Confirm these notes before starting the Express Setup About the Windows Family This computer supports the following Windows editions m Windows Server 2008 Standard 64 bit x64 Edition hereinafter referred to as Windows Server 2008 m Windows Server 2008 Standard 32 bit x86 Edition hereinafter referred to as Windows Server 2008 On installing other OS contact sales dealer or the maintenance service representative BIOS Settings Confirm the BIOS settings described in Chapter 4 before installing Windows Server 2008 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 29 Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to the server supports following combination of the OS installation media and Service Pack m Windows Server 2008 OS installation media with Service Pack 2 OS installation media No Service Pack Service Pack 2 OS installation media No Service Pack Supported Mass Storage Controllers The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system supports the following mass storage controllers for installation m Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup N8103 109 RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO0 1 5 6 N8103 116A RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO 1 N8103 117A RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO 1 5 6 Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID m Other controllers N8103 75 SCSI Controller
352. start the OS UO Isa floppy disk in the floppy disk drive Take out the floppy disk and restart the server Q Is the OS broken Use recovery process to recover the system QO Is the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD in the optical disk drive Take out the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD and restart the server 8 24 Troubleshooting The OS presents unstable operation Q Did you update the system Installing a network drive after installation of the OS may cause unstable operation Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD to update the system See Chapter 6 The system does not restart automatically when a stop error occurs though the system is adjusted to automatically restarting When the system does not restart automatically restart it manually The system restarts automatically when a stop error occurs though the system is NOT adjusted to automatically restarting There is no problem about this issue Check the System Event Log to confirm that STOP error occurred Cannot turn the power OFF at the blue screen If you want to turn off the power at the blue screen execute forced shutdown forced shutdown continue to press POWER SLEEP switch for 4 seconds The power will not be turned off if you press the switch for less than 3 seconds The PXE boot network boot fails or the server is not found on the network Q Is the cable connected properly Connect the proper cable to the network port on the rear
353. stem Windows NT stands for Microsoft Windows NT Server network operating system version 3 51 4 0 and Microsoft Windows NT Workstation operating system version 3 51 4 0 Windows Me stands for Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition operating system Windows 98 stands for Microsoft Windows 98 operating system Windows 95 stands for Microsoft Windows 95 operating system WinPE stands for Microsoft Windows Preinstallation Environment Momentary voltage drop prevention This product may be affected by a momentary voltage drop caused by lightning To prevent a momentary voltage drop an AC uninterruptible power supply UPS unit should be used Notes 1 No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of NEC Corporation 2 The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice 3 The contents of this manual shall not be copied or altered without the prior written permission of NEC Corporation 4 All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this manual If you notice any part unclear incorrect or omitted in this manual contact the sales agent where you purchased this product 5 NEC assumes no liability arising from the use of this product nor any liability for incidental or consequential damages arising from the use of this manual regardless of Item 4 PREFACE Congratulations on the purchase of your NEC Express server Purchase of
354. stem with Express Setup Network Monitor Utilizing Network Monitor helps you to investigate and manage with network trouble Network Monitor Setup Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 Microsoft Network Monitor allows you to examine and troubleshoot network problems NOTE Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 does not provide Network Monitor To use Network Monitor on Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 install Network Monitor by following the steps below 1 Download Microsoft Network Monitor from the following web site http support microsoft com kb 933741 en us 2 Run the downloaded file to start the installer Follow the on screen instructions to install Network Monitor NOTE If a Security Alert appears click Run Select Complete for a setup format 3 Network Monitor is installed NOTE To remove Network Monitor go to Programs and Features Network Trace Capture Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 On the Start menu start Microsoft Network Monitor 2 On Start Page select Create a new capture tab or select New in the File menu and click Capture A new tab for capturing a network trace is created On the Select Networks window select a network you want to capture a trace On the Capture menu click Start to start capturing a network trace On the Capture menu click Stop to stop capturing a network trace D oi e o On
355. t 13 Select the installing applications Select applications steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 Mi Parameter File Creator 5 x NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Enter Select Win Select Save Step domain dows c m applic gt pardingets account ponents tions gt Select an application to be installed The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP setting is required to install the NEC ESMPRO Agent In case you are using a disk driver which is not inched in EXPRESSBUILDER select Apply OEM Disk for mass storage device List of applications Selected applications Apply OEM Disk for mass storage device NEC ESMPRO Agent Universal RAID Ltiity Add gt lt lt Delete J Default Installing and Using Utilities 6 19 Windows Server 2003 MM Parameter File Creator NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Enter Select Win l Select Save Step domain dows c m account ponents applica jy lhe tions gt Select an application to be installed The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP setting is required to install the NEC ESMPRO Agent In case you are using a disk driver which is not included in EXPRESSBUILDER select Apply OEM Disk for mass storage device List of applications Selected applications Apply OEN Disk for mass storage device NEC ESMPRO Agent Universal RAID Utity Microsoft NET F
356. t operate if it is connected when the server is powered not applicable to USB devices Power of the server first and connect it properly Are the server drivers installed Refer to the manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse drivers are installed These drivers are installed along with the OS Some OS s allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings Refer to manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse settings are correct Fail to access read or write to the floppy disk Q m Does the floppy disk drive contain a floppy disk Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive until it clicks Is the floppy disk write protected Place the write protect switch on the floppy disk to the Write enabled position Is the floppy disk formatted Use a formatted floppy disk or format the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive Refer to the manual that comes with the OS for formatting a floppy disk Are the cables properly connected Make sure that the interface cable and the power cable or cord are connected to the correct connector of the server Also make sure the connection order is correct Is BIOS configuration correct You must change the BIOS configuration as follows to use the internal floppy disk drive lt Menus to check Main Legacy Diskette A 1 44 1 25MB 3 2 1 gt Save the setting and restart the server Run BIOS SETUP
357. t place any object on the power cord Do not bundle power cords Do not alter modify or repair the power cord Do not secure the power cord with staples or equivalents Do not use any damaged power cord Replace a damaged power cord with a new one of the same specifications Ask your service representative for replacement Do not use the attached power cord for any other devices or usage The power cord that comes with your server is designed aiming to connect with this server and to use with the server and its safety has been tested Do not use the attached power cord for any other purpose Doing so may cause a fire or an electric shock 1 6 Notes on Using Your Server Installation Relocation Storage and Connection A CAUTION Do not hold the front bezel to lift the server The front bezel may be disengaged SO Do not hold the front bezel to lift the server from the server causing personal injury Hold the server firmly by its bottom A NY Do not install the server in any place other than specified Do not install the server in the following places or any place other than specified in this manual Failure to follow this instruction may cause a fire a dusty place a a humid place such as near a boiler a place exposed to direct sunlight a an unstable place A S Do not use the server in the place where corrosive gases exist Make sure not to locate or use the server in the place where corrosive
358. t until the update completes Updating the system Performing Updating the System Please wait for a while Checking the OS information Updating the drivers Performing the end process of Updating the System 6 When the following message appears click OK to restart the system Updating the system xi Updating the System was finished y The setup reboots for installing the drivers ea The system has been updated Installing Windows Server 2008 E 23 DRIVER INSTALLATION AND ADVANCED SETTINGS This section describes on how to install and setup various standard drivers mounted on the device For the information on installing and setting up the driver that is not described in this section refer to the document attached to the driver LAN Driver and PROSet The LAN driver and PROSet have been installed automatically while your system was being updated in the previous section NOTE To change the LAN driver and PROSet settings log on to the system from a local console using an administrator account Remotely changing the settings by using the operating system s remote desktop feature is not supported Using N8104 125A Adapter after System Update To use the N8104 125A Adapter after updating your system you must first uninstall the LAN driver and PROSet and then update your system with the N8104 125A Adapter connected For a server running a full installation 1 Remove a team
359. talling SCSI Controller Driver N8103 75 107 If you use the SCSI Controller N8103 75 107 you do not need to install the driver manually It is automatically installed by Windows Plug and Play Installing SAS Controller Driver N8103 104A If you use the SAS Controller N8103 104A you do not need to install the driver manually It is automatically installed by Windows Plug and Play Setting for Solving Problems Setup your computer in advance so that it can recover from any trouble precisely and as soon as possible when it should occur For more information refer to Page 5 80 BitLocker For BitLocker hotfix is provided by Microsoft Before applying hotfix check the information written by Microsoft carefully For more information visit http support microsoft com kb 975496 en us 5 28 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Windows Server 2008 This section explains how to install Windows Server 2008 by using the Express Setup IMPORTANT The Scalable Networking Pack SNP function is disabled in the system that installed by Express Setup The setting of SNP function may affect the system performance so refer to the attention of SNP detail in the following site before setting it http www nec com global prod express NOTE If you install Windows Server 2008 without using Express Setup see Appendix E Notes on Windows Installation This section explains the notes on the Windows in
360. tart the system The screen of Step 6 is displayed Press Enter and go to Step 13 lt If the SAS Controller N8103 104A is not connected gt Press Enter and go to Step 14 13 A list of mass storage devices is displayed Select the LSI Fusion MPT SAS Driver Server 2003 32 bit and press Enter The screen of Step 5 is displayed Press Enter and go to Step 14 Installing Windows Server 2003 G 11 14 When the following message is shown press Enter to start Welcome to Setup Welcome to Setup IMPORTANT If you install Windows Server 2003 on the hard disk larger than 2 097 152MB 2TB you can specify only a value equal to or less than 2 097 152MB as partition size 15 When the installation of Windows Server 2003 has finished the system reboots automatically 16 When Windows Server 2003 R2 has been installed the Windows Setup screen will be displayed after logged on to the system Windows Setup x 4 Windows Setup is not complete We recommend that you continue Setup td so that you can install the additional components that are available in this version of the Windows Server operating system For more information about the new components see the documentation on Windows Server CD 2 To continue Setup insert Windows Server CD 2 or specify the location where the Windows Server CD 2 files ate stored and then click OK Location of Windows Server CD 2 files sis Browse IMPORTANT
361. tart the system Also add or delete any protocols and services if necessary You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from Network and Dial up Connection NOTE We recommend you to add Network Monitor at Adding Services Network Monitor can monitor the frame or the packet that the computer installing Network Monitor sends or receives This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble For information on how to install the tool see the Setting for Solving Problems described later in this chapter Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 23 Optional Network Board Driver N8104 121 125A 126 The drivers for Optional Network Board Driver N8104 121 125A 126 are automatically installed by Windows Plug and Play You do not need to install them manually Setup Team Adapter Fault Tolerance AFT is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the group when any trouble occurred on that adapter Adaptive Load Balancing ALB is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and enhances the throughput by operating packet transmission from the server by all the adapters This feature includes AFT feature Switch Fault Tolerance SFT is a feature that provides a failover relationship between two ports when each port is conn
362. te any protocols and services if necessary You can operate the process on the property dialog box for local area network which can be appeared from Network and Dial up Connection NOTE We recommend you to add Network Monitor at Adding Services Network Monitor can monitor the frame or the packet that the computer installing Network Monitor sends or receives This tool is valuable when analyzing network trouble For information on how to install the tool see the Setting for Solving Problems described later in this chapter Optional Network Board Driver N8104 121 125A 126 The drivers for Optional Network Board Driver N8104 121 125A 126 are automatically installed by Windows Plug and Play You do not need to install them manually Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 D 23 Setup Team Adapter Fault Tolerance AFT is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and automatically converts the process of the working adapter to the other adapter in the group when any trouble occurred on that adapter Adaptive Load Balancing ALB is a feature that creates a group containing more than one adapter and enhances the throughput by operating packet transmission from the server by all the adapters This feature includes AFT feature Switch Fault Tolerance SFT is a feature that provides a failover relationship between two ports when each port is connected to a separate switch SFT supports two ports
363. ted by BitLocker E 6 Installing Windows Server 2008 INSTALLING Windows Server 2008 Preparations for Installation NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard DVD ROM User s Guide Getting Started Windows Server 2008 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER Creating Windows Server 2008 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER In case using Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID create Windows Server 2008 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER before installation It does not need except for using Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID NOTE If you have already Windows Server 2008 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER for NEC Express5800 server in which you are going to install Windows Server 2008 you do not need to create it again NOTE What is OEM Disk m Incase of creating the disk for Windows Server 2008 64 bit x64 Edition It is called Windows Server 2008 x64 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER m Incase of creating the disk for Windows Server 2008 32 bit x86 Edition It is called Windows Server 2008 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER You can create Windows Server 2008 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two procedures Installing Windows Server 2008 E 7 Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER If you have only NEC Express5800 server to create Windows Server 2008 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER use this procedure If Wind
364. ted by the law to reproduce audio CD and the application without the permission of the writer except for the personal use m The data stored in DVD R DVD R or CD R may be destroyed partially or entirely due to write error To prevent the data loss observe the following instructions Quit the program including an application software that might consume a large amount of memory Disable the screen saver utility Quit the program to check the disk such as virus checker or system agency Disable the utility that might start during writing such as scheduler or timer Disable the power saving feature in power management Do not boot any application while writing 2 22 General Description Writing reading Time Fluctuation The optical disk drive has a feature to detect the disk condition and determine the optimum writing or reading speed for the disk Accordingly the time required for writing or reading data may not be constant depending on disk condition General Description 2 23 Flash FDD A Flash FDD is compatible with a floppy disk Only one Flash FDD can be connected to the USB connector of the server If a Floppy Disk Drive has been connected to the server be sure to disconnect it A CAUTION A SO Be careful so that the connected Flash FDD is not lost or stolen Loss theft or misappropriation of the Flash FDD as well as fraud involving the Flash FDD might cause personal data to be leaked
365. tem The steps vary depending on the edition you selected in step 9 If you have selected a full installation On the Initial Configuration Tasks window enter user information Specifying computer information Provide Computer Information PA Activate Windows Product 1D Not activated E settime zone Time Zone UTC 08 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada ORS configure networking Local Area Connection Not connected UAE Provide computer name and domain Full Computer Name WIN QISKAJAVAFS Workgroup WORKGROUP Update This Server Updating your Windows server 8B Enable automatic updating and feedback Updates Not configured Feedback Windows Eror Reporting off Not participating in Customer Experience Improvement Program BD Download and install updates Checked for Updates Never Installed Updates Never 3 Customize This Server Customizing your server amp Add roles Roles None at Add features Features None w Enable Remote Desktop Remote Desktop Disabled GHP Configure Windows Frewat Firewall Public On Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 D 17 Ifyou have selected a Server Core installation At the command prompt enter user information es Administrator C Windows system32 cmd exe C Users Administrator gt NOTE For more detailed procedure see the Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Step By Step Guide After installations is completed be sure to execute the
366. tem Diagnostics runs several tests on the server Select Tool menu Test and diagnostics in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to diagnose the system Test Items The following items are tested in system diagnostics Memory m CPU cache memory m Hard disk drive used as a system IMPORTANT When executing the system diagnostics make sure to disconnect the LAN cable Executing the system diagnostics with the LAN cable connected the network may be influenced NOTE On checking the hard disk drive no data is written into the disk 7 6 Maintenance Startup and Exit of System Diagnostics There are two ways to diagnose the server to use the local console keyboard of the server itself and to use the management PC via serial port remote console IMPORTANT If you run the system diagnostics from the remote console set the baud rate for both BIOS and terminal software to 19200 bps Procedures to start the diagnostics program are as follows 1 Shutdown the OS and power off the server Then unplug the power cord 2 Disconnect all the LAN cables from the server 3 Plug the power cord and power on the server 4 Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD to start the system 5 Select Tool menu Normal mode when local console of the server is used for or select Tool menu Redirection mode when remote console is used for NOTES m If the system displays the Language selection menu select English m I
367. tem information After all the system setup procedures are completed make backup copies of system information System information is required for recovering the server from the trouble or after replacing the system board Selecting the server site Select a suitable site for the server Setting Up Your Server 3 3 UNPACKING THE SYSTEM When you receive your system inspect the shipping containers prior to unpacking If the shipping boxes are damaged note the damage and if possible photograph it for reference After removing the contents of the containers keep the cartons and the packing materials If the contents appear damaged when you unpack the boxes file a damage claim with the carrier immediately INSTALLING OPTIONAL DEVICES To install any optional device see Chapter 9 Upgrading Your Server for the installation procedure Proceed to the next section if you have no optional devices to install IMPORTANT There are third party products memory modules hard disk drives etc available for the server in the markets However NEC recommends that you should use NEC products for stable operation NEC assumes no liability for data errors and failures due to malfunction of the server resulted from installation of those third party products 3 4 Setting Up Your Server SELECTING SERVER SITE Read the following precautions before selecting a suitable site for your server The following describes i
368. tfix is provided by Microsoft Before applying hotfix check the information written by Microsoft carefully For more information visit http support microsoft com kb 975496 en us D 6 Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 INSTALLING Windows Server 2008 R2 Preparations for Installation NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard DVD ROM User s Guide Getting Started Windows Server 2008 R2 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER Creating Windows Server 2008 R2 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER In case using Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID create Windows Server 2008 R2 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER before installation It does not need except for using Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID NOTE If you have already Windows Server 2008 R2 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER for NEC Express5800 server in which you are going to install Windows Server 2008 R2 you do not need to create it again NOTE What is OEM Disk m Incase of creating the disk for Windows Server 2008 R2 It is called Windows Server 2008 R2 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER You can create Windows Server 2008 R2 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER with the following two procedures Installing Windows Server 2008 R2 D 7 Create from the menu which appears when running NEC Express5800 Server with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER If you have only NEC Express5800 server to create Windows Server 2008 R2 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBU
369. th Service Pack2 9 400MB Full Installation Service Pack 2 or 2 200MB Server Core Installation 5 200MB Server Core Installation with Service Pack2 5 300MB Server Core Installation Service Pack 2 Paging file size recommended Installed memory size 1 5 Dump file size Installed memory size 300MB Application size Required size IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system m Depending on system configuration 4096MB or more per partition might not be able to be set to the paging file size Set it to 4095MB when the message to ask a value that is smaller than 4096MB is displayed m The maximum dump file size for the system with more than 2GB memory mounted is 2048MB 300MB m If you install any application program or the like add necessary space to the partition to install these programs Example The partition size required for a system with an installed memory size of 1GB 1 024MB and a full installation of the operating system 6 300MB 1 024MB 1 5 1 024MB 300MB application size 9 160MB application size If the partition where
370. the following issue in advance so that your computer can recover from any trouble precisely and as soon as possible when it should occur Memory Dump Debug Information This section describes the procedures for collecting memory dump debug information in the server IMPORTANT Cautions for the Memory Dump m The staff of maintenance service representative is in charge of collecting memory dump Customers need only to specify the memory dump m If any trouble occur after specifying the process below the message to inform that the system is in short of virtual memory may appear but continue to start the system If you restart the system in such case memory dump may not be stored correctly When the system is Windows Server 2008 R2 Follow the procedure below to specify 1 Click Start and select Control Panel The Control Panel window appears 2 Click System and Security and then select System NOTE If View by is not set as Category start System from Control Panel directly 3 Click Advanced system settings The System Properties dialog box appears Select Advanced tab Click Settings on the Startup and Recovery group box Modify Dump file in the Write debugging information group box and click OK e g Write the debug information in D drive with the file name MEMORY DMP D MEMORY DMP 11 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 81 NOTES m To specify
371. the server to an uninterruptive power supply UPS use service outlets on the rear of the UPS Refer to the manual that comes with the UPS for details m When the power cord from the server is connected to a UPS change the BIOS SETUP utility of the server to link with power supply from the UPS Change a parameter for AC LINK of the Server menu of the BIOS SETUP utility See Chapter 4 for details 3 10 Setting Up Your Server TURNING ON THE SERVER Turn on the server and follow the on screen instructions for setup 1 Make sure all external devices such as a video display keyboard and mouse have been connected and the power cords are connected Power on the video display and any other external devices Make sure that the floppy disk drive contains no floppy disk and the optical disk drive contains no bootable DVD CD ROM 4 Press the POWER SLEEP switch NOTES m If the power cord is connected to the power control unit such as the UPS turn on the power control unit m Connect the power cord and wait a few seconds before pressing the POWER SLEEP switch The POWER SLEEP switch does not work in a few seconds after connecting the power cord due to firmware start up POWER SLEEP switch POWER SLEEP lamp Ji Setting Up Your Server 3 11 The POWER SLEEP lamp on the front of the server comes on In a few seconds the NEC logo appears on the screen and the Power On Self Test POST begins
372. this server is your assurance of receiving state of the art high quality hardware to meet your needs both now and in the future Read this User s Guide thoroughly to fully understand handling of the NEC Express server and appreciate its functions to the maximum extent ABOUT THIS USER S GUIDE This manual is a guide for proper setup and use of your server This manual also covers useful procedures for dealing with difficulties and problems that may arise during setup or operation of your server Keep this manual for future use The following describes how to proceed with this manual How to Use This Manual To aid you in finding information quickly this manual contains the following information Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Server includes information that needs attention to use the server Make sure to read this chapter before setting up and using the server It also includes requirements and advisory information for transfer and disposal of the server Chapter 2 General Description includes information necessary to use the server such as names and functions of its components handling of the optical disk drive Chapter 3 Setting Up Your Server tells you how to select a site unpack the system make cable connections and power on your system Chapter 4 Configuring Your Server tells you how to configure the system and provides instructions for running the BIOS SETUP Utility and the RAID configuration utility which is used to
373. ting 8 9 DMI Event Log In the BIOS setup Server menu select DMI Event Logging select Enter which is next to View DMI event log and then press Enter The DMI event log saved in the system can be displayed Item Specific Help Event log validity valid View the contents of Event Log capability Space Available the DMI event Log View DMI event Log Event Logging Cenabled Clear all Event logs No DMI Event Log A 02 14 2010 09 13 24 System Boot 02 14 2010 10 08 52 System Boot Log Info 02 14 2010 16 48 24 System Boot 02 14 2010 16 58 41 SS Info 0095 02 14 2010 16 58 42 POST Error Log Info2 POST Error Code 0B00 f Continue 8 10 Troubleshooting DMI Event Log Messages Log info Log info2 Description Recommended action Memory Error Info Acorrectable error Restart the equipment and then run the Correctable 0100 occurred for DIMM 1 BIOS SETUP utility Check the DIMM status Error Info A correctable error DIMM Group 1 to 4 Status displayed in 0200 occurred for DIMM 2 Memory Configuration which is on the Error Info A correctable error Advanced menu 0300 occurred for DIMM 3 Check whether the DIMM for which the error Error Info A correctable error occurred is inserted correctly and then 0400 occurred for DIMM 4 restart the equipment If this does not resolve the problem contact you
374. tion memory dump to be taken also changes due to adding memory Verify the size of the empty space in the debugging information memory dump write destination drive 5 86 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 4 Specify Complete memory dump and modify Dump file in the Write debugging information group box e g Write the debug information in D drive write the file name MEMORY DMP D MEMORY DMP 5 Click Settings on the Performance group box The Performance Options window appears Click Advanced tab on the Performance Options window Click Change on the Virtual memory group box Modify Initial Size in the Paging file size for selected drive box to the value larger than the value of Recommended in the Total paging file size for all drives and click Set IMPORTANT m The above mentioned paging file size is recommended for collecting debug information memory dump The paging file with initial size large enough to store the dump file in the boot drive is required Correct debug information might not be able to be collected due to virtual memory shortage when the paging file is insufficient so set an enough size of the paging file with the entire system For more information on Recommended value see About the System Partition Size described earlier m Incase the memory is expanded re specify the paging file to suit the new memory size 9 Click OK The message
375. tition Partition Partition Deleted Retained Retained m You can not re install the system with the existing partition that is upgraded to Dynamic Disk remained Do not select Use existing partitions at Windows system drive settings 5 40 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 11 Enter the user information Enter basic parameters steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next MEC EXPRESSBUILDER OoOo OO i iE step eTo Jo Jo Fat 5 ge Back Next Top Default Version 5 XX XXX XX XXX IMPORTANT Computer name and Administrator password that satisfy the following conditions are required More than 6 characters Contains characters from three of the following categories numbers uppercase letters lowercase letters and signs Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 41 12 Enter the setting of the network protocol Enter Network Protocol steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Step o Jgh ag up foro oop ea lf Enter the settings of the network protocol Ifyou want to set the IP address select Customized settings and click Detail settings Inot select Standard setting and click Next standard setting C Cintai peat Detail settings Back Next Top Default Version 5 XX XXX XX XXX 13 Enter the
376. tor C Windows system32 cmd_exe C Users administrator gt NOTE For more detailed procedure see the Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Step By Step Guide After installations is completed be sure to execute the tasks described in Setup of Device Driver Normally Install in Server and Updating the System of this chapter E 20 Installing Windows Server 2008 Procedure for License Authentication Product Key used in the procedure for license authentication should be matched with the COA label in which the product key contained in Windows Server 2008 is written NOTES m Execute the activation within 60 days m COA label may be attached to your server Updating the System IMPORTANT Updating the System disables the Scalable Networking Pack SNP function The setting of SNP function may affect the system performance so refer to the attention of SNP detail in the following site before setting it http www nec com global prod express Update the system in the situation below m CPU is expanded expanded to single processor to multi processor m Modified system configuration m Recovered the system using recovery process The system update brings the correction program provided by Microsoft to be applied to reinforce the system security The system update is recommended Installing Windows Server 2008 E 21 Application Process of Updating the System Updating the System applies t
377. torun Menu This menu requires Microsoft Windows XP Vista or Windows Server 2003 or later You can create Windows Server 2008 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER from Autorun Menu if you have the computer on which the above operating systems operate Follow the steps below 1 Prepare one Flash FDD or 3 5 inch floppy disk 2 Start the Operating System 3 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive of the server The Menu will appear Connect the Flash FDD or insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive 5 Click Create drive disk and select OEM Disk for Windows Server 2008 NOTES m Incase of creating the disk for Windows Server 2008 64 bit x64 Edition select OEM Disk for Windows Server 2008 x64 m You can do the same operation with the menu appeared by the Right click 6 Windows Server 2008 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER will be created Write protect and attach a label then keep it safely Installing Windows Server 2008 E 9 Windows Server 2008 Clean Installation This section explains how to perform a clean installation of Windows Server 2008 IMPORTANT The installation procedure depends on your environment Follow steps below appropriate to your environment 1 Turn on your system IMPORTANT To install Windows Server 2008 you may need to update BIOS To check if your system needs a BIOS update go to http www nec com express Insert the Windows Server 20
378. troller To mother board wa To optional RAID LED cable Controller Red Black e TOTO ABE Ai RAID Controller N8103 116A 117A RAID Controller N8103 109 10 6 Internal Cabling Diagrams Connection of 5 25 inch Device The 5 25 inch device bay can be equipped with a SCSI device an IDE device or a USB device using internal connector Installation of SCSI Device The SCSI controller and the SCSI cable K410 160 00 used for the connection is sold separately If the SCSI cable K410 160 00 sold separately has the connector for terminating the SCSI connection make the termination setting of the 5 25 inch device invalid 5 25 inch device bay Mother board SCSI Controller SCSI cable Cm K410 160 00 Gs SATA cable for optical disk drive Internal Cabling Diagrams 10 7 Installation of SAS Device The SAS controller and the SAS cable used for the connection are sold separately Optical disk drive Mother board l J J device bay S
379. ts gt Physical Drive gt Port X Force Offline to cancel the hot spare setting m When two or more hard disk drives of the same capacity are assigned as hot spare rebuilding is performed in order starting from the one with the smaller CH number ID number Configuring Your Server 4 41 Check Consistency Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility y Perform Check Consistency y Exit LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility 1 Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility 2 Select Check Consistency from the TOP menu The Virtual Drives screen appears Move the cursor onto the virtual drive to be checked and press Space to select it When virtual drive has been selected press F10 to start consistency check A confirmation screen for execution appears Select Yes The consistency check starts When the progress bar in the Check Consistency Progress screen indicates 100 the consistency check is completed 6 Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility IMPORTANT m Be sure to execute Check Consistency after creating configuration m Be sure to execute Consistency Check if you have configured the RAID drives by Express Setup 4 42 Configuring Your Server Others m Clear Configuration Clears configuration information Select Configure gt Clear Configuration from the TOP menu Executing Clear Configuration cl
380. ts the following optional boards NOTE If you want to install the other boards by using a driver floppy disk OEM Disk for Mass storage device except ones listed below see Installing with the OEM Disk for Mass storage device and Installing Optional Mass Storage Driver of Parameter File Creator in Chapter 6 Controllers supporting installation of OS with Express Setup N8103 109 RAID Controller 128 MB RAID0 1 5 6 N8103 116A RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO 1 N8103 117A RAID Controller 128 MB RAIDO 1 5 6 Onboard RAID Controller LSI Embedded MegaRAID m Other controllers N8103 75 SCSI Controller N8103 95 SCSI Controller N8103 104A SAS Controller N8103 107 SCSI Controller Option G 2 Installing Windows Server 2003 Service Pack Which EXPRESSBUILDER Supports The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to the server supports following combination of the OS installation media and Service Pack m Windows Server 2003 R2 OS installation media with Service Pack 2 OS installation media No Service Pack Service Pack 2 OS installation media No Service Pack Application of Service Pack You can install the Service Pack on the server When the Service Pack is not attached to your system prepare it by yourself When installing Windows Server 2003 R2 it is not necessary to apply Service Pack 1 Updating System If you modified the Windows system execute Update
381. tware configurations failures and performance With log data collected by NEC ESMPRO a system administrator can track long term and short term performance monitor server usage and check server failure rates The administrator can use the information collected to create more efficient data routing procedures and optimize server usage Functions and Features The NEC ESMPRO offers many functions and features for managing remote servers across a network These features help the system administrator perform daily system operation system extension and transfer tasks Some features of NEC ESMPRO Manager include m Hardware and software server configuration Hardware resources mounted in servers such as the CPU memory disks RAID System and LAN boards Software resources such as operating system information and drivers running on each server m Server failures On screen real time displays provide the system administrator with the failure type location cause and suggested corrective action Failure data includes hardware failure information such as system board temperature memory failure crashes and software failure information m Performance NEC ESMPRO monitors server performance and displays server usage on the screen and displays information such as the rate of CPU load memory usage disk usage and LAN traffic Usage threshold values can help the system administrator monitor and prevent server over
382. u have everything and that individual components are not damaged If you find any component missing or damaged contact your service representative m Store the provided accessories in a designated place for your convenience You will need them to install an optional device or troubleshoot your server as well as to set it up m Make a backup copy of each provided floppy disk if any Store the original disk as the master disk in a designated place and use its copy m Improper use of any provided floppy disk or CD ROM may alter your system environment If you find anything unclear immediately ask your service representative for help CONTENTS PRELACE oii stifles A at eRe EE E tnt soars srt at lalate Wiese tata Te teres i About This Wser s Guide uke a a savas edie a a aa a a Ea e a E a aiT ii Niithe Packages RAEE TE T ESS iii Chapter 1 Notes on Using Your Servel cccccssseeeceseseeeeeseeeeeeeseeneeeeeseeeeeesesnensenssenens 1 1 Warming Labels ionnann a ek thin Rav E EE ET R hohe Re 1 2 Safety Notes onone e a a a eee idee RE wee ee aes ed ead 1 3 Generalsin a aS Goad MA aa as acne echt LNs a betes Site Carnet ot eRe 1 3 Power Supply and Power Cord Use 0 cccecccsscssseeeseeceeseecsecaeecseecaeeeneeeeeseeeeeeeseenaeenseenaeenseenaes 1 4 Installation Relocation Storage and Connection ccccccsseessesseeeseeeeceeecesceeeeeeeteeseenseenaes 1 6 Cleaning and Working with Internal Devices ceccceccesecssesseeceeseeeneeee
383. uctions may cause a fire personal injury or property damage See pages 1 3 to 1 8 for details Do not use any damaged cable connector Do not use any unauthorized interface cable Do not use the server with any loose interface connection Do not step on the interface cable or place any heavy object on it ope IMPORTANT m Power off the server and a peripheral device before connection Connecting a powered peripheral device to the powered server will cause malfunctions and failures m To connect a third party peripheral device or interface cable to the server consult with your service representative for availability of such a device or cable Some third party devices may not be used for the server m To connect the provided keyboard and mouse plug their connectors to the server with the A mark on the connectors facing right m Do not connect the serial ports with the telephone line directly Do not connect any devices to the connectors not instructed in this subsection Doing so could damage the device your server or both Setting Up Your Server 3 7 Device with the USB interface e g terminal adapter Finally connect the power cord to the receptacle ba e Keyboard FRONT 809080098090309089008 238383988 393938 39
384. ue of LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility and the display level of Universal RAID Utility Item Setting value of LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility Universal RAID Utility Level Rebuild Priority 15 to 100 High Rebuild Rate LSI Software 8 to 14 Middle RAID Configuration Utility 0 to7 Low Consistency Check Priority 15 to 100 High Chk Const Rate LSI Software 8 to 14 Middle RAID Configuration Utility 0to7 Low Configuring Your Server 4 45 The setting level of Universal RAID Utility and the setting value Setting level of Universal Item RAID Utility Setting value Rebuild Priority High 20 Rebuild Rate LSI Software Middle 10 RAID Configuration Utility Low 5 Consistency Check Priority High 20 Chk Const Rate LSI Software Middle 10 RAID Configuration Utility Low 5 NOTES m LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility can set FGI Rate Foreground Initialize and BGI Rate Background Initialize Priority But Universal RAID Utility can t set it m Universal RAID Utility can set Initialization Priority but it can t set it to the LSI Embedded MegaRAID Therefore Universal RAID Utility doesn t display Initialization Priority in the property of RAID Controller 4 46 Configuring Your Server CONFIGURING MOTHER BOARD JUMPERS You can use the following procedure to clear the CMOS data in the server IMPORTANT m Clearing
385. ull installation of the operating system 8 000MB 1 024MB 1 5 1 024MB 300MB application size 10 860MB application size If the provided partition size is smaller than that required to install the OS and paging file expand the partition size or utilize a larger disk If your system does not have a sufficient dump file size divide the required file space into multiple disks by performing the steps below 1 Set the system partition size to a size sufficient to install the OS and paging file 2 See Setting for Solving Problems to write the debug information of the dump file onto another disk If there is not enough disk space to write the debug information add another disk for the dump file 5 8 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup Flow of Setup EXPRESSBUILDER Loading parameters Step 2 Skip Next Select the operating system Step 3 Next RAID configuration Step 4 Next A Windows Confirm Setting Input Steps 5 to 10 Next Save parameters Step 11 Next Start Express Setup Step 12 Perform RAID Configuration Create the OS partition format Copying Windows driver 4 Remove the Floppy Disk and CD DVD ROM from the Drive Copying Selected Application Insert Windows DVD ROM Install OS Automatically Agree Software License Agreement zg Log on The installation is completed Process
386. uring the Windows installation About Removable Media Do not set removable media such as DAT and LTO into the device mounted on this computer during the Windows installation Connecting Hard Disk Drive Do not connect the other hard disk drives except the drive that you want to create the Windows system drive If you create multiple logical drives in your system see Re installing the Operation System if Multiple Logical Drives Exist 5 92 Re installing to the hard disk drive which has been upgraded to Dynamic Disk You cannot re install Windows Server 2003 with the current partition of the hard disk drive upgraded to Dynamic Disk kept remained If you want to keep the current partition remained see Appendix G to re install the system Peripheral Devices such as RDX Depending on your hardware configuration some peripheral devices need to be removed or disabled before starting setup Refer to the instruction manual which came with the peripheral device for pertinent information and proceed accordingly 5 58 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup About the System Partition Size The system partition size can be calculated from the following formula Size necessary to install the system Paging File Size Dump File Size Application Size Size necessary to install the system 3500MB Windows Server 2003 R2 3500MB Windows Server 2003 R2 with Service Pack 2 5300MB Windows Server 2003 R2 Se
387. urn on the power oF Oh Press F2 at the prompt to run the BIOS SETUP utility and select Load Setup Default at the Exit menu 4 48 Configuring Your Server Clearing Password 1 Or RLO N See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal as described in Chapter 9 of this guide to prepare Remove the side cover see Chapter 9 Check the location of jumper switch to clear the password Change jumper switch setting according to the figure on Page 4 46 Plug the power cord connect the keyboard mouse and display unit to your server then turn on the server POST stops at the error message shown below ERROR 8151 Password Cleared By Jumper Press lt F1 gt to resume lt F2 gt to Setup Turn off the power of the server and unplug the power cord from your server Restore the jumper strap removed in Step 4 Install the side cover and connect cables for peripheral devices and power cord Chapter 5 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup This section describes information on using Express Setup to install and configure the following operating systems to the server m Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard m Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard 64 bit x64 Edition m Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard 32 bit x86 Edition m Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition To use the server with the other operating systems described in this section contact your
388. urs from start You can use the Express Setup see Chapter 5 or the following functions from this menu Create the OEM Disk You can create the Windows OEM Disk to use at the Windows manual setup Load the driver This function is not usually used If you add the new device to the server this function may use See Chapter 5 6 4 Installing and Using Utilities m Tool menu Normal mode If you select this item the Tool menu appears TOOL MENU a Maintenance Utility H Updating S Startup FD and diagnostics nt Keturn to previous eee F a u These utilities are for maintenance and configuration J System information is displayed managed and set Maintenance Utility a BIOS and various firmwares are renewed in the BIOS FW Updating ROM DOS system can boot from a floppy disk made at ROM DOS Startup FD This computer and connected devices can be examined at Test and diagnostics BMC information is displayed and set in System Management Only when BMC is supported You can use the below functions for maintenance Maintenance Utility The Maintenance Utility is usually used by the service representative See Chapter 8 BIOS FW Updating You can update the system BIOS by using the floppy disk prepare a 3 5 inch floppy disk ROM DOS Startup FD The ROM DOS Startup FD is used for starting the ROM DOS system Test and diagnostics This functio
389. user s responsibility to completely erase or modify all the data stored in storage device such as hard disk drive so that the data cannot be restored m Your server contains some components that are only good for a limited period of time and require replacement such as fans internal batteries the internal optical disk drive the floppy disk drive and the mouse For stable operation of the server NEC recommends you replace these components on a regular basis Consult with your service representative for replacement or the product lives REGARDING THE TRANSPORTATION OF THIS SYSTEM This system and or associated options and accessories may be using lithium metal batteries or lithium ion batteries There may be restrictions regarding the air or sea transportation of such lithium batteries Please contact your service representative prior to transporting this system and or its options USER SUPPORT Before Asking for Repair do the following when the server appears to fail 1 Check if the power cord and the cables to other devices are properly connected 2 See Chapter 8 to find if your problem fits the description If it does take the recommended measure for it 3 Check if the software required for operation of the server is properly installed If the server still appears to fail after you have taken the above actions consult with your service representative immediately Take notes on lamp indications of the server and alarm indic
390. ust be removed to install or remove the 5 25 inch device and hard disk drive cage Removal Follow the procedure below to remove the front bezel 1 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare 2 Remove the side cover as described earlier in this chapter 3 Pull the release tabs 3 places at the left end of the front bezel toward you so that the tabs are removed from the frame of the server as shown in the figure below IMPORTANT If the tabs are pulled out toward you excessively the hooks fixing the right end of the front bezel will be damaged Only pull out the tabs a little 9 10 Upgrading Your Server 4 Remove the front bezel to the left to release the tabs on the front bezel from the server Installation The front bezel can be installed in the reverse order of the removal Insert the three tabs at the right end of the front bezel into the holes on the front of the server press the left end of the front bezel to the server and lock the mask with the release tabs Upgrading Your Server 9 11 3 5 inch Hard Disk Drive The 3 5 inch Hard Disk drive cage can contain up to four SATA hard disk drives IMPORTANT Do not use any hard disk drive that is not authorized by NEC Installing a third party hard drive may cause a failu
391. ve m Make sure to make a backup copy of your valuable data in the hard disk drive if any m Make sure not to apply a shock to hard disk drives to relocated the server if the contains any Take a media out of the server if any Power off the server the POWER SLEEP lamp goes off Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet Remove all the cables from the server oe 2 N a Hold the server by its bottom to carry the server IMPORTANT Do not hold the front bezel to lift the server The front bezel may be disengaged from the server causing personal injury 6 Protect the server with the shock absorbing materials and pack it securely 7 10 Maintenance This page is intentionally left blank Chapter 8 Troubleshooting If your server does not operate as expected read this chapter before assuming a failure NOTE For provision against an unexpected failure it is recommended to install NEC ESMPRO to your computer 8 2 Troubleshooting SYSTEM VIEWERS Monitor the occurrence of fault by NEC ESMPRO during the system operation Especially take note on whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the language PC Check whether any alert is reported on NEC ESMPRO Manager Example Bemis j Ordian J Ooie Uweed tient Head Uerwet owe rr tist gt IMER an Pate Cuca g Grower Sanu ontng a rnd E O bteman st ierra sabe rant te pam
392. ve has been selected press F10 to start rebuilding 6 When confirmation screen for execution appears Select Yes The rebuild process starts When the progress bar in the Rebuild Physical Drives in Progress screen indicates 100 rebuilding is completed 7 Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility Configuring Your Server 4 39 Setting Hot Spare Install a hard disk drive y Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility y Set for hot spare y Exit LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility 1 Install a hard disk drive to be used as hot spare and then turn on the server Run LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility Select Objects gt Physical Drive from the TOP menu The Objects PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU screen appears r Objects PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU PORT ONLIN A00 00 Move the cursor onto the hard disk drive to be used as hot spare and press Enter The Port X screen appears Select Make HotSpare A confirmation screen appears Select Yes The hard disk drive indication is changed to HOTSP 4 40 Configuring Your Server 7 Press Esc to return to the TOP menu and exit LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility m Objects PHYSICAL DRIVES SELECTION MENU PORT ONLIN A00 00 ONLIN A00 01 oO IMPORTANT m Select Objec
393. vent ID Description Event Type Event Source Event Category Event ID Description Event Type Event Source Event Category Event ID Description Event logs in using Intel Network adapter teaming Warning iANSMiniport None 11 Adapter link down Intel R Warning iANSMiniport None 13 Intel R has been deactivated from the team Warning iANSMiniport None 16 Team Name The last adapter has lost link Team network connection has been lost Warning iANSMiniport None 22 Primary Adapter does not sense any Probes Intel R Possible reason partitioned Team Above mentioned event log will appear when the system starts There is no problem in LAN driver operation Troubleshooting 8 17 Problems with Windows The following warnings are logged when you start Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 Event ID Source Level Description 27 el qexpress Warning Intel R 82574L Gigabit Dual Port Server Network Network link has been disconnected Ifthe above event is logged when you start the system this event does not affect system operation Ignore this message Event ID Source Level Description 63 Microsoft Windows WMI Warning A provider Ncs2 has been registered in the Windows Management Instrumentation namespace Root InteINCS2 to use the LocalSystem account This account is privileged and the provider may cause a secu
394. vices specified as the horspare The number of the free physical devices Back Next 11 Top Default Version 5 XX XXX XX CRXX Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 5 13 NOTES m You can use only the physical devices that have same model number to configure logical drive m Ifthe process is not finished normally the driver may not be stored in the EXPRESSBUILDER Refer to Optional Board Supported by NEC EXPRESSBUILDER described earlier in this chapter 10 Specify the installing medium and the Windows system partition Specify medium Partition steps are displayed Confirm the parameters modify if necessary and then click Next NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top menu Load Select OS Enter RAID Specify Enter basic Step parame settings medium gt parameters n gt partition Specify the installing medium and the Windows syste Refer to the Users guide al If Use existing partitions is selected EXPRESSBUILDER installs the Operating System to the 1st partition 33000 Me 14 737MB 1 907 726MB 1GB 1 024MB 5 14 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup IMPORTANT m About partition size Specify the partition size larger than required minimum size for OS installation Do not specify larger partition size than the capacity of connected hard disk drive You can not specify a logical drive larger than 2 097 144MB at RAID system m
395. visor and User With the Supervisor password you can view and change all system parameters of the BIOS Setup utility With the User password system parameters available for viewing and changing are limited m Do not set any password before installing the OS m The server contains the latest version of the BIOS Setup utility Dialog boxes appear on your BIOS Setup utility thus may differ from descriptions in this manual If you find anything unclear see the online help or ask your service representative Configuring Your Server 4 3 Starting SETUP Utility When you turn on the server the NEC logo appears first The POST Power On Self Test screen might appear first depending on the SETUP settings The following message then appears at bottom left of the screen Message displayed when the NEC logo appears Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP or Press lt F12 gt to Network l Message displayed when the POST screen appears Press lt F2 gt to enter SETUP lt F10 gt Boot menu lt F12 gt to boot from Network If you press F2 while the above message is displayed the SETUP utility will launch and its main menu will be displayed If you have previously set a password with the BIOS Setup utility the password entry screen appears Enter the password Enter password Up to three password entries will be accepted If you fail to enter the password correctly for three consecutive times the server halts You
396. ware RAID Configuration Utility lt Menus to check Top menu Objects Adapter Auto Rebuild gt Troubleshooting 8 31 A hard disk drive fails Contact your service representative Physical device is not correctly displayed on Universal RAID Utility Ifyou use LSI Embedded MegaRAID a part of information on a physical device is not correctly displayed on Universal RAID Utility It is no problem 8 32 Troubleshooting Problems with Windows Autorun Menu Cannot read online document Q Do you have Adobe Reader installed correctly in your system Some online documents are supplied with PDF format To read the document of PDF format Adobe Reader is required in your system Q Is the operating system Windows XP SP2 With Windows XP SP2 the following information may appear in browser To help protect your security Internet Explorer has restricted this file from showing active content that could access your computer Click here for options 1 Click the Information Bar The shortcut menu appears 2 Click Allow blocked content The security alert dialog box appears 3 Click Yes on dialog box The menu fails to appear Q Is your system Windows XP or later or Windows 2003 or later The Windows Autorun menu is supported by Windows XP Windows 2003 or later If your system runs on Windows Autorun Menu on Windows 2000 system you need to setup IE6 0 before using Windows Autorun
397. wing list Setting item Change setting Wake On Directed Packet ON or OFF Wake On Magic Packet ON Wake on Magic Packet from power off state ON Wake on Link OFF IMPORTANT DirectedPacket will not wake up the system on Shutdown state even Wake On Directed Packet is setting to ON Only on Sleep or Hibernate state will wake up by a DirectedPacket NOTES m Power Saver Options setting is not necessary to change m Above setting will be maintained until manually resetting are executed IMPORTANT The parameters of Wake On LAN will not exist if the network ports are not available for WOL 4 Click OK 5 Restart the system Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions F 27 Graphics Accelerator Driver If you utilize standard graphics accelerator drivers update your system with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD attached to your system Standard graphics accelerator drivers will be installed automatically Observe the following procedure when you want to reinstall the driver individually 1 Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER DVD into the optical disk drive If the autorun menu is displayed close menu screen Click Start menu point to Programs Accessories and click Windows Explorer Run setup exe in the following directory 015 win winnt w2k3amd video 4 Follow the message to continue the installation If the dialog message Digital Signature could not bee
398. with 1 You can see a number of Logical Drive where Number in the property of Logical Drive on RAID Viewer Also you can see the number of Logical Drive managed by LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility where ID in the property of Logical Drive by Universal RAID Utility 4 44 Configuring Your Server Disk Array LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility manages Disk Array by a number beginning with 0 You can see a number of Disk Array where Axx of Objects PHYSICAL DRIVE SELECTION MENU DG X in Objects menu Universal RAID Utility manages Disk Array by a number beginning with 1 You can see a number of Disk Array where Disk Array in the property of Logical Drive on RAID Viewer Physical Drive and Physical Device LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility manages Physical Drive by ID You can see ID of Physical Drive where Port of Objects PHYSICAL DRIVE SELECTION MENU DG X in Objects menu Universal RAID Utility manages Physical Device by a number beginning with and ID The ID is same value of ID on LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility You can see a number and ID of Physical Device where Number and ID in the property of Physical Device on RAID Viewer Setting of Priority LSI Software RAID Configuration Utility displays and sets Rebuild Priority and Consistency Check Priority of RAID Controller by percentage But Universal RAID Utility uses three levels as High Middle Low for them The setting val
399. ws Server 2008 R2 Enterprise operating system Windows 7 stands for Microsoft Windows 7 Professional operating system Windows Server 2008 stands for Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard operating system and Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Enterprise operating system Windows Vista stands for Microsoft Windows Vista Business operating system Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions stands for Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard x64 Edition Operating system and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise x64 Edition operating system or Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard x64 Edition operating system and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise x64 Edition operating system Windows Server 2003 stands for Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition operating system and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition operating system or Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition operating system and Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition operating system Windows XP x64 Edition stands for Microsoft Windows XP Professional x64 Edition operating system Windows XP stands for Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition operating system and Microsoft Windows XP Professional operating system Windows 2000 stands for Microsoft Windows 2000 Server operating system and Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server operating system and Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional operating sy
400. xecute the following command lt When Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions is used gt 015 win winnt w2k3amd qfe enu kb921411 exe 4 When the following message is displayed click Next After that follow the message to continue the process Software Update Installation Wizard Use this wizard to install the following software update Hotfix for Windows x64 KB921411 Before you install this update we recommend that you Back up your system Close all open programs You might need to restart your computer after you complete this update To continue click Next 3 Cancel F 14 Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions 5 When the following message is displayed make sure to click Finish to restart the system Software Update Installation Wizard Completing the Hotfix for Windows x64 KB921411 Installation Wizard You have successfully completed the KB921411 Setup Wizard To apply the changes the wizard has to restart Windows To restart Windows automatically click Finish If you want to restart later select the Do not restart now check box and then click Finish With that application process of the Hotfix KB921411 is finished Installing Windows Server 2003 x64 Editions F 15 Application Process of Updating the System Updating the System applies the drivers necessary for NEC Express5800 Series Follow this process after Hot
401. xhaust opening on the rear of the server with a dry cloth Cleaning the Keyboard Mouse Make sure that the server and peripheral devices are all off powered the POWER SLEEP lamp goes off and then wipe the keyboard surface with a dry cloth The mouse does not work normally if its optical sensor is stained Wipe the optical sensor with a dry cloth Optical sensor 7 4 Maintenance Cleaning Disc A dusty disc or dust accumulated tray causes the device to fail to read data correctly Follow the procedure below to clean the tray and disc regularly 1 2 Make sure that the server is powered the POWER SLEEP LED is lit Press the CD tray Open Close button on the front of the optical disk drive The tray opens Hold the disc lightly and take it out from the tray NOTE Do not touch the signal side of the disc with your hand Wipe the tray with a dry soft cloth IMPORTANT Do not wipe the lens of the optical disk drive Doing so may damage the lens and may cause a malfunction of the drive Push on the tray front to close the tray Wipe the signal side of the disc with a dry soft cloth IMPORTANT Wipe disc from the center to the outside Use only disc cleaner if necessary Cleaning a disc with record spray cleaner benzene or thinner causes damage to the disc contents At worst inserting the disc into the server may cause failure Maintenance 7 5 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS The Sys
402. xpansion PCI e PCI X slots for add in boards three PCI EXPRESS slots and one 32 bit 33 MHz slot Onboard enhanced serial ATA RAID Controller Onboard 1000 100 10 network controller Integrated optical disk drive Four hard disk drive slots Embedded PC compatible support serial mouse keyboard USB LAN and video High degree of SATA hard disk drive fault tolerance and advanced RAID management features through the use of RAID Technology General Description 2 3 SYSTEM CHASSIS Names and functions of the components are shown below Front View 2 4 General Description 1 Front bezel Open the door when accessing the file bay Remove the front bezel when installing removing the 5 25 inch device optical disk drive and hard disk drives 2 Front USB connector Connect the USB device to this connector 3 Optical disk drive The optical disk drive reads data from the inserted CD ROM or DVD ROM The drive is equipped with the following e Open Close button to eject the tray e Access lamp that indicates the disk access status e Emergency hole to forcibly eject the tray 4 5 25 inch device bay One backup file devices of 5 25 inch width such as DAT drive or
403. xxx properties Click Teaming tab and check the Team this adapter with other adapters check box Click New Team Fill the name of the team in Specify a name for the team and click Next Include the adapter to the team and click Next 5 52 Installing the Operating System with Express Setup 6 Select a team mode and then click Next IMPORTANT Following team types are supported m Adapter Fault Tolerance m Adaptive Load Balancing m Static Link Aggregation Switch Fault Tolerance Click Finish Click TEAM Team name from Device manager Network adapters to modify the team Click Settings tab and click Modify Team button 9 Refer to the following procedure to set the team member adapter priority status Set Primary Point the adapter and click Set Primary button Set Secondary Point the adapter and click Set Secondary button NOTE Adapter priority config can be confirmed by the following procedure 1 Click TEAM Team name from Device manager Network adapters 2 Click Settings and confirm Adapters in team list 10 Click Test Switch Run test to confirm the adapter team is properly setup Confirm the result in Test results 11 Restart the system Remove Team Open the Device Manager Click Network adapters and open TEAM Team name properties Click Setting tab Click Remove Team button Click Yes to the message
404. y IMPORTANT About data on the hard disk drive Be sure to take appropriate measures not to leak important data e g customers information or companies management information on the removed hard disk drive to any third parties Data seems to be erased when you empty Recycle Bin of Windows or execute the format command of the operating system However the actual data remains written on the hard disk drive Data not erased completely may be restored by special software and used for unexpected purposes It is strongly recommended that the software or service both available at stores for data erasure should be used in order to avoid the trouble explained above For details on data erasure ask your sales representative Provided software To transfer or sell any software application that comes with the server to a third party the following requirements must be satisfied m All provided software applications must be transferred and no backup copies must be retained m Transfer requirements listed in Software License Agreement that comes with each software application must be satisfied m Software applications that are not approved for transfer must be uninstalled before transferring the server Notes on Using Your Server 1 11 DISPOSAL AND CONSUMABLES m Dispose of the server all the internal devices floppy disks CD ROMs and batteries according to all national laws and regulations IMPORTANT It is the
405. y remove it for this step Browse OK Cancel 6 Insert the Windows Server 2008 OEM Disk for EXPRESSBUILDER and press Browse Installing Windows Server 2008 E 11 7 Browse for Folder window is displayed lt Windows Server 2008 64 bit x64 Edition gt Select lt floppy disk drive gt OEM Disk ws2008x64 megasr1 and press OK lt Windows Server 2008 32 bit x86 Edition gt Select lt floppy disk drive gt OEM Disk ws2008 megasr1 and press OK 8 Select LSI Embedded MegaRAID and press Next 9 Enter your product key and then click Next oN ai Type your product key for activation You can find your product key on your computer or on the installation disc holder inside the Windows package Although you are not required to enter your product key now to install failure to enter it may result in the loss of data information and programs You may be required to purchase another edition of Windows We strongly advise that you enter your product identification key now The product key sticker looks like this Product key dashes will be added automatically Automatically activate Windows when I m online What is activation Read our privacy statement 1 Collecting information 2 Installing Windows E 12 Installing Windows Server 2008 10 Select the edition of the Windows operating system that you purchased Select I have selected the edition of Windows that I purc
406. y slots 1 and 2 3 and 4 The following table lists an example of the relationship between the installation condition and the dual channel memory mode Installation Bual ehanne Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 example memory mode 1 Active ee eles 1GB None None 2 Active 1GB 1GB 2GB 2GB factory installed 3 Inactive ice None None None factory installed 4 Inactive oB 1GB 1GB None factory installed 9 48 Upgrading Your Server Installation Install a DIMM in the following procedure 1 See the section Preparing for Installation and Removal described earlier to prepare 2 Remove the side cover as described earlier in this chapter 3 Firmly hold the server with your both hands so that its left side faces upward and bring it down slowly and gently 4 Open the levers at both ends of the socket 5 Push the DIMM to the socket straight If the DIMM is inserted into the DIMM socket the lever is automatically closed Key slot Key IMPORTANT To avoid damaging the lever do not apply an excess force to the lever NOTE Use extreme care when installing a DIMM Applying too much pressure can damage the socket Keyed DIMMs insert only one way 6 Close the lever securely 7 Install the remove components Turn on the power of the server Make sure that no error message appears in the POST If an error message appears write down the message and cont
407. ying the Drive Letter Be careful that the drive letter of the system or boot volume cannot be modified with the following procedure lt Windows Server 2008 R2 Windows Server 2008 gt 1 2 3 Click Start menu right click Computer and specify Manage to start Server Manager Specify the Storage Disk Management in the left side of the window Right click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the Change Drive Letter and Paths Click Change Choose the Assign the following drive letter and specify the drive letter you want to assign Click OK If the following message appears click Yes Some programs that rely on drive letters might not run correctly Do you want to continue Close the Server Manager lt Windows Server 2003 gt 1 Click Start menu right click My Computer and specify Manage to start Computer Management Specify the Disk Management in the left side of the window Right click the volume you want to modify the drive letter and specify the Change Drive Letter and Paths Click Change Choose the Assign the following drive letter and specify the drive letter you want to assign Click OK If the following message appears click Yes Changing the drive letter of a volume might cause programs to no longer run Are you sure you want to change this drive letter Close the Computer Management
408. ystem drive settings c 2 part pa Create a new partition all of the data in the disk is erased ze as possible Specify the size of the system partition 40960 MB 180MB 2 097 144MB 1GB 1 024MB Top Default Installing and Using Utilities 6 13 Windows Server 2003 rameter File Creator EXPRESSBUILDER Load Select OS Enter RAID city Enter Step paramel rs settings network a gt protoc l Specify the installing mediom and the Windows system partition 22 Refer to the User s guide about the Service Pack installation IE Use existing partitions is selected EXPRESSBUILDER installs the Operating System to the lst partition m Medium selection Windows family edition Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition English z m Keyboard layout Defaut z Time zone 8 00 Pacific Time US and Canada p Windows system drive settings IMB 1GB 1 024MB Default 6 14 Installing and Using Utilities IMPORTANT m If you install Windows Server 2003 R2 and Service Pack apply Windows Server 2003 R2 DISC 2 after Express Setup completion and then install Service Pack by Updating the system m About partition size Specify the partition size larger than required minimum size for OS installation Do not specify larger partition size than the capacity of connected hard disk drive You can not specify a logical drive larg

NEC Express5800/GT110b User's Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents